Home

Yokogawa WT110 Digital Power Meter

1. Operating Procedure 1 SETUP C 5 5 N 1 A RANGE gt N Seii rns m M V VA 1 2 3 E GAUTO o auToO o V OVER LL L L L k A Var Function ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays A OVER l L L Lt J M W Time MODE TRIG relevant MODE g keys and nus m V PF 12305 y 7N ENTER indicator C3 V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ E INTEGRATOR canc MW 96 START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET e UL mv H 12 3 5 9 I LOCAL SETUP e k A h Function ELEMENT L J J M W ht INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT c3103W 393W SCALING c3 AVG FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL HARMONICS c33064W o 3V3A WIRING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Setting the Scaling Value of the E
2. Relevant Keys A hour min SAMPLE wer M V VA 12 3 x AUTO AUTO c3 V OVER L L k A Var Function ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays SABER J J IN L Lt M W Te woe TRIG relevant wo keys and AMS M V PF 12345 SP us LENTES indicator c3 V MEAN fri Fri ri L k A deg FUNCTION ELEMENT e INTEGRATOR zr m MW START STOP RESET HARMONCS MEMORY INTEG SET c m V H 12 3 r a k Ah Function ELEMENT LOGAN SETUP J l im rj J M W h CJ CJ INTERFACE OUTPUT 193W 363W c3 SCALING AVG FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL HARMONICS c3364W c33V3A Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Selecting the Integration Mode Selecting the mode 1 Display C 3 Display C 5 RESET gt Ao dE gt ENTER nar ENTER SHIFT INTEGSET 2 gi End Lone E nEr v dHti nE i
3. 1 Display C Display C SETUP FLE 3 BER 2 WEM Selecting the type A H u gt ENTER 1 on 5 Display B 7 Vil GERLE ESPE ETER T ty ape i v f HE Ein A EP pa ERE ij a ee f Selecting the sample number Display C 9 H ENTER X I5 End v dg ij 54 Averaging ON OFF Selecting the averaging function 1 Display C SETUP adr FLE s Display C 5 AHG gt ENTER 7 OFF T ENTER l SEALE sb aac em f E n YPE PnLr5b f cs AREH 4 10 IM 253401 01E 4 6 Using the Averaging Function Explanation About the Averaging Function This function performs exponential averaging or moving averaging on measurement values When the displayed values are unsteady due to big fluctuations in power source or load or due to the low frequency of the input signal this function is useful to stabilize the displayed values for easier reading Selecting the Type of Averaging The following two selections are available The initial value is Lin Exponential Averaging EP Exponential averaging is expressed by the following equation Dn Dn 1 Mn Dn 1 K where Da the value at the n th display Dna the exponentially averaged value at the n 1 th display Mn the measurement value at the n
4. d y O STATe lt Space gt OFF CoN NR MODE t lt space gt _ SINGIe E gt NCHannel x FUNCtion lt Space gt lt Normal meas function gt OFF THReshold lt Space gt lt NRf gt e 4 HCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion lt Space gt H ic analysi F lt NRf gt lt NRf gt pereant x FUNCHion _ lt Space gt nansa Pre Onan Lane ELEMent gt lt x gt ORDer J lt x gt THReshold lt Space gt lt NRf gt eee DISPlay Space 4 lt NRf gt RELay RELay DISPlay Function Queries all settings relating to the comparator Function Sets the comparator display OFF or in case of ON function the channel to be displayed queries the current setting Syntax RELay Syntax RELay DISPlay lt NRf gt CHANnel lt 1 4 gt OFF Example RELAY gt RELAY STATE 0 MODE SINGLE NCHANNEL1 RELay DISPlay FUNCTION V 1 THRESHOLD lt NRf gt 1 to 4 channel 600 0E 00 RELAY NCHANNEL2 Example RELAY DISPLAY 1 FUNCTION A 1 THRESHOLD RELAY DISPLAY RELAY DISPLAY 1 20 00E 00 RELAY NCHANNEL3 FUNCTION W 1 THRESHOLD RELay HCHannel lt x gt 200E 03 RELAY NCHANNEL4 Function Queries all settings related to relay output items in FUNCTION PF 1 THRESHOLD case of harmonic analysis 000E 00 RELAY HCHANNEL1 FUNCTION Syntax RELay HCHannel lt x gt V
5. A hour min ca SAMPLE mv VA 1 2 3 x AUTO AUTO S V OVER k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays ES M W TME MODE TRIG relevant moe 5 keys and AMS mv PF 123xr jer indicator 2 V MEAN k A deg FuncTion ELEMENT z5 2 INTEGRATOR coc MW START STOP RESET HARMONCS MEMORY INTEG SET fo hour min sec REMOTE mvH 123r LOCAL SETUP k A fh jruwcroN ELEMENT INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT MW ht 163W 303W WIRING SCALING AVG COFILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS 304W ca 3V3A Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure 1 Selecting the Display Function Pressing the FUNCTION key on display A will select TIME integration elapsed time Pressing the FUNCTION key on display C will select either Wh Whz power or Ah Ah uone4Beju Hg current Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION A E mERI UNO mM IUMM mE d FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION c y A w 9 V Hz 9 A Hz Wh FUNCTION Wh FUNCTION wv P amp A Wh FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION Pay
6. IRTime lt Space gt L lt NRf gt I O 4 lt NRf gt gt Character string AOUTput AOUTput IRTime Function Queries all the settings relating to D A output Function Sets the preset integration time for D A output of Syntax AOUTput integrated values or queries the current setting Example AOUTPUT E AOUTPUT CHANNEL1 V 1 CHANNEL2 V 2 Syntax AOUTput IRTime lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt String gt CHANNEL3 V 3 CHANNEL4 V SIGMA CHANNEL5 A 1 lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0 to 999 59 CHANNEL6 A 2 CHANNEL7 A 3 CHANNEL8 A SIGMA lt String gt HHH MM HHH hour MM minutes CHANNELS W 1 CHANNEL10 W 2 CHANNEL11 W 3 Example AOUTPUT IRTIME 1 0 CHANNEL12 W SIGMA AOUTPUT IRTIME 1 0 AOUTPUT IRTIME 2 00 AOUTPUT IRTIME gt AOUTPUT IRTIME 2 0 AOUTput CHANnel lt x gt Function Sets the D A output item or queries the current AOUTput PRESet setting Function Initializes the output items for D A output Syntax AOUTput CHANnel lt x gt normal measurement Syntax AOUTput PREset NORMal INTEGrate function NR ELEMent 1 3 SIGMa OFF NORMal default for normal measurement x 1 to 12 in case of DA12 INTEGrate default for integration 1 to 4 in case of DA4 Example AOUTPUT PRESET NORMAL normal measurement function gt V A W VA VAR Description Refer to page 10 4 for a description of default D A PF DEGRee VHZ AHZ WH WHP WHM AH A
7. D2 D1 D1 D2 D1 Overview of the Error Queue The error queue stores the error No and message when an error occurs For example when the built in battery has run out an error occurs and its error No 901 and message Backup Failure will be stored in the error queue The contents of the error queue can be read using the STATus ERRor query As with the output queue messages are read oldest first newest last refer to the previous page If the error queue becomes full the final message will be replaced by message 350 Queue overflow The error queue is emptied in the following cases in addition to when read out is performed When the CLS command is received When power is turned ON again To see whether the error queue is empty or not check bit 2 EAV of the status byte IM 253401 01E App2 39 Z spueuuulo uoneoiunuluo2 Appendix 2 5 Sample Program Appendix 2 5 Sample Program This section describes sample programs for a IBM PC AT and compatible system with National Instruments AT GPIB TNTIEEE 488 2 board Sample programs in this manual are written in Quick BASIC version 4 0 4 5 NK KKK KKK KKK RK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck kckckck ck ck ck KKK ck ck ck ck kck ck ckck ck ck kckckck ck KKK kokok WT110 WT130 x ME After having set the measurement conditions measurement range bi R output the following data voltage V current A active
8. A hour min SAMPLE _ V VA 1 2 3X Avo auToO V OVER j pi L k A vVar Function ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays A OVER Lt J J LI W TME L MODE TRIG relevant MODE g keys and nus m V PF 12 3x M NELE indicators C5 V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ iat O EI W START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET C hour min sec mvHz 123r y n am sp p ems k A fh Function ELEMENT 103W 303W c3 SCALING c3AVG c3 FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL C3 HARMONICS c33064W c33V3A iid Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Explanation Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Setting the mode Setting the address 1 Display C 3 Display C 6 LOCAL 2 Addr A ENTER Hd dr _ gt ENTER SHIFT INTERFACE 3 Hddr b 4 V up down Eng y 5 V cursor shift ij SHIFT gt Setting the interval Display C 3 rhourrminyrsec 6 kanl 4 ENTER gt 900 BHO gt ENTER 4 Same as step 4to5 En
9. Relevant Keys A hour min MEME I Fani l Fi m V VA 12 3 X Ga4uTo auo o covover em a Sa come k A Val FUNCTION ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays aoun tal EB L LII m w me C C wee TRIG relevant woe E keys and aus mv PF 1 2 3 E indicator V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ zi INTEGRATOR EI MW START STOP RESET E n HARMONCS MEMORY INTEG SET C our min sec REMOTE a m V Hz 12305 LOCAL SETUP f1 l1 d 1 k A h Function ELEMENT INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT Lm mw e CJ ies 103W c 303W c3 SCALING AVG c3 FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL HARMONICS c3304W 3V3A WIRING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Selecting the four arithmetical operations function 1 Display C Display C SETUP 2 FLE 4 7 EFF for WT130 only AG AJ EF Hi H SCALE EF Ai g f E n t Hrb ENTER PairSk 3 A b 9 n HE H gt ENTER Hub Alb Alb AT bh Explanation Four Arithme
10. Unit mm Rear M 23 356 480 1 E 460 1 x e lt lt t Y i a O T CEN eo IB dl ce F 4 ite A 480 1 460 Unless other wise specified tolerance is 3 However tolerance is 0 3mm when below 10mm IM 253401 01E 15 5 H suoieorioeds Appendix 1 1 Commands Appendix 1 1 Commands AA AA Syntax Query Example Description AC AC Syntax Query Example Description AG AG Syntax Query Example Description AT AT Syntax Query Example Description Sets the current auto range ON or OFF inquires about the current setting AAm terminator m indicates auto range ON OFF m 0 auto range OFF fixed range 1 auto range ON AA lt terminator gt AAO Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Auto range is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur If the range is changed during auto range mode manual range mode will be validated instead of auto range mode f integration is started during auto range mode auto range mode will be invalidated Auto range mode is not allowed if the external sensor range is selected execution error 14 will occur Wh
11. Code Message Action Reference Page 102 Syntax error Incorrect syntax App 2 2 App 2 3 103 Invalid separator Insert a comma between data items to separate them App2 3 104 Data type error Refer to pages App2 6 2 7 and enter data using the correct App2 6 App2 7 data format 105 GET not allowed GET is not supported as a response to an interface message 108 Parameter not allowed Check the number of parameters App2 6 App 2 3 109 Missing parameter Enter the required number of parameters App2 6 App 2 3 111 Header separator error Insert a space between the header and the data to separate them App2 3 112 Program mnemonic too long Check the mnemonic character string consisting of letters and App 2 3 numbers 113 Undefined header Check the header App 2 3 114 Header suffix out of range Check the header App 2 3 120 Numeric data error Mantissa must be entered before the numeric value in lt NRf gt format App2 6 123 Exponent too large Use a smaller exponent in lt NR3 gt format App2 6 App 2 3 124 Too many digits Limit the number of digits to 255 or less App2 6 App 2 3 128 Numeric data not allowed Enter in a format other than lt NRf gt format App2 6 App 2 3 131 Invalid suffix Check the units for Voltage and Current App2 7 134 Suffix too long Check the units for Voltage and Current App2 7 138 Suffix not allowed No units are allowed other than Voltage and Current App2 7 141 Invalid chara
12. ELEMent x lt Spaces _ V THD lt Space gt C IEC gt 9 bisPlay ORDer j e Space lt NRf gt M 29 HARMonics HARMonics STATe Function Queries all settings relating to harmonic analysis Function Sets the harmonic analysis mode ON OFF queries the Syntax HARMonics current setting Example HARMONICS gt HARMONICS STATE 0 ELEMENT 1 Syntax HARMonics STATe lt Boolean gt SYNCHRONIZE V 1 THD IEC DISPLAY ORDER 1 HARMonics STATe Example HARMONICS STATE ON HARMonics DISPlay HARMONICS STATE HARMONICS STATE 1 Function Queries all settings concerning the display in case of harmonic analysis HARMonics SYNChronize Syntax HARMonics DISPlay Function Sets the fundamental frequency for PLL Example HARMONICS DISPLAY synchronization PLL source queries the current HARMONICS DISPLAY gt HARMONICS setting DISPLAY ORDER 1 Syntax HARMonics SYNChronize VIA lt NR gt ELEMent lt 1 3 gt HARMonics DISPlay ORDer HARMonics SYNChronize Function Sets the order of the harmonic component to be shown Example HARMONICS SYNCHRONIZE V 1 on display B queries the current setting HARMONICS SYNCHRONIZE gt HARMONICS Syntax HARMonics DISPlay ORDer lt NRf gt SYNCHRONIZE V 1 HARMonics DISPlay ORDer lt NRE gt 1 to 50 HARMonics THD Example HARMONICS DI
13. j i Ext sensor Ext sensor input Q Ext sensor input 4 f O4 terminal EXT mrg OF terminal EXT Ot ao Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal ELEMENT1 ELEMENT2 ELEMENTS IM 253401 01E 3 11 uoneJedo eJojeg n 3 7 Connecting the Power Supply Before Connecting the Power Supply Be sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent an electric shock WARNING before turning on the power Be sure to use the power supply cord provided by YOKOGAWA The mains power plug can only be plugged into an outlet with a protective grounding terminal Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning on the power Connect the power cord only after having verified that the power switch is turned OFF Never use an extension cord without protective grounding wire since this will invalidate the protection feature Connecting Procedure 1 Make sure that the power switch of the instrument is turned OFF 2 Connect the accessory power cord to the power connector on the back of the instrument 3 Insert the power cord to the power outlet which conforms to the following specifications Make sure that you use an outlet with a protective grounding terminal only Rated supply voltage 100 to 120VAC 200 to 240VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132VAC 180 to 264VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63Hz Power con
14. Display C STOP 2 5taert rELRL 3 Vil Ant Sk P gt ENTER ij PniriL Recalling Set up Parameters 1 Selecting recalling of set up parameters SHIFT MEMORY Display C STOP 2 5tart rELHL cr Rab Es ij Panal re EL 9 ENTER Select file for storage Display B F LEI ENTER F LEP End Fi LEJ F LEH When set up parameters are stored to a file display C will show 5 RHE g When no data are stored yet display C 5k will show F EE Select file for recalling Display B 5 F LEt ENTER F LES Eng C 7 r or ru n When set up parameters are stored to a file display C will show 5 HH E d When no data are stored yet display C will show F EE IM 253401 01E 9 2 Storing Recalling Set up Parameters Explanation Storing Set up Parameters Stores the current set up parameters which consist of the following Four destinations FiLE1 FilE2 FiLE3 FiLE4 are available Measurement range measurement mode scaling settings averaging settings filter settings integration settings harmonic settings plotter output settings store recall settings and communication settings When data are saved in a file and you want to save data in the same file display C will show SAVEd Pressing the ENTER key will result in overwriting the previously sav
15. Line 6 END Terminator WT130 253502 Line 1 Data Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall number Line 2 V1 data V3 data SV data Terminator Line 3 A1 data A3 data SAdata Terminator Line 4 W1 data W3data SW data Terminator Line 5 Frequency Display C Terminator Line 6 END Terminator Note When the frequency is set by either of the following methods only one value is measured and that value will be output by panel keys by the FUNCTION key and ELEMENT key of display C except WT110 by communication command by the DC or EC command After setting the measurement object of frequency even changing the display C to something different than VHz or AHz will not result in changing the object of measurement of frequency When selecting the output items yourself and you set a frequency item which is not object of measurement 999999 E 03 will be output IM 253401 01E ooepnelu gi d9 EI 11 4 Output Format for Normal Measured Computed Data Harmonic Analysis Data Set up Parameters and Error Codes WT130 253503 Line 1 Data Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall number Line 2 V1 data 3 V2 data V3data SV data Terminator Line 3 A1 data A2 data E A3 data SA data Terminator Line4 W1data W2dat
16. eiai e esee teret te A a ttt tne tnt e tete eene treten enne 8 1 8 2 Setting the Element PLL Source and Harmonic Distortion Method sess 8 3 8 3 Switching the Harmonic Analysis Function ON OFF eese 8 5 8 4 Setting the Harmonic Order and Displaying the Results of Harmonic Analysis 8 6 Storing Recalling 9 1 Storing Recalling Measured Data sese netnenennenee nennen 9 1 9 2 Storing Recalling Set up Parameters eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenee entente nete nennen 9 4 Using External In Output 10 1 Remote Control and D A Output Connector optional eene 10 1 10 2 Remote Control optional teer eerte eterni Pere retreat ea ege eue eno ea E EKRE 10 2 10 3 D A Output optional niner eseese resessie theo erento coeno ege exeun ENEE eaa ene D enda enu 10 3 10 4 Comparator Function optional eese nete ener neenene 10 7 10 5 Setting the Comparator Mode optional eese tne 10 9 10 6 Setting the Comparator Limit Values optional eee 10 10 10 7 Comparator Display optional esee ennt nn tnnt tnnt enne 10 14 10 8 Turning the Comparator Function ON OFF optional eere 10 16 10 9 Outputting to an External Plotter Printer eee eene 10 17 Chapter 11 GP IB Interface N 11 1 Using the GP IB Interface oo
17. 1 Display C SETUP 2 Lann SHIFT OUTPUT a P nub Y d s Display C 5 f r EL AY gt ENTER Ts UT ENTER 4 an End A v node t di GP r dREH n dREH H Explanation Turning the Comparator Function ON OFF After having set all the items described on the previous pages turn the comparator function ON oN The comparator function will start by pressing the ENTER key after selecting on oFF The comparator function will stop by pressing the ENTER key after selecting oFF CAUTION After having turned ON the comparator function do not change the comparator mode Changing the type of limit might result in unexpected statuses of the output relay Make sure not to greatly vary the input signal before turning the comparator function ON Depending on the input signal used for determination the instrument may display error codes i e overrange and this will change the output relays as described on page 10 8 When using the output relay as a control signal make sure to match these control signals with other equipments to eliminate erroneuous control 10 16 IM 253401 01E 10 9 Outputting to an External Plotter Printer A hour min c2 SAMPLE m V VA 12 3 x c AUTO AUTO c3 V OVER L k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT v RANGE ARANGE HOLD Displays i oven Lt
18. IM 253401 01E 12 5 eoejelu J ZEZ SH 12 3 Setting the Mode Handshaking Method Data Format and Baud Rate Data Format The RS 232 C interface of this instrument performs communications using start stop synchronization In start stop synchronization one character is transmitted at a time Each character consists of a start bit data bits a parity bit and a stop bit Refer to the figure below Level returns to idle Circuit idle 1 character State dotted line or state the start bit the next data solid line k Tors bits Xue wa ee 116 Vb 5 e pss Stop bit u m EE Start bit Parity bit Even odd or none 1 or 2 bits 2 The table below shows the data format combinations supported Preset value Start bit Data length Parity Stop bit 0 1 8 No 1 1 1 7 Odd 1 2 1 7 Even 1 3 1 7 No 2 Baud Rate The baud rate can be selected from 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 or 9600 About the Terminator Data can be received with either CR LF or LF terminator For transmission terminator you can select from CR LF LF and CR Interval In case of the talk only mode this setting specifies the interval to send data Setting range 00 00 00 Ohr Omin Osec to 99 59 59 99 hrs 59min 59sec Initial value 00 00 00 Note The error code 390 may appear depending on the status of this instrument In such a case lower the baud rate 12 6 IM 253401 01
19. A hour min c2 SAMPLE mv VA 4652533 c AUTO AUTO c3 V OVER k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT v ranae ARANGE HOLD Displays Hie M W te MODE TRIG relevant Move keys and Aus mv PF 4 293 5 v jr indicator c3 V MEAN k A deg FUNCTION ELEMENT _ z R INTEGRATOR o cnc MW START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET C hour min sec ci REMOTE a m V H 12 3r LOCAL SETUP k A h Function ELEMENT INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT MW ht 5193W c 303W SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS aseaw cava MAING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure 1 Selecting the Display Function Select either VA apparant power var reactive power or PF power factor by pressing the FUNCTION key of display A or B FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION il A W A a So Display A FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION B PY amp IMOM 7 deg You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key 2 Selecting the Input Element Select the input element by pressing the ELEMENT key of display A or B The operation is the same as the one described on page 5 1 Explanation Maximum Reading of the Display and Units Maximum reading of apparen
20. IM 253401 01E 10 3 indino uy eu19 x3 Busy 10 3 D A Output optional Setting Preset Integration Time Selecting preset integration time End 1 Display C RESET 2 nagdEA Preset time setting SHIFT INTEG SET i r Display A cIiner g r hour 4r min 6 f dt AE gt ENTER gt DD LUE 9 ENTER 4 V Up down 5 cursor shift SHIFT gt Explanation D A Output Voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor phase angle harmonic analysis data and integrated data values will be output as a 5V FS analog voltage The number of items which can be output number of output channels depends on the installed options Default Setting of the Output Format The default items which will be output can be selected as follows dFLt n normal measurement values are set as default Select this when you want to output normal measurement values Which items are output to which channel is described below Option DA4 DA12 CMP Model 253401 253502 253503 253401 253502 253503 cht V vi 7 v v vi 7 wv ch2 A v2 A A1 A1 ch3 Ww V3 V3 Ww W1 W1 ch4 Hz EV XV Hz Hz Hz ch5 A1 A1 Output ch6 A2 channel ch7 These A3 A3 en ES i Wi These channels cannot be set ch10 set W2 ch11 W3 W3 ch12 xw xw 1 When either the function indicator
21. Selecting Scaling ON OFF 1 Display C SETUP 57 FLE a Aa s Display C 5 Y EC AL E 9 ENTER 1 aFF ENTER f c X End z Cnr A nn PaLr5b Y dHER nHEH f 4 6 IM 253401 01E 4 4 Setting the Scaling Value when External PT CT is Used Explanation About the Scaling Function This function is useful for measuring voltage current power and such when you are using an external potential transformer PT current transformer CT or such and have connected their secondary side outputs to the input elements You set the scaling value to the PT ratio CT ratio or power factor When the scaling function is turned ON measured values which have been converted to the corresponding values for the transformer primary sides can been displayed or otherwise output Measured computed value Scaled result Voltage V PxV P Voltage scaling value Current A CxA C Current scaling value Active power W FxPxCxW F Power scaling value Reactive power var F xP xC x var Apparent power VA FxPxCxVA Selecting the Input Element This setting is to select to which element scaling will be applied The initial value is ALL At the WT110 this selection menu will not appear ALL Select this when the same scaling values should be applied to all elements together ELI Select this when the scaling values should only be applied
22. a Ah t lt Aht Ah Whz and Ah will light twice ri and P are displayed on the top of display C You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key 1 Displayed on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later 2 Selecting the Input Element Select the input element by pressing the ELEMENT key on display C The operation is the same as the one described on page 5 1 3 Starting Integration Press the START key The START indicator will light the integrated value will appear on display C and the integration elapsed time will appear on display A START 4 Holding Integration Press the HOLD key The HOLD indicator will light and the displayed values will be held HOLD 5 Cancelling HOLD and Updating the Integration Continuing from step 4 press the HOLD key once more or press the SHIFT key followed by the HOLD TRIG key The HOLD indicator will extinguish and the displayed value will be updated HOLD TRIG 6 Stopping Integration Press the STOP key The START indicator will extinguish and the STOP indicator will light The displayed values will be held STOP 7 Resetting Integration Press the RESET key The STOP indicator will extinguish and the values on display A and C will be reset to 000 00 RESET 7 5 IM 253401 01E 7 3 Displaying Integrated Values Explanation Maximum Reading of the Display and Units Maximum
23. Measurement start Display update 3s min E 5ms min 5ms min EXT TRIG N CAUTION Do not apply a voltage which exceeds the TTL level to the remote controller pin Also do not short the output pins nor apply a voltage to them The instrument might be damaged 10 2 IM 253401 01E 10 3 D A Output optional Relevant Keys A hour min c2 SAMPLE m V VA 12 3 E ce AUTO AUTO V OVER e L k A Var Function ELEMENT v RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays i Bue Lt Ld m W TIME LJ MODE TRIG relevant MODE g keys and Rus im mv PF 12 3xr V Jr indicator c3 V MEAN ar r1 k A deg Function ELEMENT _ re INTEGRATOR pe E W START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET hour min sec E ais s mv Hz 123 x IE 1 as a p k A hh Function ELEMENT Ll 1 J la L J l M WE the INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT g 5193W 363W SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS aseaw cava MAING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made
24. Syntax Sets the voltage auto range ON or OFF inquires about the voltage setting AVm terminator m indicates auto range ON OFF m 0 auto range OFF fixed range 1 auto range ON AV lt terminator gt AVO Auto range is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur If the range is changed during auto range mode manual range mode will be validated instead of auto range mode f integration is started during auto range mode auto range mode will be invalidated While recalling is in progress execution error 19 will occur Selects WT110 130 scaling values simultaneously or individual setting command group or 2533E setting command group for command data which come after this command inquires about the current setting CMm terminator m indicates command group used m 0 WT110 130 command output format group scaling value simultaneous setting command group 1 command output format group by element scaling value individual setting command group 2 2533E command output group CM lt terminator gt CMI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value The output format of the WT110 130 is the same for m 0 or 1 Sets the function for display A inquires about the current setting DAm terminator m indicates one of the following functions in case of normal measurement m 1 voltage V 2 current A 3 power W
25. __ _serup Canan SHIFT OUTPUT 2 nurc v 1 df 3 Display C f r EL AH 9 ENTER aFF nn node di 5P dALA n s dHEH H Hi dokle Relay setting Setting type of limit Setting limit value 4 Setting exponent Display C 7 Display A 13 Display B 17 Display C 19 ch d ENTER Hg ENTER gt OG ENTER E J ENTER 6 20 che 8 HDI 14 V Up down 18 Erg A A A A y eh o m BIB 15 V Shift cursor Y Era SHIFT gt L LI cee EL ij EUM f PF i 16 Shift decimal f EF HE i SHIFT point ti Hi 1 When you press the ENTER key at step 19 Eco ma Fa 53 om zm Di the output channel displayed at display C will change to the next channel i e from ch1 to ch2 Pia and so forth mo 2 Depends on the model number Refer to the dii specifications section for more details Hd DI 3 As the maximum order of harmonic analysis data varies by the fundamental frequency there might ae be cases where no analysis data are present up Qa ye to the 50th order display show bars In such a ABC case even setting the limit values will not result 8 V A Sets the A column in proper operation 4 The first digit is for the polarity S
26. gt for efficiency EFF App1 16 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 1 Overview of IEEE 488 2 1987 Appendix 2 1 Overview of IEEE 488 2 1987 The GP IB interface provided with this instrument conforms 11 Size of data block of response data to IEEE 488 2 1987 This standard requires the following 23 Block data are not supported points be stated in this document This appendix describes 12 List of supported common commands these points Refer to Appendix 2 3 15 Common Command Group 13 Condition of device when calibration is 1 Subsets supported by IEEE 488 1 interface successfully completed functions CAL is not supported Refer to the specifications on page 11 1 14 Maximum length of block data which can be 2 Operation of device when the device is assigned used for definition of trigger macro when DDT to an address other than one of the addresses 0 is used to 30 DDTis not supported This instrument does not allow assignment to an address 15 Maximum length of macro label if macro other than 0 to 30 definition is used maximum length of block data 3 Reaction when the user initializes address which can be used for definition of macro settings processing when recursion is used in definition Change of the current address is acknowledged when a of macro new address is set using the INTERFACE key menu The Macro functions are not supported newly set address is valid until another new address is set 16 Response to IDN
27. sse nn nennen 10 7 IM 253401 01E Index 1 xepu Index G GET group execute trigger occ cecscecsecseeeeeeseeeeeeteeseeeeeeee 11 2 GP TBnterfacescs on ci eodera ere Or e eed 11 1 GP IB interface specifications o 11 1 GTL 0 to localuri 11 2 H liandshalking secu e RR CIERRE a harmonic analysis function esee harmonic component ostisi iaeiiai harmo ie distortion edere E deor harmonics analysis function harmonies orders eere eet p eb NES etre header interpretation rule eene IEEE 488221987 2 entorno o e ren App2 1 TRC interface clear event eee 11 2 initial metu a deterrere RETE ie DR 1 5 initializing set up parameters esee 13 2 Input CIICUIL 125 5a ne md torii iieeites quoad iced 1 1 input f nction ecce t aee i ee e eue bie 1 2 instrument number TED integrated value display sess 7 5 integration elapsed time sese 7 1 integration Noldan iii 7 7 integration Method aiiin a a eee A N 7 2 integration mode 4e reete a a 7 1 integration preset time oc siie e a a EE 10 5 integration TESEL aoran aA E A A E A A Ai 7 7 int gration mer oos peo eee aec p e ee rt 7 4 integrator function seccina enana 1 3 7 1 interruption during measurement esee 2 4 O operating restriction integration 7 8 OPO isis ete bii e fee eerie eife ied guns 2 optional equipment ih 3 output printing mo
28. 8 Set the output current of the current standard to 20A and output this current 9 Verify that the display shows and then changes to 20A 10 Turn the output of the current standard OFF as the measured current value for approx 1 5 seconds IM 253401 01E 14 9 E Bunoous e qnoJ pue uoneJqieo ueunsn py 14 3 In Case of Malfunctioning Check These Items First If the instrument does not operate properly even if the actions given in the table below are performed contact your nearest sales representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual When contacting your representative inform the ROM version No which is displayed on display B on power up Symptom Nothing is displayed when the power is turned ON Displayed data is odd Keys do not function properly Instrument cannot be controlled via GP IB interface Instrument cannot be controlled via the RS 232 C interface Reference Items to check page Is the power cord properly connected to the power connector 3 12 3 13 of this instrument and the AC outlet Is the input power voltage within the allowed range Has the fuse blown for WT130 only 14 13 Is there a possibility of noise 3 2 3 4 Are measurement leads connected correctly 3 5 to 3 11 Is the filter OFF 3 15 4 1 Are the ambient temperature and humidity within the allowed 4 3 range Is the REMOTE indicator LED off 11 2 Does the GP IB a
29. H 9H Initial Menus AH KP B gt 4H LL C Smallc Mn D d Nn E gt E O gt a FF P gt GL Q H HSmallh gt h Rr 1 S5 Jou TE Uu Vou w gt Xi Yo zc gt xr Every function of this instrument can be set using the menus on the display The initial displays which appear when the operation keys are pressed are shown below Voltage Range Setting 1 V RANGE Display C Hu t a 5D E3 C Wu D ca ly Ey oun C3 C r3 C3 uU Current Range Setting 1 A RANGE Display C Auta nu nma un ES E3 N Ea W When equipped with option EX1 Display C 73 Auta e F1 tu 5 g I L v a5 r F1 L tu E 5 v E gh 2 When equipped with option EX2 Display C Auto nu na im E3 C3 ra m l2 Mu Ca 3 E32 E3 C3 amp Y w m Ln Ca Filter Scaling Averaging Ext Sensor Input Initializing Set up Parameters 1 SETUP Dk Display C nHtH Filter setting z Scaling setting x T Averaging setting Ext sensor input setting Initiallizing set up parameters Computation crest factor settings IM 253401 01E 1 5 oq ueg uawnysu siui jeUM 1 3 Digital Numbers Characters and Initial Menus Integration Setting 1 Dis
30. Limit of ch1 is set to 3A Limit of ch2 is set to 1A NO GO determination area Time Current 3A Upper limit Hi Limit of ch1 is set to 3A GO determination area Limit of ch2 is set to 1A Time 1A Lower limit Lo Current NO GO determination area 3A Upper limit Hi Limit of ch1 is set to 3A 1A Lower limit Lo Limit of ch2 is set to 1A Time Note n the dual mode the combinations chl1 amp ch2 and ch3 amp ch4 are fixed The combinations chl amp ch3 and ch2 amp ch4 are not possible Within a pair you can set either channel as upper or lower limit Below lower limit open circuit alo f 24V Exceeding lower limit below upper gt closed circuit alo 24V Vly N Exceeding upper limit open circuit Lo 8 24V Make sure not to greatly vary the input signal when using the comparator function Depending on the input signal used for determination the instrument may display error codes i e overrange and this will change the output relays as follows When using the output relay as a control signal make sure to match these control signals with other equipments to eliminate erroneuous control Displayed error Relay status oL over range The NC contact is closed oF over flow The NC contact is closed dEGEr phase angle error The NC contact is closed PFErr power fact
31. Syntax Example OA1 terminator OA1 3 2 Parameter error 12 will occur if any of m1 m2 and m3 is set to an illegal value If computation result is selected and the MATH computing equation is set to anything other than efficiency MTO the D A output is fixed to 0 V No output and computation result have no relation to the element but when using them with the OA command set m3 1 Initializes D A output items inquires about the current settings Two sets of default settings are available one is for normal measurement and the other is for integration The same initialization can also be performed using a key operation OAD m terminator m indicates default no m 2 Select mode 0 Default for normal measurement 1 Default for integration OAD terminator OADI e Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Select mode OAD2 is validated when the OA command is executed if m has been set to 0 default for normal measurement or 1 default for integration Requests output of measurement data OD terminator The OD command should be used only in addressable mode A If the OD command is used in addressable mode B execution error 11 will occur Setting the addressable mode should be done using a key operation Requests output of error codes via communications OE terminator ERR11 terminator Error codeDescription
32. for 2nd harmonic Tamina Line 51 Analysis value for Relative harmonic content 50th harmonic for 50th harmonic Terminator Line 52 END Terminator In case of phase angle Phase angle between Line 1 fundamentals Frequency Terminator of voltage and current Line 2 Phase angle between Phase angle between fundamental and 2nd fundamental and Terminator harmonic of voltage 2nd harmonic of current Line 3 Phase angle between Phase angle between fundamental and fundamental and Terminator 3rd harmonic of voltage i Line 50 g 3rd harmonie of current Phase angle between Phase angle between Line 51 fundamental and fundamental and Terminator 50th harmonic of voltage 50th harmonic of current END Terminator In case of ALL setting The data will be output in the sequence voltage current active power phase angle gt END terminator The output format of each item is as described for each item above The END line is not output for each item but after finishing the entire output operation Output Format of Set up Parameters and Error Codes Refer to the explanations and examples of the OS or the OE commands described in Appendix 1 1 IM 253401 01E 11 5 Setting the Address Addressable Mode Relevant Keys
33. 4 Device set up at power ON Commands which Refer to Appendix 2 3 15 Common Command Group can be used at power ON 17 Size of storage area for protected user data if Basically the previous settings i e the settings which PUD and Pup are used were valid when power was turned OFF are valid PUD and PUD are not supported All commands are available at power ON 18 Length of resource name if RDT and RDT are 5 Message transmission options used a Input buffer size and operation RDT and RDT are not supported The input buffer s capacity is 1024 bytes 19 Change in status if RST LRN RCL and savare b Types of queries which return multiple used response messages RST Refer to the examples of each command in Appendix Refer to Appendix 2 3 15 Common Command Group 2 3 LRN RCL SAV c Types of queries which generate response These commands are not supported data during analysis of the syntax 20 Execution range of self test using TST Every query generates response data when analysis of Refer to Appendix 2 3 15 Common Command Group the syntax is performed 21 Structure of extended return status d Types of queries which generate response Refer to Appendix 2 4 data during reception 22 To find out whether each command is performed No query generates response data when it is received in parallel or sequentially by the controller Refer to Appendix 2 2 6 Synchronization with the e Types of commands which have p
34. 9 ENTER H ENTER v dH v A End ij p EL AY f 1 When graph printouts are selected as the output item only data values will be output by communication 1 za C7 e ook 00703 fc c Li tc oO 73 F3 EYE LI x N m fj ou m amp I za a nc r1 o Fa p i lt gt Sets the A column 3 V Moves to the B column SHIFT gt 8 V A Select from 1 to 3 Explanation Setting the Output Item in case of Normal Measurement Selecting the Default Setting Predefined items will be output by the communication function The following types of default settings exist and they depend on the model For more details refer to page 11 5 and 11 6 Normal default setting dFLt n Consists of V voltage A current W active power the above menu shows P frequency and displayed data of display C Integration default setting dFLt i Consists of W active power the above menu shows P Wh watt hour Ah ampere hour frequency and integration time Selecting yourself You can set any item to each of ch1 to ch14 output channels Setting the channel Sets which channel ch1 to ch14 will output the item Setting the output item corresponds to column A in the operating procedure Any of the following items can be selected The initial value is V V voltage A current P active power VAr reactive power VA apparent power PF power f
35. All executable queues Output queue X Stores response message to a query Stores error Nos and messages Error queue STATus ERRor Registers and Queues which Affect the Status Byte Registers which affect each bit of the status byte are shown below Sets bit 5 ESB of status byte to 1 or 0 Sets bit 4 MAV of status byte to 1 or 0 Sets bit 3 EES of status byte to 1 or 0 Sets bit 2 EAV of status byte to 1 or 0 Standard event register Output queue Extended event register Error queue Enable Registers Registers which mask a bit so that the bit does not affect the status byte even if the bit is set to 1 are shown below Status byte Masks bits using the service request enable register Standard event register Masks bits using the standard event enable register Extended event register Masks bits using the extended event enable register Writing Reading from Registers The ESE command is used to set bits in the standard event enable register to 1 or 0 and the ESR query is used to check whether bits in that register are set to 1 or 0 For details of these commands refer to Appendix 2 3 2 4 2 Status Byte Overview of Status Byte RQS 7 6 ESB MAV EES EAV 1 0 Mss Bits 0 1 and 7 Not used always 0 Bit 2 EAV Error Available Set to 1 when the erro
36. CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 600 0E 00 AUTO 1 CONFigure VOLTage AUTO Function Syntax Example Sets the voltage auto range ON OFF queries the current setting CONFigure VOLTage AUTO CONFigure VOLTage AUTO CONFigure VOLTage AUTO ON CONFIGURE VOLTAGE AUTO CONFIGURE VOLTAGE AUTO 1 lt Boolean gt CONFigure VOLTage RANGe Function Sets the voltage range queries the current setting Syntax CONFigure VOLTage RANGe lt voltage gt CONFigure VOLTage RANGe lt voltage gt 15V to 600V 15 30 60 150 300 600V Example CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 600V CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 600 0E 00 CONFigure WIRing Function Sets the wiring method queries the current setting Syntax CONFigure WIRing P1W2 P1W3 P3W3 P3W4 V3A3 CONFigure WIRing Example CONFIGURE WIRING P1W3 CONFIGURE WIRING CONFIGURE WIRING P1W3 Description The selections stand for the following P1W2 Single phase two wires only for WT110 P1W3 Single phase three wires only for WT 130 P3W3 Three phase three wires only for WT130 P3WA Three phase four wires only for WT 130 3 phase 4 wire model V3A3 Three voltage three current only for WT 130 3 phase 4 wire model App2 16 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 5 DISPlay Group The commands in the DISPlay group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about display This allows you
37. Note The wire connected from the source the current terminal must be routed as close as possible to the ground potential in order to minimize measurement error LOAD IM 253401 01E 3 5 uoneJedo eJojeg n 3 4 Wiring the Measurement Circuit Wiring diagram for three phase three wire system 253502 253503 SOURCE R Input terminal ELEMENT1 Wiring diagram for three phase four wire system 253503 Input terminal ELEMENT1 Input terminal ELEMENTS Input terminal ELEMENT2 LOAD AE g LOAD Input terminal ELEMENT3 R oy v ce E LOAD T s PES nO LOAD CER R 7 Lv SOURCE v N E T st Vs v V A X mn AN Zt Wiring diagram for three voltage three current system 253503 SOURCE R Input terminal ELEMENT1 LOAD Input terminal ELEMENT2 Input terminal ELEMENT3 SOURCE Q LOAD 3 6 IM 253401 01E 3 5 Wiring the Measurement Circuit when Using External PT CT When using an external CT do not allow the secondary side of the CT to WARNING go open circuit while power is supplied otherwise an extremely high voltage will be generated on the secondary side of the CT A load current flows in the thick lines shown in the diagrams therefore a N CAUTION wire with sufficient
38. OR A hg i Ld A i MSS 7 6 ESBMAV EES EAV 1 0 Status byte Ras kk 4 4 Y Occurrence of a service E request Output Error queue queue j 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard event enable register A i Ld OR n m i Ld Ld 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard event register 1 14 13 12 11 110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Extended event enable register A m i A le i A i OR A l A ka g 1 Ld i A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Extended event register A A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 413 2 1 O Transit filter A A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 Condition filter IM 253401 01E App2 35 Z SPUBWUWOD uoneoiunuluo2 Appendix 2 4 Status Report Overview of Registers and Queues Name Function Writing Reading Status byte Serial poll RQS STB2 MSS Service request Masks status byte SRE SRE enable register Standard event Event in the ESR register instrument 1 Standard event Masks standard ESE ESE enable register event register Extended event Event in the register instrument 2 Extended event Masks extended enable register STATus EESR STATus EESE STATus EESE event register Condition Current instrument status STATus CONDition register Transition Extended event STATus FILTer STATus FILTer filter occurrence conditions x x
39. S Adjustment values will be kept PRINT C Adjustment values will not be kept PRINT Command gt gt LINE INPUT C F C 1 THEN CMD CRO CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK GOSUB ODDISP ELSEIF C 2 THEN CMD CRI CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK GOSUB ODDISP ELSEIF C 3 THEN CMD CR2 CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK GOSUB ODDISP ELSEIF C 4 THEN CMD CR3 CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK GOSUB ODDISP ELSEIF C S THEN CMDS END CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK EXIT DO ELSEIF C C THEN CMDS CAN CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK EXIT DO END F LOOP RETURN ODDISP PRINT 1 Adjustment values of this range will be updated PRINT 0 Return to previous menu DO CMD OD CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK LOCATE 15 1 BUFS SPACES 255 DO App1 12 IM 253401 01E Appendix 1 2 Sample Program CALL IBRD WT BUFS GOSUB ERRCHK PRINT LEFTS BUF IBCNTS 2 LOOP WHILE LEFTS BUFS 3 lt gt END FOR J 0 TO 500 C INKEYS IF C lt gt W THEN PRINT C EXIT FOR NEXT J IF C 1 THEN CMD ENT CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK EXIT DO ELSEIF C 0 THEN EXIT DO END IF LOOP RETURN SHUNT CMD CAL2 CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK PRINT S Adjustment values of this range will be updated and kept PRINT C Adjustment values of this range will not be kept DO CMDS OD CALL IBWRT WT CMDS
40. and the SRQ is set to True Store Recall Busy DIO 5 This bit is set to 1 when storing recalling of data is in progress This bit cannot be disabled by the IM command since it is a status bit Even if this bit is set to 1 SRQ will not be affected Over DIO 4 This bit is set to 1 and SRQ is set to True when an overrange occurs in the measured data However this is not valid if the bit has been disabled by the IM command This bit is reset after a response is made to the serial poll The nature of Over can by identified by the OE command Syntax error DIO 3 This bit is set to 1 when a command error parameter error or execution error occurs The error No can be identified by the OE command This bit is reset after a response is made to the serial poll However this is not valid if the bit has been disabled be the IM command Integration End DIO 2 This bit is set to 1 when integration has been completed The bit is reset when a response is made to the serial poll However this is not valid if the bit has been disabled by the IM command Computation End DIO1 This bit is set to 1 when computation has been completed and the display is updated The bit is reset when a response is made to the serial poll However this is not valid if the bit has been disabled by the IM command IM 253401 01E ooepnelu gi d9 E 11 4 Output Format for Normal Measured Computed Data Ha
41. er vo rre e TORTOR ERR e ERREUR CHEERS App2 30 2 3 13 STATUS Group i e Ro eee it ete E HH Une PER REPE ERNST GG ARE EE dR CET App2 31 2 3 14 STORe Group sis 2 3 15 Common Command Group esee entente App2 33 App 2 4 Status Report Joe e e ho t ettet a allies n ee fee eese t App2 35 2 4 1 Overview of the Status Report eese App2 35 2 4 2 Status Byte vd 2 4 3 Standard Event Register sco ite nde ERREUR I e ets App2 37 2 4 4 Extended Event Register eee eret epe rer en Ree er en App2 38 2 4 5 Output Queue and Error Queue esee entente nennen App2 39 App 2 5 Sample Program eterne i tn etae o nee i onde n EEES App2 40 App 2 6 ASCII Character Codes centre ses d eere tete oci etn i ae eee ep Ye ETEEN App2 42 App 2 7 Communication related Error Messages esee App2 43 Index IM 253401 01E 11 1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram System Configuration Block Diagram Input Digital jeg either pow ih meter Contact relay output Equipment Pena pa
42. in case of the D A option or End The rAnGE mode is for adjustments of voltages or currents while the dA mode is for adjustments of the D A output This instrument has no need for adjustment of power 3 Select rAnGE and press the ENTER key Then let the instrument warm up for at least 30 minutes Preparing the AC voltage current standard and DMM 4 Allow a warm up time of at least one hour for the AC voltage current standard and if necessary DMM Operating Keys The keys to be used for carrying out adjustments are as follows ENTER Press this key to confirm every adjustment of each range SHIFT Returns to the previous screen when aborting adjustment However since the adjustments will not be displayed turn the power OFF and ON again RESET Returns to normal measurement However all adjusted data will become invalid A RANGE Press this key to proceed to the following range without adjusting the current range When adjusting the D A output press this key to move the new input value to the right V RANGE Press this key to return to the previous range without adjusting the current range When adjusting the D A output press this key to move the new input value to the left Adjusting the Voltage Range 1 Select rAnGE as described in the preparation above press the ENTER key and the display will become as follows Display A rAnGE Display B 30 00V Display C displays measurement value
43. keys and indicator The measuring range is adjusted automatically according to the input voltage or current as follows Overrange is handled the same way as for the manually selected range 4 4 IM 253401 01E 4 3 Selecting the Measurement Range in case of Direct Input Range up A higher range is selected immediately if the instantaneous input voltage or current exceeds approx 300 of the rated value during sampling If the meaured voltage or current exceeds 110 of the rated value a higher range will be selected at the end of the current measurement cycle Range down A lower range is selected if the measured voltage or current drops below 30 of the rated value However even when the measured voltage or current drops below 30 of the rated value range down will not be done when this would result in waveforms with a high crest factor causing peak over Verifying the Range To verify the current range setting press the V RANGE key or the A RANGE key The result will be shown at display C In order to return to the measurement status press the same key again Note When the range is set to auto you cannot move to the minimum range by pressing the key On the other hand when the range is set to the minimum you cannot move to auto range by pressing the v key When the range is set to auto the range may be adjusted frequently if a waveform such as a pulse is input In such a case set the range manually Powe
44. qbdecl4 bas BORDS GPIBO CALL IBFIND BORDS BD amp IF BD lt 0 THEN GOTO ERRDISP CALL IBSIC BD GOSUB ERRCHK DEVICES WT CALL IBFIND DEVICES WT IF WTS lt 0 THEN GOTO ERRDISP CALL IBCLR WT GOSUB ERRCHK CMD HDO Hold OFF CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH CMDS FLO Filter OFF CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH CMD SCO Scaling OFF CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH CMD AGO Averaging OFF CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH CMD DA1 EA1 Display A V1 CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH CMD DB2 EB1 Display B Al CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH CMD DC3 EC1 Display C W1 CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH CMDS RV7 RA7 Measurement range 150V 5A CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH CMD MNO Measurement mode RMS CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH Output items for comm default setting for normal measurement CMD OFDO CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH Delimiter for Comm output CRtLF EOI CMD DLO CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCH BUFS SPACES 255 FOR I 1 TO 10 FOR J 0 TO 5000 NEXT J Waiting CMD OD CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK DO CALL IBRD WT BUFS GOSUB ERRCHK PRINT LEFTS BUFS IBCNT 2 LOOP WHILE LEFTS BUFS 3 lt gt END NEXT I PRGEND CALL IBLOC WT END When IBFIND call failed 9 ERRDISP 3 PRINT No such board or device name c GOT
45. 18 No data to be printed or not in the printing 10 17 mode 19 Attempted to execute a key operation or received a communications command while storing recalling of data being performed 30 Invalid file data z 31 File is damaged 32 No data stored in the internal memory Store data in the internal Ch 9 memory or select the proper file to be stored 33 No space to store data in the internal 9 2 memory 41 Attempted to start integration while there is Reset integration 7 5 an overflow condition Attempted to start integration after integration time has reached its preset value 42 Attempted to start integration while 7 8 integration is in progress 43 Measurement stopped due to overflow 7 8 during integration or due to a power failure 44 Attempted to stop integration even though 7 8 integration was not in progress 45 Attempted to reset integration even though 7 6 integration was not in progress or integration mode was not selected 46 Attempted to start integration while 2 4 measurement of peak overflow was in progress or during an overrange condition 47 Attempted to start integration in continuous Set a correct preset time 7 4 integration mode when integration preset time was set to 0 50 A D conversion time out 51 Measurement data overflow occurred 2 4 oL is displayed 52 Voltage peak overflow occurred 2 4 V OVER indicator lights up 53 Current peak overflow occurred 2 4 A O
46. 2 18 HARMonics DISPlay Queries all settings related to the display in case of harmonic analysis App 2 18 HARMonics DISPlay ORDer Sets queries the order of the harmonic component to be shown on display B App 2 18 HARMonics ELEMent Sets queries the element for harmonic analysis App 2 18 HARMonics STATe Sets queries the harmonic analysis mode ON OFF App 2 18 HARMonics SYNChronize Sets queries the input to be used as PLL source App 2 18 HARMonics THD Sets queries the computation method for harmonic distortion App 2 18 App2 8 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands Command Description Page INTEGrate Group INTEGrate Queries all settings related to integration App 2 19 INTEGrate MODE Sets queries the integration mode App 2 19 INTEGrate RESet Resets the integration values App 2 19 INTEGrate STARt Starts integration App 2 19 INTEGrate STOP Stops integration App 2 19 INTEGrate TIMer Sets queries the integration timer App 2 19 MATH Group applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later MATH Queries all settings related to the computing function App 2 20 MATH ARIThmetic Sets queries the computing equation of the four arithmetic operations App 2 20 MATH CFACtor Sets queries the computing equation of the crest factor App 2 20 MATH TYPE Sets queries the computing equation App 2 20 MEASure Group MEASure Queries all settings related to measurement computation data Ap
47. 5 GV outputs voltage analysis value and relative harmonic content as numerical value Query Example Description OR OR OS Syntax Query Example Description Syntax Example 6 GA outputs current analysis value and relative harmonic content as numerical value 7 GW outputs active power analysis value and relative harmonic content as numerical value 8 GVD outputs the phase angle between the first order voltage current and the 2nd to 50 or 30 th voltage current as a numerical value 9 GAD outputs the phase angle between the first order voltage current and the 2nd to 50 or 30 th voltage current as a numerical value 10 CGV outputs the analysis value of voltage and relative harmonic content as numerical value 11 CGA outputs the analysis value of current and relative harmonic content as numerical value 12 CGW outputs the analysis value of active power and relative harmonic content as numerical value 13 ALL outputs the relative harmonic content and analysis value of both voltage and current m2 indicates element m2 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for model 253503 only 3 Element 3 for WT130 only OH terminator OH13 1 Parameter error 12 will occur if m1 or m2 is set to an illegal value Designates the harmonic order of the harmonic component shown on display B V A W V 96 A96 W V deg A deg inquires about the current settings OR m terminator m in
48. DC both positive and negative ampere hour values Ahz RMS VMEAN total ampere hour values same as Ah DC positive ampere hour value Aht RMS VMEAN 0 DC negative ampere hour value 1 When the Wh function is selected pressing the FUNCTION key once or twice will result in Wht Pressing the FUNCTION key once will result in displaying the positive watt hour value whereas pressing the FUNCTION key twice will result in displaying the negative watt hour value In case of the negative watt hour value will appear in front of the value 2 When the Ah function is selected pressing the FUNCTION key once or twice will result in Ah Pressing the FUNCTION key once will result in displaying the positive ampere hour value whereas pressing the FUNCTION key twice will result in displaying the negative ampere hour value In case of the negative ampere hour value Note on will appear in front of the value When negative integrated values are displayed the maximum display reading will become 99999MWh MAh because of the added minus character When the measurement mode is RMS VMEAN and the current input drops below 0 590 of the rated range the ampere hour value will become zero 0 During integration is in progress until being reset operation of other functions are restricted Refer to page 7 8 for more details IM 253401 01E 7 3 uone4Beju Hg 7 2 Setting Integration Mode and Integration Timer
49. Description RT RT Syntax Query Example Description RV RV Syntax Query Example Description SA SA Syntax Query Example Description RR terminator RR0 0 0 Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set When the recall interval is set to Ohrs Omin Osec the interval will be 250msec in case of normal measurement and 1s in case of harmonic analysis While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets the rated integration time when integrated values are to be output as an analog signal inquires about the current setting RT ml1 m2 terminator m1 indicates hour and must be set within the following range 0 m1 x 999 m2 indicates minute and must be set within the following range 0xm2 s59 RT terminator RT1 0 Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set ee Sets voltage range inquires about the current setting RV m terminator m indicates voltage range m 3 15V range 4 30 V range 5 60 V range 6 100 V range 7 150 V range 8 300 V range 9 600 V range RV terminator RV9 Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set Changing of the voltage range is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets the external sensor scaling value inquires about the
50. FALL BOTH NEVer ig yov Y Y Y ovy Extended event register Te MUTO 2 CR T0 STATus EESR FOL Ea The meaning of each bit of the condition register is as follows Bit 0 UPD Updating Set to 1 during updating of measurement data Bit 1 ITG Integrate busy Set to 1 during integration See figure below Bit 2 ITM Integrate timer busy Set to 1 during the integration timer is being operated See figure below Bit 3 OVRS results overflow Set to 1 when the integration results of overflow Display shows oF Bit 4 FOV Frequency over Set to 1 when the frequency lies outside the measurement range Display shows ErrLo ErrHi or FrqEr Bit 5 SRB Store Recall busy Set to 1 while storing or recalling is in progress Bit 6 OVR1 Element 1 measured data over Set to 1 when the measurement computed data of element 1 overflow or when an error occurs Display shown oF oL PFErr or dEGEr Bit 7 POV1 Element 1 voltage peak over Set to 1 when the voltage value of element 1 exceeds the peak value Bit 8 POA1 Element 1 current peak over Set to 1 when the current value of element 1 exceeds the peak value Bit 9 OVR2 Element 2 measured data over Set to 1 when the measurement computed data of element 2 ov
51. IDN YOKOGAWA 253503 0 F1 11 A reply consists of the following information lt Model gt lt Type gt lt Serial No gt and lt Firmware version gt When OPCis sent this command sets bit 0 the OPC bit of the standard event register to 1 This command is not supported by this instrument OPC When OPC is sent 1 in ASCII code will be returned This command is not supported by this instrument OPC IM 253401 01E App2 33 Z SPUBWLUOD uomneoiunuiuo Appendix 2 3 Commands OPT Function Syntax Example Description PSC Function Syntax Example Description RST Function Syntax Example Description SRE Function Syntax Example Description STB Function Syntax Example Description Queries installed options OPT OPT EXT1 HARM DA4 CMP NONE will be attached to the reply if no options are installed OPT must always be the last query in program message If there is another query after this an error will occur Selects whether or not to clear the following registers when turning ON the power or queries the current setting The registers are the standard event enable register the extended event enable register and the transition filter However they cannot be cleared if the parameter is 0 PSC lt NRf gt PSC lt NR gt 0 no clearance 0 clearance PSC 1 PSC 1 Refer to App 2 4 for more details on the reg
52. Manual Integration Mode Integration starts after having pressed the START key Integration stops after having pressed the STOP key when the integrated value reaches the maximum of 999999MWh MAh or when the integrated value of negative polarity reaches 99999MWh MAh when the integration elapsed time reaches the maximum of 999 hours and 59 minutes ntegration holds the integration elapsed time and integrated values at the point where integration stopped will be held until the RESET key is pressed Max integrated value Integrated Hold 999999 MWh MAh value Display overflow Integration Hold Hold time A A A Start Stop Reset Start Reset Standard Integration Mode Integration starts after having pressed the START key Integration stops when the preset time for integration is reached when the integrated value reaches the maximum of 999999MWh MAh or when the integrated value of negative polarity reaches 99999MWh MAh Integration holds the integration elapsed time and integrated values at the point where integration stopped will be held until the RESET key is pressed Integrated value Hold A Integration time Hold Integration timer t preset time 1 lt Start Reset IM 253401 01E 7 1 uone4Beju Hg 7 1 Integrator Functions Continous Integration Mode Repeat Integration Integration starts after having pressed the START key when the preset time for in
53. Method Frequency range Maximum reading synchronization to the fundamental frequency by using a phase locked loop PLL circuit Fundamental frequency between 40 Hz and 440 Hz 9999 15 11 Comparator Output optional Output method Normally open and normally closed relay contact outputs one pair Number of output channels and channel setup 4 Can be set for each channel Contact capacity 24 V 0 5 A D A output 4 channels Refer to item D A Output Optional 15 12 External Control and Input Signals in combination with the D A converter and comparator options External Control and Input Output signals EXT HOLD EXT TRIG EXT START EXT STOP EXT RESET INTEG BUSY However the DA4 or DA12 options must be installed Only EXT HOLD and EXT TRIG are available if the CMP option is installed Input level TTL negative pulse 15 13 General Specifications Warm up time Approx 30 min Ambient temperature and humidity range 5 to 40 C 20 to 80 R H no condensation Operating altitude 2000m or below Insulation resistance Between voltage input terminals and case Between current input terminals and output terminals Between voltage input terminals and current input terminals Between voltage input terminals of each element Between current input terminals of each element Between voltage input terminals and power plug Between current input terminals and power plug Between case and power plug Above 50
54. PRINT No such board or device name GOTO PRGEND GP IB error check ERRCHK IF IBSTAS gt 0 THEN RETURN PRINT Error GOTO PRGEND App1 14 IM 253401 01E Appendix 1 3 For Users Using Communication Commands of Digital Power Meter 2533E Appendix 1 3 For Users Using Communication Commands of Digital Power Meter 2533E The WT110 130 differ from the 2533E in communication commands and data format The WT110 130 has a function which enables the user to use communication programs created for the 2533E This function is described below DS MN MN Syntax Query Example Description OL Syntax Example Description Communication Commands Under usual conditions the 2533E commands cannot be used The CM command should be set to CM2 to be able to use the 2533E commands for details about the CM command refer to Appendix 2 Description is given below in alphabetical order of those commands which differ from the WT110 130 when the 2533E group is selected Note For addressable mode setting method refer to section 11 1 page 11 9 WT110 130 code format is used for error code and status byte For details refer to page 11 3 and 14 3 The WT110 130 code format differs from 2533E code format To read harmonic analysis data via RS 232 C interface select a value other than 0 for handshake mode since harmonics analysis data consists of a number of output
55. Set the voltage range of this instrument to a suitable range Set the output voltage of the voltage standard so that positive rated values are generated Then read the value of the DMM and verify that this value lies within the specifications Connect the DMM to ch2 of D A output and carry out steps 3 and 4 Repeat this for all D A channels Set the output voltage of the voltage standard so that negative rated values are generated Repeat steps 4 and 5 and verify all channels Turn the output of the voltage standard OFF Verifying the Comparator Output Function Preparation 1 2 3 4 Connect the voltage standard to the voltage terminal of this instrument Set the range of this instrument to 15V Set the comparator output to V1 for each channel Set the comparator setting value to 10V for each channel Calibrating 1 Set the output of the voltage standard so that the displayed value on this instrument becomes 9 99V and output this voltage Measure the resistance values between all terminals of the comparator output between NO and COM or between NC and COM using the DMM Verify that the resistance between NO and COM is at least 50MQ and that the resistance between NC and COM is at most 0 1Q Set the output of the voltage standard so that the displayed value on this instrument becomes 10 01V and output this voltage Measure the resistance values between all terminals of the comparator output between NO and COM or between NC and
56. Space MATH Function Queries all settings related to the computing function Syntax MATH Example MATH MATH TYPE ARITHMETIC ARITHMETIC ADD MATH ARIThmetic Function Sets queries the computing equation of the four arithmetic operations Syntax MATH ARIThmetic ADD SUB MUL DIV DIVA DIVB MATH ARIThmetic Example MATH ARITHMETIC ADD MATH ARITHMETIC MATH ARITHMETIC ADD Description If MATH TYPE is not set to ARIThmet ic this command will be meaningless The computing equation selections are as follows ADD display A display B SUB display A display B MUL display A X display B DIV display A display B DIVA display A display BY DIVB display A display B MATH CFACtor Function Sets queries the computing equation of the crest factor Syntax MATH CFACtor VIA lt NR gt ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 WT110 single phase model TIs 3 WT130 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT130 three phase four wire model MATH CFACtor Example MATH CFACTOR V 1 MATH CFACTOR gt MATH CFACTOR V 1 Description If MATH TYPE is not set to CFACtor this command will be meaningless MATH TYPE Function Sets queries the computing equation Syntax MATH TYPE EFFiciency CFACtor ARIThmetic MATH TYPE Example MATH TYPE CFACTOR MATH TYPE gt MATH TYPE CFACTOR Description The equation method selections are as follows EFFiciency Efficiency valid only for WT130
57. The display resolution for integrated values is 100000 counts The decimal point shifts automatically since the integrated value increases in accordance with the elapsed time The decimal point shifting timing is determined automatically according to the selected voltage and current measuring ranges After the rated value is set for both voltage and current measuring ranges the decimal point shifts when the integrated value exceeds 100000 counts However the minimum measurement unit is 1 1000 times the power range which is determined by the rated voltage and current ranges and the maximum measurement unit is MWh or MAh The following shows the watt hour values when rated values are input at a 150V 5A range The below mentioned h m and s stand for hour minutes and seconds respectively Elapsed time Integrated value Os 2s 4s 5s 47 48 7m59s 8m00s 1hO0Om00s 2h00m00s 13h00m00s 14h00m00s 0 000mWh 416 67mWh 833 33mWh 1 0417Wh 9 7917Wh 10 000Wh 99 792Wh 100 00Wh 750 00Wh 1 5000kWh 9 7500kWh 10 500kWh Display Function of Integrator Values By selecting the display function you can display the polarity of the integrator values Display function Measurement mode Display contents Wh RMS VMEAN DC both positive and negative watt hour values Wh RMS VMEAN DC positive watt hour value Wht RMS VMEAN DC negative watt hour value Ah RMS VMEAN total ampere hour values
58. ast Cait E Saree Noe i WN Oa BL 1 ea 3 16 IM 253401 01E 4 1 Relevant Keys hour A c3 SAMPLE c3 V OVER A OVER VA 1 va x z TIME FUNCTION ELEMENT 23r MODE g c3 RMS V MEAN moc 3 lt PF 1 deg FUNCTION ELEMENT 23r Cc hour m V Hz 1 k A h MW ht c3 SCALING AVG FILTER c3 STORE RECALL HARMONICS FUNCTION ELEMENT 23r Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure V RANGE RMS SHIFT MODE Selecting the Measurement Mode c AUTO AUTO a V RANGE A RANGE HOLD MODE TRIG v ENTER gt 2 INTEGRATOR START STOP RESET HARMONCS MEMORY INTEG SET INTERFACE OUTPUT c3103W 363W o 304W co 3V3A V RANGE SHIFT MODE LOCAL SETUP Displays relevant keys and indicator V RANGE SHIFT MODE T V MEAN suonpuo 1ueujeunsee u Bumes mn Explanation Measurement Mode One of the following measurement modes can be selected for measurement of voltage and current The initial value is RMS Indicator Voltage Current RMS Measures and displays true Mea
59. completed For example if the next program message is transmitted after the measurement range has been changed and an query is made about the measurement data it may occur that regardless whether the measurement data have been updated MEASure NORMal VALue will be executed The display becomes no data and 9 91E 37 Not a number will be output CONFigure VOLTage RANGe 60V MEASure NORMal VALue lt PMT gt In this case synchronization with the time at which the update of measurement data is completed must be accomplished as shown next Using STATus CONDition query A STATus CONDition query is used to make an inquiry about the contents of the condition register page App2 37 It is possible to judge whether updating measurement data is in progress or not by reading bit 0 of the condition register Bit 0 is 1 if updating is in progress and 0 if updating is stopped Using the extended event register Changes in the condition register are reflected in the extended event register page App2 38 Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus EESE 1 EESR SRE8 CONFigure VOLTage RANGe 60V lt PMT gt Service request is awaited MEASure NORMal VALue PMT STATus FILTerl FALL indicates that the transit filter is set so that bit O is set to 1 when bit O FILTer 1 of the condition register is changed from 1 to 0 STATus EESE 1 is a command used only to reflect the
60. gt ENTER dFib n ais ENTER SHIFT OUTPUT Pr nb 4 HAP dFLE End Selecting 10 A I dh V 6 A L default v s setting x ELAY f f Selecting desired item Le r SE CG K gt Setting output channel Setting output item 4 Display C 9 Display C 13 ch i ENTER H od ENTER che 10 H d Eh 3 Bod 1 When you press the ENTER key at step 13 the output v Pu a channel displayed at display B will change to the next ij EE ij HAr channel i e from ch1 to ch2 and so forth L tc n cn oa HH i 2 Displayed on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or Eh B PF later ch 7 bred d ch A Are d ch Ph i ch Ah chii dEL ch ig 7 HP chili RAR n 2 ch H nHEH ti Ph d Ph Ahr d Ah iin 10 V Sets the A column m E d A B 11 V Moves to the B column SHIFT gt 15 En d gt ENTER 12 V A Select from 1 to 4 End 11 10 IM 253401 01E 11 6 Setting the Output Items Setting the Output Item in case of Harmonic Analysis 1 Display C 3 Display C SETUP gt L unn 9 ENTER Setting output item 2 5 Display C SHIFT OUTPUT L i P nut 4 HAr
61. of the rated range or the peak value exceeds approximately 300 of the rated range Range down When the measured value becomes less than 30 of the rated range and the peak value is less than approximately 300 of the subordinate range Measurement mode switching The following modes can be set manually or by communication control RMS True RMS measurement for both voltage and current V MEAN Rectified Mean Calibrated to an RMS sine wave measurement for voltage and true RMS measurement for current DC Mean value measurement for voltage and current 15 2 Measurement Functions Item Method Voltage current Effective power Digital sampling method summation averaging method Frequency range DC 10 Hz to 50 kHz Crest factor 9 at rated input Display accuracy Accuracy within 3 months after calibration Conditions Temperature 23 5 C Humidity 30 to 75 R H Supply voltage Specified Voltage 5 Input waveform Sine wave Common mode voltage 0 V DC Filter ON at 200 Hz or less Scaling OFF This accuracy are guaranteed by YOKOGAWA calibration system Note The unit f in accuracy expressions is kHz DC 0 2 of rdg 0 2 of rng 10Hz lt f lt 45Hz 0 3 of rdg 0 2 of rng 45Hz lt f lt 66Hz 0 15 of rdg 0 1 of rng 66Hz lt f lt 1kHz 0 3 of rdg 0 2 of rng 1kHz lt f lt 10kHz 0 2 of rdg 0 3 of rng 0 05 x f of rdg 1
62. on End of A setting v node QE di 5P tT dHEH n d HER H The items in this figure are obtained by the following setting procedures The blinking part of the display can be set 1 After pressing the SHIFT key and the SHIFT indicator is lit press the SETUP OUTPUT key The output setting menu will appear on display C 2 Select r ELAY using the up down keys Pressing either key 4 selectable items will be displayed consecutively 3 Verify the setting by pressing the ENTER key The setting menu corresponding to the item selected at step 2 will appear at display C 4 Select oFF or on using the up down keys Pressing either key 6 selectable items will be displayed consecutively 5 Verify the setting by pressing the ENTER key IM 253401 01E Contents POO Lo o BRNO RR ORT 1 Checking the Contents of the Package 2 Safety PFrecautloliS erii E REP a ee Ee 4 How to Use this Manual ttti 6 Conventions Used in this Manual 15 1t 7 Chapter 1 What this Instrument Can Do 1 4 System Configuration and Block Diagram eese nennen 1 2 SEUDCHORSS 422 d trs eec tr eate ette dae See Ma iure i ete av ich iro E ett 1 3 Digital Numbers Characters and Initial Menus Chapter 2 Nomenclature Keys and Displays 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top View eese eene eene teen nenne nnne nennen 2 2 Operation Keys and Function Element Display 2 3 Displays in case of Overrange Err
63. only when equipped with the comparator option Communication output mode Delimiter Header Output interval in case of talk only GP IB address when GP IB is installed Handshaking method when RS 232 C is installed Data format when RS 232 C is installed Baud rate when RS 232 C is installed suoloun njes 19410 D IM 253401 01E 13 1 13 2 Initializing Set up Parameters Relevant Keys Explanation A hour min S SAMPLE a 9 MV VA 1 2 3 Z GauTo s auto c V OVER E L L Li k A Var Function ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays ole l L fa L J M W Te CJ MODE TRIG relevant wor 5 keys and AMS m V PF 12 3 x v amp EME indicator c3 V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ e INTEGRATOR cape MW START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET shour min sec c m V Hz 1 2 3 r 7 I ri i i LOCAL SETUP ad m e eu k A h FUNCTION ELEMENT J J J rj b INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT 5193W 303W c3 SCALING AVG c3 FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL HARMONICS 3 304W amp 3V3A WING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to lea
64. th display K attenuation constant Moving Averaging Lin Moving averaging is expressed by the following equation Dn Mn m 1 Mn m 2 Mn2 Mn 1 Mn m where Dn the value at the n th display Mn m 1 the measurement value at m 1 display before the n th display Mn m 2 the measurement value at m 2 display before the n th display Mn2 the measurement value at two displays before the n th display Mni the measurement value at one display before the n th display Mn the measurement value at the n th display m sample number Setting the Averaging Sample Number Attenuation Constant The following selections are available The attenuation constant for exponential averaging and the sample number for moving averaging are set and saved seperately The initial value is 8 Setting Averaging ON OFF Select the averaging menu once again after having set the averaging values The initial value is oFF on When this setting is selected pressing the ENTER key will start averaging and the AVG indicator will light oFF When this setting is selected pressing the ENTER key will stop averaging and the AVG indicator will extinguish IM 253401 01E 4 11 suonipuo 1ueujeunsee y Bumes mn 4 7 Using the Four Arithmetical Operation Function Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later
65. 01 or later A B display A display B A JB display A display B h5 Data state N normal I Overrange O Computation overflow P Peak overflow E No data h6 Indicates data lag lead in case of DEG data type In case of other data types _ space will occur G Lag D Lead _ Not detectable Data Section The data section consists of 11 bytes d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 dl polarity _ space or minus d2tod8 mantissa floating point number of the maximum six digits d9 to dll exponent E 3 m E40 E 3 5 k E 6 M Data state in case of an overrange oL is being displayed m ne h3 h4 I 9 9 9 9 9 9 T E 3 Data state in case of a computation overflow oF PFErr dEGEr ErrLo ErrHi is being displayed m nz h3 h4 O 8 8 8 888 E 0 Data state in case of no data when the display is I becomes E for data during overrange Elapsed time of integration H MIS di d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d1 to d3 Hour d4 d5 to d6 Minute d7 d8 to d9 Second 11 4 IM 253401 01E 11 4 Output Format for Normal Measured Computed Data Harmonic Analysis Data Set up Parameters and Error Codes Output Format
66. 11 AOUTput PRESet Sets the default value as D A output items App 2 11 COMMunicateG roup COMMunicate Queries all settings related to communication App 2 12 COMMunicate HEADer Sets queries whether a header is to be added App 2 12 COMMunicate LOCKout Sets cancels local lockout App 2 12 COMMunicate REMote Sets remote local condition App 2 12 COMMunicate STATus Queries the status of a specified circuit App 2 13 COMMunicate VERBose Sets queries the response to be in full or abbreviated form App 2 13 COMMunicate WAIT Waits until one of the specified extended event occurs App 2 13 COMMunicate WAIT Generates a response when on of the specified extended events occurs App 2 13 CONFigure Group CONFigure Queries all settings related to the measurement conditions App 2 15 CONFigure AVERaging Queries all settings related to the averaging function App 2 15 CONFigure AVERaging STATe Sets queries averaging ON OFF App 2 15 CONFigure AVERaging TYPE Sets queries averaging type and constant App 2 15 CONFigure CURRent Queries all settings related to the current range App 2 15 CONFigure CURRent AUTO Sets queries the current auto range ON OFF App 2 15 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling Queries all settings related to the external sensor App 2 15 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ALL Sets the scaling values for the external sensor for all elements at once App 2 15 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ELEMent x Sets queries the sca
67. 11 Command error 12 Parameter error 13 Attempted to change settings which cannot be changed while integration was in progress 14 Attempted to set auto range mode while external sensor range was selected 15 Attempted to execute a command that was protected 16 Attempted to execute a command that was protected while harmonic analysis was being performed 17 Time out in print output 18 Not in printing mode or no data available 19 Attempted to execute commands while recalling storing is in progress 30 File data failure 3 File is damaged 32 Not stored in internal memory 33 No data to be stored in internal memory 4 Attempted to start integration when integration had been stopped due to an irregularity 42 Attempt made to start integration during integration 43 Measurement stopped due to overflow during integration or due to a power failure 44 Attempt made to stop integration while integration was interrupted 45 Attempt made to reset integration while integration was in progress OE OF Syntax Query Example Description OFD OFD Syntax Query Example Description 46 Attempt made to start integration when peak overflow was detected 51 Measurement data overflow occurred oL is displayed 52 Voltage peak overflow occurred 53 Current peak overflow occurred 54 Power factor exceeded 2 PFErr is displayed 55 degErr was displayed 56 Frequency input level was too low or be
68. 8 2 Setting the Element PLL Source and Harmonic Distortion Method Explanation Setting the Element Only one input element should be set for harmonic analysis The initial value is EL1 At the WT110 the element setting menu does not appear ELI Element 1 will be used for analysis EL2 Element 2 will be used for analysis In case of the 253502 this menu will not be shown EL3 Element 3 will be used for analysis Setting the PLL source For harmonic analysis it is necessary to select the input to be used as the fundamental frequency PLL source for synchronization PLL stands for Phase Locked Loop V1 Sets the voltage of element 1 as the PLL source Al Sets the current of element 1 as the PLL source V2 Sets the voltage of element 2 as the PLL source A2 Sets the current of element 2 as the PLL source V3 Sets the voltage of element 3 as the PLL source A3 Sets the current of element 3 as the PLL source Note Ifthe fundamental frequency of the PLL source cannot be measured due to fluctuations or distortion it is not possible to obtain correct measurement results In this case it is suggested that voltage with relatively small distortion be selected as the PLL source It is recommended to turn ON the filter in cases where the fundamental frequency is 300Hz or less and high frequency components are present Ifthe amplitude of the input signal selected as the PLL source is smaller than th
69. A of the GP IB function and enables reception of commands and transmission of data Measured data is output on reception of the OD command 488 2 Mode This mode allows receiving of commands conforming to the IEEE St d 488 2 1987 protocol Talk only Mode This mode is equivalent to the Talk only mode of the GP IB function Only measured data can be output and commands cannot be received There is no equivalent to the addressable mode B of the GP IB function Print Mode This mode is useful when harmonic analysis data are output to the external plotter printer For details refer to page 10 17 RS 232 C Interface Specifications A TESTS Electrical characteristics conforms to EIA RS 232 C Connection point to point Communications full duplex Synchronization start stop system Baud rate 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 Start bit 1 bit Data length word length 7 or 8 bits Parity Even odd or no parity Stop bit 1 or 2 bits Hardware handshaking True or be used for control User can select whether CA CB CC and CD signals will always be Software handshaking User can select whether to control only transmission or both transmission and reception using X on and X off signals X on ASCII 11H X off ASCII 13H Receive buffer size 64 bytes The connectors used in this function have protective covers When the cov
70. AUTO o V OVER k A Var Function ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays Shove M W Me MODE TRIG relevant MODE keys and c nus m V PF 1232 hd VN ENTER indicator V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ S INTEGRATOR pe MW START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET hour mh see A a mv H 123 r F k A h j ruwcrow ELEMENT INTERFACE OUTPUT M W ht c3103W 33W C3 SCALING c3 AVG FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL HARMONICS c3304W c33V3A WIRING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 1 Selecting the Display Function Select deg phase angle by pressing the FUNCTION key of display B Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION B Y 4 3 w ter You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key 2 Selecting the Input Element Select the input element by pressing the ELEMENT key of display B The operation is the same as the one described on page 5 1 Display Range and Units Display range G180 0 to d180 0 G meaning phase lag d meaning phase lead Unit deg Selecting the Display Function When you select deg the phase angle will be displayed Selecting the Input Element The type of input element which can be selected depends on the model number Make your selection after having verified your model number 1 2 3 Displays the measurement values of element 1 2 3 e
71. CURRENT RANGE EXTERNAL 50 0E 03 2 5 5 10V for Example CONFigure FILTer Function Sets the filter ON OFF queries the current setting Syntax CONFigure FILTer Boolean CONFigure FILTer Example CONFIGURE FILTER OFF CONFIGURE FILTER CONFIGURE FILTER 0 CONFigure MODE Function Sets the measurement mode of current and voltage queries the current setting Syntax CONFigure MODE RMS VMEan DC CONFigure MODE CONFIGURE MODE RMS CONFIGURE MODE gt CONFIGURE MODE RMS Example IM 253401 01E App2 15 Z SPUBWLUOD uoreaiunuiuo Appendix 2 3 Commands CONFigure SCALing Function Syntax Example Queries all settings relating to the scaling function CONFigure SCALing CONFIGURE SCALING CONFIGURE SCALING STATE 0 PT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFIGURE SCALING CT ELEMENT 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFIGURE SCALING SFACTOR ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor Function Syntax Example Queries all scaling values related to voltage current power CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor CONFIGURE SCALING PT gt CONFIGURE SCALING PT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ALL Function Syntax Example Description Sets the scaling v
72. F F for WT130 only S AHU AI EF H ENTER SCALE Y EE Hg pna f E n f Lr H3 PaLr5t 3 LF Ht A RE H 9 ENTER LF Ae LF R3 Ath gt I H h Eu Rub AL TAL ob A h Explanation Crest factor computation The crest factor is determined by peak value rms value The crest factors for voltage and current are computed and displayed is displayed at the front when the crest factor is being displayed Computing equation for the crest factor and display CF V1 Displays the result of Peak of V1 rms of V1 CF V2 Displays the result of Peak of V2 rms of V2 for 253503 only CF V3 Displays the result of Peak of V3 rms of V3 for 253502 and 253503 CF AI Displays the result of Peak of A1 rms of A1 CF A2 Displays the result of Peak of A2 rms of A2 for 253503 only CF A3 Displays the result of Peak of A3 rms of A3 for 253502 and 253503 Note Definition of crest factor EERIE value RMS value If the measurement mode is V MEAN or DC is displayed IM 253401 01E 4 15 suonipuo 1ueujeunsee y Bumes mn 4 9 Computing the Efficiency Applies to WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later Relevant Keys A hour min SAMPLE yr 9 n V VA 1 2 3 Ga4uTo auto V OVER EL L L D k A Var Fun
73. GOSUB ERRCHK LOCATE 15 1 BUF SPACES 255 DO CALL IBRD WT BUF GOSUB ERRCHK PRINT LEFTS BUFS IBCNT 2 LOOP WHILE LEFTS BUFS 3 lt gt END FOR J 0 TO 500 C INKEYS IF C lt gt THEN PRINT C EXIT FOR NEXT J IF C S THEN CMDS ENT CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK CMD END CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK EXIT DO ELSEIF C C THEN CMDS CAN CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK EXIT DO END IF LOOP RETURN When IBFIND call failed ERRDISP PRINT No such board or device name GOTO PRGEND GP IB error check ERRCHK IF IBSTAS gt 0 THEN RETURN PRINT Error GOTO PRGEND Sspuewwog uoeorunwwog IM 253401 01E App1 13 Appendix 1 2 Sample Program NK kk Ck CK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK Me WT110 WT130 Vi Program for D A output adjusting ME Turn ON the power while pressing the SHIFT key Ue Microsoft QuickBASIC 4 0 4 5 Version z Noc ck ok ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Sk ck ck ko ko ko koX REM SINCLUDE qbdecl4 bas BORDS GPIBO CALL IBFIND BORDS BD amp IF BD lt 0 THEN GOTO ERRDISP CALL IBSIC BD GOSUB ERRCHK DEVICES WT CALL IBFIND DEVICES WT IF WT 0 THEN GOTO ERRDISP CA
74. IM 253401 01E 5 3 5 3 Measuring Displaying Four Arithmetic Operation Value Crest Factor and Peak Value Relevant Keys A SAMPLE V OVER z 3 p lt A OVER VA va A TIME 123r FUNCTION ELEMENT MODE g ca RMS 3 lt V MEAN x pe gt PF deg 123r FUNCTION ELEMENT hour C m k M V A w Hz ht c3 SCALING c3 AVG FILTER STORE c3 RECALL lt er aE AS c FUNCTION ELEMENT HARMONICS Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure 1 Selecting the display Function Select either 5 four arithmetical operations crest factor voltage peak value or P current peak value by pressing the FUNCTION key c AUTO AUTO V RANGE A RANGE HOLD MODE TRIG Vv A ENTER gt a ea ea INTEGRATOR START STOP RESET HARMONCS MEMORY INTEG SET c3 REMOTE a LOCAL SETUP INTERFACE OUTPUT c3103W 363W c3304W c33V3A WIRING Displays relevant keys and indicator Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION C Y A W V i gt AB Wh FU
75. LI L W TIME MODE TRIG relevant wo keys and Aus mv PF 12 3xr V Jr indicator c3 V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ A ES INTEGRATOR EI W START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET i hour min sec c3 REMOTE a m V H 12 3r rn f r J l im k A h Function ELEMENT INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT LS LL Jy w ne L1 LJ 103W 363W SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS aseaw cavaA MAING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Setting the Output Mode If the communication interface Setting the output Mode that you purchased is an 1 Display C H RS 232 C the menu proceeds LOCAL Communication setting Setting plotter or printer 2 to the Selecting handshaking SHIFT INTERFACE 2 3 Display C 5 method menu of page 12 4 Pr nk gt ENTER i HPGL ENTER gt Set the relevant parameters such as the handshaking End 4 eore End j method format and baud rate pr 3 then press the ENTER key to ee complete the settings If the EO communication interf
76. NORMAL VALUE Received data 10 04E 00 10 02E 00 10 03E 00 49 41E 00 49 52E 00 49 47E 00 429 0E 00 429 2E 00 0 858E 03 Data contents V1 10 04E 00 V3 10 02E 00 V 10 03E 00 A1 49 41E 00 A3 49 52E 00 AY 49 47E 00 W1 429 0E 00 W3 429 2E 00 WY 0 858E 03 App2 24 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands Output example for model 253503 where measurement data first have been stored during integration and while recalling these data the following commands have been sent Sent MEASURE NORMAL ITEM PRESET INTEGRATE MEASURE NORMAL VALUE Received data 10 428 6E 00 428 1E 00 428 8E 00 1 285E 03 71 45E 00 71 37E 00 71 49E 00 214 31E 00 8 2342E 00 8 2354E 00 8 2519E 00 24 721E 00 0 10 0 Data contents Recalled data number 10 W1 10 428E 00 W2 428 1E 00 W3 428 8E 00 W2 1 285E 03 WH1 71 45E 00 WH2 71 37E 00 WH3 71 49E 00 WHY 214 31E 00 AH1 8 2342E 00 AH2 8 2354E 00 AH3 8 2519E400 AHY 24 721E400 Integration preset time 0 hours 10 minutes 0 seconds Data Format of Harmonic Analysis All data will be output in the lt NR3 gt format mantissa max 4 digits exponent 2 digits Output Format of Harmonic Analysis The communication output is set ON by any of the commands starting with MEASure HARMonics ITEM and the harmonic measurement data or frequency of PLL source SYNChronize are output according to the following order of priority Besides in case of recalling normal measurement or integration data the
77. PF 12 3 x V eR indicator c3 V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ Z E INTEGRATOR mpc W START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET G hour min sec c3 REMOTE a m V H 12 3r LOCAL SETUP a me k A ho FUNCTION ELEMENT J I J rj INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT mE MW ht 163W 393W SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS aseaw cavaA MAING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Turning the Harmonic Analysis Function ON OFF 1 Display C 3 START oFF ENTER SHIFT HARMONICS 2 End nn x ELEA f tr YA E tHd Explanation Turning the Harmonic Analysis Function ON OFF on Pressing the ENTER key after selecting on will result in starting of the harmonic analysis and the HARMONICS indicator will light up The harmonic order will be displayed on display A oFF Pressing the ENTER key after selecing off will result in stopping of the harmonic analysis and the HARMONICS indicator will extinguish Note When the harmonic analysis function is turned O
78. PRGEND CALL IBLOC WTS END End When IBFIND call failed ERRDISP PRINT No such board or device name GOTO PRGEND GP IB error check ERRCHK IF IBSTA gt 0 THEN RETURN PRINT Error GOTO PRGEND IM 253401 01E App2 41 Z spueululo uoneoiunululo2 Appendix 2 6 ASCII Character Codes Appendix 2 6 ASCII Character Codes ASCII chracter codes are given below 1 2 4 5 7 0 20 40 0 60 16 100 0 120 16 140 0 160 16 10 16 20 32 30 48 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112 1 21 LLO 41 1 61 17 101 1 121 17 141 1 161 17 DC1 A Q a q 11 17 21 33 31 49 41 65 51 81 61 97 71 113 2 22 42 2 62 18 102 2 122 18 142 2 162 18 LEJ DC2 B R b r 12 18 22 34 32 50 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 114 3 23 43 3 63 19 103 3 123 19 143 3 163 19 18 19 23 35 33 51 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115 4 24 DCL 44 4 64 20 104 4 124 20 144 4 164 20 14 20 24 36 34 52144 68 54 84 64 100 74 116 5 25 PPU 45 5 65 21 105 5 125 21 145 5 165 21 e NAK E U e u 15 21125 37 35 53 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117 6 26 46 6 66 22 106 6 126 22 146 6 166 22 SYN amp F V V 16 22 26 38 36 54146 70 56 86 66 102 76 118 7 27 47 7 67 23 107 7 127 23 147 7 167 23 ETB G W g w 17 23 27 39 37 55 47 71 57 87 67 103 77 119 8 30 SPE 50 8 70 24 110 8 130 24 150 8 170 24 CAN H X h x 18 24128 40 38 56 48 72 58 88 68 104 78 120 9 31 SPD 51 9
79. Reo A lt Space gt OFF V Reo A po Space L Register A lt Space gt OFF gt l No Reo A 9 4 M Lockout z lt Space gt OFF j 4 NA Reo A 0 _ status J M COMMunicate COMMunicate LOCKout Function Queries all the communication settings Function Sets local lockout ON or OFF Syntax COMMunicate Syntax COMMunicate LOCKout lt Boolean gt Example COMMUNICATE COMMunicate LOCKout COMMUNICATE HEADER 1 VERBOSE 1 Example COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT ON COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT gt COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT 1 COMMunicate HEADer Description This command is used for the RS 232C interface Function Determines whether a header is to be added for example CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 150 0 00 or COMMunicate REMote not for example 150 0E 00 when sending a response Function Sets remote ON or local mode OFF to a query or queries the current setting Syntax COMMunicate REMote lt Boolean gt Syntax COMMunicate HEADer lt Boolean gt COMMunicate REMote COMMunicate HEADer Example COMMUNICATE REMOTE ON Example COMMUNICATE HEADER ON COMMUNICATE REMOTE COMMUNICATE REMOTE 1 COMMUNICATE HEADER gt COMMUNICATE HEADER 1 Description This command is used for the RS 232C interface App2 12 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands COMMunicate STATus Function Syntax Example Description Queries the status of a specified circuit COMMunicate
80. SHIFT HARMONICS Shows the setting menu for harmonics ON OFF PLL source and element selection Ch 8 STOP SHIFT MEMORY Shows the setting menu for storing recalling measurement data and set up information Ch 9 LOCAL When the REMOTE indicator is lit the remote function will be canceled When the REMOTE indicator is not lit the setting menu for communication printing will appear LOCAL SHIFT INTERFACE Shows the setting menu for communication printing Ch 11 12 SETUP SHIFT OUTPUT Shows the setting menu for communication output items D A output plotter printer output and comparator output Ch 10 to 12 SETUP For settings such as initializing settings filter average scaling computing and ext sensor input Ch 4 Indicators for operating functions When a function is set and in operation this indicator will light up SHIFT Moves the decimal point from left to right RESET INTEG SET LOCAL SETUP START Starts integration STOP Stops integration RESET Integration value and elapsed time of integration are set to zero 0 RESET SHIFT INTEG SET Shows the setting menu for integration mode time and rated integration time Ch 7 IM 253401 01E 2 2 Operation Keys and Function Element Dis
81. START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET c m V Az 1 2 3 r E ci i Tm o gt k A h FUNCTION ELEMENT f D f J l INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT Gmi oo MW ht 193W 393W c3 SCALING AVG c3 FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL HARMONICS 5s 4W a Sk wena Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Setting the Element 1 Display C START 2 anaFF SHIFT HARMONICS X m Setting the element on 3 Display C 5 y El E3 gt ENTER 1 EL ENTER r End ij KG Yn A EL g Mv EHd f EL Setting the PLL source 1 Display C START aFF SHIFT HARMONICS 2 A an v Ccrer_ Setting the PLL source E EE 3 Display C 5 ij 5 Hn C 9 ENTER 7 HI ENTER End tHgd Ai Y ug re Hi H3 Setting the Computation Method of the Harmonic Distortion 1 Display C START aFF SHIFT HARMONICS 2 A nn M ELEn S UE Setting the computation method Ae Display C 5 E Ho ENTER sem ENTER End CSA cse IM 253401 01E jeuondo uonounJ sisA jeuy oiuouueH eui Burs i
82. Setting the Integration Preset Time The D A output of integrated values will be 5 0V FS when the rated range has been input consequently during the preset integration time rated integration time Setting range 000 00 0 hrs 0 min to 999 59 999 hrs 59 min The initial value is 1 When 000 00 is set the D A output value will be OV IM 253401 01E 10 5 ndino uy jeui8 x3 Busy H 10 3 D A Output optional Relation between the output item and the D A output voltage Frequency D A output Approx 7 5V 0 5V 0 2V t gt Displayed value Hz Integrated value D A output Approx 7 0V gt BOW epee eit eee epee eee one In case of 140 of i rated value input In case of rated value input i Time 0 o to rated integration time Other items D A output Displayed value Output Approx 7 5V Tom 140 Approx 7 0V Approx 7 0V p 100 5 0V 5 0V 096 OV 100 5 0V 14096 Approx 7 0V d 40 100 i Displayed 100 140 value 6 However for PF and deg points in the range from 5 to 7 V and from 5 to 7 V are not output If there is an error the output will M eccesso 5 0V be about 7 5 V If the MATH setting IEEE Approx 7 0V is set to efficiency the output will be 4 Approx 7 5V 5 V for 100 For Vp and Ap the output will be 5
83. Setting the Integration Timer camel Setting the timer Displ 1 Display C 5 Display A RESET 2 nadtb 3 r hour 4 min 4 6 SHIFT INTEGSET 2 a nnnnn z A bi ner gt eENTER gt QGH UL 9 ENTER v End dHt nE 4 v Up down f 5 V Cursor shift SHIFT gt Explanation Selecting the Measurement Mode The following selections are available The initial value is nor e nor Select this for manual or standard integration mode Depending on the integration timer this instrument will automatically decide the appropriate mode e Cont Select this for the continuous integration mode Setting the Integration Timer This setting decides how long integration will be performed in terms of hours and minutes The setting ranges from 000 00 0 hrs 0 min to 999 59 999 hrs 59 min The initial value is 000 00 000 00 When nor is selected on the integration menu the manual integration mode will become valid When Cont is selected an error code will appear and integration will not be performed 000 01 to 999 59 The time during which integration will be performed when in the standard or continuous integration mode The standard or continuous mode should be selected at the integration mode menu 7 4 IM 253401 01E 7 3 Displaying Integrated Values
84. TER Moves the decimal point from left to right a i INTEGRATOR STOP RESET START MEMORY INTEG SET E Starts integration V POR E E E lel 3 3 3 3 sw ue EE z 303W Stops integration C3 SCALING c3 AVG c3 FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL C3 HARMONICS 3V3A OUTPUT START RESET SHIFT HARMONICS ntegration value and elapsed time of Shows the setting menu for harmonics ON OFF PLL integration are set to zero 0 source and element selection Ch 8 RESET STOP SHIFT INTEG SET SHIFT MEMORY Shows the setting menu for storing recalling measurement data and set up information Ch 9 Shows the setting menu for integration mode time and rated integration time Ch 7 LOCAL WIRING When the REMOTE indicator is lit the remote Sets the connection format matching the function will be canceled When the REMOTE connection to the voltage current input indicator is not lit the setting menu for terminals at the rear page 3 15 communication printing will appear LOCAL SHIFT INTERFACE Shows the setting menu for communication printing Ch 11 12 SETUP SHIFT OUTPUT Shows the setting menu for communication output items D A output plott
85. V when the value is three times the range rating In addition output will not be 7 5 V when Vp and Ap are over the range 10 6 IM 253401 01E 10 4 Comparator Function optional When the instrument is equipped with option CMP you can compare the measured computed integrated analysis values with previously set limits and these results can be output by contact relay Contact Relay Output This instrument is equipped with four contact relays 4 ch as follows If the relay is not A aan operating the NC Normally Closed contact is closed If the relay is operating the NC contact is opened and the NO Normally Open contact is closed Relay specifications Contact rating rated 24V 0 5A max 30V 0 5A Minimum load 10mV 10uA Operating life with load approx 500000 times at contact rating Operating life without load approx one hundred million times Contact Response time less than 500ms Note Since this relay is subject to wear it is excluded from the 3 year warranty Damage to the relays may occur when a voltage or current exceeding the specified range is applied to the contact output terminal Comparator Mode The following two comparator modes are available Single Mode If the measured computed integrated analysis values exceed the previously set limits the relay contact will become NO This mode is useful when you want to assign each of the four relays individually Refer t
86. What this Instrument Can Do Explains the flow of the measurement input signals and gives an outline of the functions Chapter 2 Nomenclature Keys and Displays Gives the name of each part and each key and describes how to use it This chapter also gives the displays in case of overrange error during measurement Chapter 3 Before Operation Describes points to watch during use and describes how to install the instrument wire the measuring circuits connect the power cord and switch the power ON OFF Chapter 4 Setting Measurement Conditions Explains settings such as measurement mode filter ON OFF measurement range scaling in case of external PT CT or external sensor such as shunt or clamp averaging and measurement conditions Chapter 5 Measuring Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power and Frequency Explains the procedures for measuring and displaying voltage current and active power Chapter 6 Computing Displaying Apparent Power Reactive Power Power Factor and Phase Angle Explains the procedures for measuring and displaying apparent power reactive power power factor and phase angle Chapter 7 Integrating Explains the procedures for integration of active power and current Chapter 8 Using the Harmonic Analysis Function option Explains the procedures when using the harmonic analysis function Chapter 9 Storing Recalling Explains the procedures when storing or recalling
87. and later Refer to page 3 14 to confirm your version 13 V cursor shift SHIFT gt 12 4 IM 253401 01E 12 3 Setting the Mode Handshaking Method Data Format and Baud Rate Explanation Mode Setting Refer to page 12 1 for more details Handshaking To use an RS 232 C interface to transfer data between this instrument and a computer it is necessary to use certain procedures by mutual agreement to ensure the proper transfer of data These procedures are called handshaking Various handshaking systems are available depending on the computer to be used the same handshaking system must be used for both computer and this instrument This instrument allows you to choose any handshaking method from the following eight using the panel keys Handshaking method combinations a circle indicates that the function is available Data sending control Control method when sending data to computer Data receiving control Control method when receiving data from computer Software handshake Hardware handshake Sending stops when X off is received and sending is resumed when X on is received Mode selection no Sending stops when CB CTS is False and sending is resumed when CB is True Sending No stops when CC DSR is False and sending is resumed when CC is True handshake Software handshake Hardware handshake X off is sent when received data buffer becomes 3 4 ful
88. blinking From that point a voltage of approx 5V will be output from the connector 2 Press the V RANGE or A RANGE key to move the blinking digit of display C Then using the or v key adjust the blinking value to the value displayed at the DMM 3 After having adjusted all digits of display C press the ENTER key 5 000V will appear on display C and a voltage of approx 5 V will be output from the connector 4 Carry out step 2 once again 5 After having adjusted all digits of display C press the ENTER key 6 Change the channel indication on display A from ch1 to ch2 Carry out steps 1 to 5 to adjust channel 2 7 Carry out steps 1 to 5 to adjust all channels 8 Press the SHIFT key and display C will change to dA This completes the D A output adjustments When you press the RESET key instead of the SHIFT key the carried out adjustments will become invalid After Finishing Adjustments After having finished all adjustments turn the power OFF and ON again Communication Commands to Carry Out Adjustments Command Description CAL1 Enters the range adjustment mode CAL2 Enters the external input range adjustment mode CAL3 Enters the D A output adjustment mode CALO Finishes adjustment and returns to normal measurement mode CRO Switches to 30V range in range adjustment mode CR1 Switches to 300V range in range adjustment mode CR2 Switches to 1A range in range adjustment mode CR1 Switches to 10A range in ra
89. bytes Sets the delimiter EOI output timing This command is used with the 2533E but cannot be used with the WT110 130 even if the 2533E group is selected by the CM command Sets the measurement mode inquires about the current setting MNm lt terminator gt m stands for measurement mode m 0 RMS 1 V MEAN 2 DC MN terminator MNO Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Requests output of setting parameters Output format differs from that of the 2533E OL terminator MODEL253503 lt terminator gt RV9 AV1 lt terminator gt RV9 AA1 SA50 00 lt terminator gt DA1 DB2 DC3 lt terminator gt EA1 EB1 EC1 lt terminator gt WR3 FLO0 SC0 AG0 HD0 MT0O lt terminator gt MNO lt terminator gt KV1 000 KA1 000 K W 1 000 lt terminator gt AT1 AC1 lt terminator gt IC0 TMO 0 lt terminator gt SO0 SRO 0 0 RO0 RRO 0 0 lt terminator gt PS1 HA0 OR1 HE1 DFO lt terminator gt RT1 0 lt terminator gt YOO YM1 DY0 YC1 lt terminator gt CM 2 lt terminator gt END lt terminator gt When the external sensor scaling values and P C F scaling values set for each element differ from each other the value set for element 1 will be output Os WR WR Syntax Query Example Description Requests output of setting parameters This command cannot be used if 2533E command group is selected by the CM command However in this case the OL command can be used instead Sets
90. ch4 are pairs and the same type of limit should be set for the channels of one pair V voltage A current P active power PF power factor Vt harmonic distortion of voltage At harmonic distortion of current CV relative harmonic content of each voltage harmonic order CA relative harmonic content of each current harmonic order CP relative harmonic content of each active power harmonic order Vd voltage phase angle of each order Ad current phase angle of each order no data For details concerning the meaning of harmonic analysis values refer to chapter 8 Setting the element corresponds to column B in the operating procedure WT110 253401 no such element setting available WT130 253502 element can be selected from 1 or 3 WT130 253503 element can be selected from 1 2 or 3 10 12 IM 253401 01E 10 6 Setting the Comparator Limit Values optional Setting the harmonic order corresponds to column C in the procedure Setting range 01 to 50 Initial value refer to the following The maximum order of harmonic analysis data varies by the fundamental frequency Therefore there might be cases where no analysis data are present up to the 50th order and the display will show bars In such a case even if you set an harmonic order determination will not be carried out Therefore before setting verify the maximum order chapter 15 and the fundamental frequency of the object of measur
91. coming from an even lower value but will be activated when the input signal value becomes 0 Make sure to set the polarity of the phase angle as well for phase lead and can be ignored for phase lag IM 253401 01E 10 13 ndino uy jeui8 x3 Busy H 10 7 Comparator Display optional Relevant Keys A hour min SAMPLE m V VA 1 2 3 X SauTo Auro o OV OVER L LI k A Vat Function ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays ia DER J LL L l M W Time MODE TRIG relevant MODE keys and ca nus r Fi mv PF 123r v Jr indicator OV MEAN m I 7 r k A deg Function ELEMENT _ Z coos EE cape MW START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET hour min sec 3 c m V Hz 12 3 r LOCAL SETUP nm m k A h Function ELEMENT INTERFACE OUTPUT lam mw n OO C E c103W c 303W SCALING c3 AVG FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL HARMONICS c33064W o 3V3A winna Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will
92. contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual General Handling Precautions Never place anything on top of the instrument especially objects containing water Entry of water into the instrument may result in breakdowns When Moving the Instrument First turn off the power of the objects to be measured and disconnect the connected cables such as for measurement and communication Then turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet Always carry the instrument by the handles as shown below WT110 253401 WT130 253502 253503 To prevent internal temperature rise do not block the vent holes in the instrument case Keep input terminals away from electrically charged articles as they may damage internal circuits Do not allow volatile chemicals to come into contact with the case or operation panel Also do not leave any rubber or vinyl products in contact with them for prolonged periods The operation panel is made of thermoplastic resin so take care not to allow any heated articles such as a soldering iron to come in contact with it For cleaning the case and the operation panel unplug the power cord first then gently wipe with a dry soft and clean cloth Do not use chemicals such as benzene or thinner since these may cause discoloration or damage If the instrument will not be used for a long period unplug the power cord from the AC outl
93. data number will be output in lt NR1 gt format as well 0 Data number in case of recalling 1 Frequency of PLL source SYNChronize 2 VTHD 3 V 4 VCON 5 ATHD 6 A 7 ACON 8 PF 9 W 10 WCON 11 VDEG 12 ADEG Harmonic analysis data will be output for all applicable elements To find out to which element the data correspond use the HARMonics ELEMent command Frequency of PLL Source SYNChronize 1 data Outputs the fundamental frequency VHZ AH2 of the voltage current for which the PLL source has been set The input of the PLL source can be found out using HARMonics SYNChronize VTHD ATHD 1 data Outputs the harmonic distortion factor of voltage current for either EC or CSA The used computation method can be found out using the HARMonics THD command V A W 51 or 31 data Rms values of the 1st to 50 or 30 th order fundamental analysis value 1st order harmonic analysis value 2nd order harmonic analysis value 50 or 30 th order VCON ACON WCON 49 or 29 data Harmonic relative content 2nd order harmonic relative content 50 or 30 th order PF 1 data Outputs the power factor of the fundamental 1st order VDEG 50 or 30 data Phase angle between thelst order voltage and 1st order current Phase angle between the 2nd order voltage and Ist order voltage Phase angle between the 50 or 30 th order voltage and the 1st order voltage ADEG 50 or 30 data Phase angle between thelst order voltage and Is
94. ene ep Pe e eerie Appl 10 App 1 3 For Users Using Communication Commands of Digital Power Meter 2533E Appl 15 Communication Commands according to the IEEE488 2 1987 Standard App 2 1 Overview of IEEE 488 2 1987 essere nennen nennen App 2 2 Program Forriat oe etre t DERE n RERO E Kee KE eu Ee ep ebbe evR PN eU Ee ta dp ee RE 22 1 Symbols Used in Syntax Descriptions 2 2 2 M SSag eS cade i ARE ERIT UR TOES EG ERREUR Oe EE HET UES e A INTUS 2237 LI EE M 2 2 4 RESPONSES coe ne trn eie e AOI UR CERERI EE FORES C Pee 2 2 5 2 2 6 Synchronization with the Controller eee App 23 COMMANGS zs tee trt neo teet ie eate edeeioetes 2 94L J Command East eie eL Bee 2 3 2 KOUT put Group 4 cete e e ERRORS RO E EE de N 2 3 3 QOMMunic te Group atrox ee e pne HA ROI EN S eO 23 4 QONFigure GTOUD rec o n ERE EON IR E UR REDE RE SC IY 2 3 9 DISPlay Group iis iet RERO UE EAR ORDERED EINBAU VE 2 3 6 HARMoni6S GIOUD elo eese ARE rest etu e PR e E ene pepe 2 34 CIN FEGrat e Group eicit en t eee he tee cotton rre idea eroe en cns 2 328 IMATE GIEOUD teer ter ie o een Y HER HR E TR d Hon PETERE YS ede eng 2 3 9 MEA Sure Group eren i er Eee ee Ee Hb et vete ea NEKETEK 2 3 10 RE Call GtoUp e RO RR nain 2 3 T1 REEay Group iei eee Nette etre i eee eH cete Un 10 IM 253401 01E Contents 23 AD SAMPlIe GrOUD
95. for analysis will be stored Aborting Storage when all the above described blocks are full e when during the storage process oFF is selected at the store ON OFF setting Setting the Storage Interval Sets the time during which storage will be carried out when storing normal measured data harmonic analysis function is turned OFF Setting range 00 00 00 Ohrs Omin Osec to 99 59 59 99hrs 59min 59sec e Initial value 00 00 00 When the setting is 00 00 00 the interval will become 250ms when storing harmonic analysis data harmonic analysis function is turned ON Setting range 00 00 00 Ohrs Omin Osec to 99 59 59 99hrs 59min 59sec e Initial value 00 00 00 When the setting ranges from 00 00 00 to 00 00 03 the interval will become 3s from 00 00 04 to 00 00 06 the interval will become 6s from 00 00 07 to 00 00 09 the interval will become 9s in other cases the set interval will be valid Storage ON OFF After having set the storage interval select the store menu once again The initial value is oFF on Storing will start by pressing the ENTER key after selecting on the STORE indicator will light while storage is in progress oFF Storing will stop by pressing the ENTER key after selecting oFF the STORE indicator will extinguish Note After storing has been stopped and storing is restarted the existing data in the memory will be overwritten Previous data will therefore be lo
96. integration started Pressing the RESET key is useful after integration has been stopped For details regarding the relation with the START STOP key refer to the following page Display in case of Integration Over When the maximum integration value has been reached 999999MWh MAh or 99999MWh MAh integration will stop and that result will be held on the display When the maximum integration time has been reached up to 999hrs 59min integration will stop and that result will be held on the display 7 6 IM 253401 01E 7 4 Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function Relation between Integration Hold and the START STOP key When the HOLD key is pressed the display and communication output of the integrated results is being held while integration continues The relation between this hold function and the START STOP key is as follows Even when starting integration while the hold function is on the display and communication output will remain unchanged Only canceling the hold function or activating a trigger pressing the SHIFT key followed by the HOLD TRIG key will result in displaying or outputting the integrated results of the time of cancellation ON HOLD OFF Displayed E m value lui Dotted line shows integrated value Integration preset time i START STOP RESET Even when stopping integration while the hold function is on the displayed integrated value will remain
97. is required before all spesifications of the instrument can be met Turning the Power OFF When turning the power OFF the previous set up parameters will be kept Consequently turning the power ON again will result in the appearance of the setting condition of the previous measurements Nole ee The instrument uses a lithium battery to back up set up information The life of the battery under normal operating temperature of 23 C is approx ten years When the battery life is exhausted turning ON the power switch will result in an error code and the battery needs to be replaced Never replace the battery yourself but inform your nearest representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual IM 253401 01E 3 13 3 8 Turning the Power ON OFF Opening Messages Display B Display C Power switch isplay isplay No display EESE LI D All LED s light up Extinguish For 253502 c Model s For WT110 Display differs C depending on specs Version and options No display Only for EX1 EX2 Only for HRM option For DA option For CMP option GPIB mode GPIB address RS 232 C mode RS 232 C handshake RS 232 C format RS 232 C baud rate All specs option have been displayed Displays the setting
98. items normal measurement items integration preset time 1hr Omin Mode single determination function V1 A1 P1 PF1 Limit value refer to page 10 12 10 13 display function ON OFF OFF Communication item normal measurement setting GP IB Addressable mode A address 1 status byte 15 delimiter 0 RS 232 C Normal mode handshaking mode 0 format 0 Baud rate 9600 delimiter 0 status byte 15 Note Be careful since measurement data will be lost when initializing However measurement data or set up parameters stored in the internal memory will be kept MATH computing equation applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later 13 2 IM 253401 01E 14 1 Adjustments When the measurement values are erroneous adjust this instrument using the following procedures Required Equipments Adjusting AC Voltage Current Standard 0 0296 30 to 300V 1 to 10A 60Hz recommended Yokogawa 9100 or 2558 if you want to carry out adjustments with an accuracy higher than the one 2558 is providing fine adjust the output using the Digital Multi Meter DMM 1271 DMM 0 5 recommended Yokogawa 7552 Preparations Preparing this instrument 1 Turn ON the power while pressing the SHIFT key Release the SHIFT key after all LED s have lit up 2 Press the ENTER key rAnGE will appear on display C Press the or v key and the display will change to Ein in case of the external input option dA
99. keep the wiring between the external sensor and this instrument as short as possible V 4 Voltage input terminal A Current input terminal LOAD Ext sensor input terminal Ext shunt Ifthe measuring object is high frequency and high power and is not grounded use an isolation sensor CT DC CT clamp Clamp sensor V Voltage input terminal LOAD Current input terminal OExt sensor input terminal IM 253401 01E 3 9 3 6 Wiring the Measurement Circuit when Using the External Sensor In cases where the maximum current of the object under measurement exceeds 20A measurement becomes possible by connecting an external sensor The range for external sensor input is either 2 5 5 10V or 50 100 200mV Either range is available as an option In the following wiring diagrams the external shunt is grounded When using the clamp sensor replace the shunt with the clamp sensor Note When using the external sensor or the clamp sensor take care not to reverse the polarity when applying the clamp to the measurement circuit Using the scaling function enables direct reading of measured values on the display Refer to section 4 5 on page 4 8 Wiring diagram for single phase two wire system with external shunt connected 253401 253502 253503 SOURCE LOAD SAE SIUNE MEE aW A Connection side HM OU T Ext
100. limit and measurement value on display 4 in case of dual mode m 1 2 Displays limit and measurement value on display 1 and 2 respectively m 34 Displays limit and measurement value on display 3 and 4 respectively YC terminator YCI e Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the mode of the comparator function inquires about the current setting YM m terminator m indicates the display mode m 0 Single mode 1 Dual mode YM terminator YMI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the comparator function ON OFF or inquires about the current setting YO m terminator m indicates whether the comparator function is ON OFF m 0 OFF 1 0N YO lt terminator gt YOI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value IM 253401 01E App1 9 Spueuuulo uoieorunuuulo2 Appendix 1 2 Sample Program Appendix 1 2 Sample Program Before Programming This section describes sample programs for a IBM PC AT and compatible system with National Instruments GPIB PCIIA board installed Sample programs in this manual are written in Quick BASIC version 4 0 4 5 Programming Format The programming format for this instrument is as follows Command Parameter Terminator The used codes are ASCII codes Example DA 2 CR LF command parameter terminator Commands One to three capital characters are used to designate a
101. lt Boolean gt MEASure HARMonics ITEM SYNChronize lt harmonic analysis function gt lt harmonic analysis function gt VTHD V VCON ATHD A ACON PF W WCON VDEG ADEG SYNChronize PLL source Example MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM VTHD ON MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM VTHD gt MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM VTHD 1 Description The selection SYNChronize is for outputting the frequency of the PLL source You can query the PLL source input by the command HARMonics S YNChronize MEASure HARMonics VALue Function Queries harmonic analysis data set by commands other than MEASure HARMonics ITEM Syntax MEASure HARMonics VALue Example MEASURE HARMONICS VALUE gt 60 00E 00 12 01E 00 49 98E 00 49 62E 00 0 03E 00 5 50E 00 Description The renewal of harmonic analysis data output here occurs when bitO UPD of the condition register refer to page App2 38 changes from high to low For more details refer to 2 2 6 For the output format of harmonic analysis data refer to page App2 25 MEASure NORMal Function Queries all settings related to normal measured computed data Syntax MEASure NORMal Example Example of WT130 three phase four wire model ROM version 2 01 MEASURE NORMAL MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM A ELEMENTl 1 ELEMENT2 1 LEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM W LEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VA ELEM
102. make sure that the bare end of the measurement lead wire connected to each input terminal does not protrude from the terminal Also make sure that the measurement lead wires are connected to the terminals securely The voltage ratings across the measuring voltage and current input and the ground for this instrument varies under operating conditions When protective covers are used on GP IB or RS 232 C and external input output connectors Voltage across each measuring input terminal and ground 600Vrms max When protective covers are removed from GP IB or RS 232 C and from external input output connectors or when connectors are used Voltage across A V and A side input terminals and ground 400Vrms max Voltage across V terminal and ground 600Vrms max The lead wires must have a sufficient margin in both withstand voltage and current against those to be measured They must also have insulation resistance appropriate to their ratings Ex If measurement is carried out on a current of 20A use copper wires with a conductor cross sectional area of at least 4mm Note After completing the wiring of the WT130 the WIRING key needs to be used to select the wiring system before starting measurements Refer to section 3 9 page 3 15 When measuring high currents or currents or voltages that contain high frequency components wiring should be made with special attention paid to possible mutual interference and noise problems Keep the lead
103. measured data or setting parameters from the internal memory Chapter 10 Using External In Output Explains the procedures for remote control D A output option external plotter printer output and comparator option Chapter 11 GP IB Interface Explains the procedures for controlling the instrument by personal computer and for sending measurement computed data to a personal computer using the GP IB interface Chapter 12 RS 232 C Interface Explains the procedures for controlling the instrument by personal computer controller and for sending measurement computed data to a personal computer controller using the RS 232 C interface Chapter 13 Other Useful Functions Explains the procedures such as backing up set up information and initializing settings Chapter 14 Adjustment Calibration and Trouble Shooting Explains the procedures for calibration adjustment the way to verify trouble the contents of error messages and the way to replace the fuse Chapter 15 Specifications Describes the specifications of the instrument Appendix Describes communication commands and sample programs Index Gives the index in alphabetic order IM 253401 01E Conventions Used in this Manual Symbols Used The following symbol marks are used throughout this manual to attract the operator s attention To avoid injury or death of personnel or damage to the instrument the N operator m
104. mode is useful when harmonic analysis data are output to the external plotter printer For details refer to page 10 17 GP IB Interface Specifications Electrical amp mechanical specifications conforms to IEEE st d 488 1978 Functional specifications refer to the table below Code ISO ASCII code Address setting 0 to 30 listener and talker addresses or talk only can be selected using the front panel keys Remote mode clear remote mode can be cleared by pressing the LOCAL key on the front panel However this is not possible when Local Lockout has been set by the controller eoepnelu gi d9 E Function Subset name Description Source handshake SH1 full source handshake capability acceptor handshake AH1 full acceptor handshake capability talker T5 basic talker capability serial polling nontalker on MLA My Listen Address talk only capability listener L4 Basic listener capability nonlistener to MTA My Talk Address no listen only capability service request SR1 full service request capability remote local RL1 full remote local capability parallel poll PRO no parallel polling capability device clear DC1 full device clear capability device trigger DT1 full device trigger capability controller CO no controller function The connectors used in this function have protective covers When the WARNING covers are removed or when using connectors the voltage ratings across
105. mvH 123r f I I rj I l LOCAL SETUP k A A Function ELEMENT l L J I L L MW ht C J C INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT 193W 363W SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS amaw avaa MAING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept e Setting the Scaling Value 1 Display C SETUP 2 FLE B RBL s Display C SL SCALE ENrER a aFF Je Er n an 5 Pnirb 5t Y d HE A gt ENTER nHtH f 2 15 ENTER Selecting the input element PT ratio selecting CT ratio selecting Power value Display C 7 Display A 11 Display B 13 Display C ALL ENTER gt UU 9 ENTER EL 00O 9 ENTER 9 F LE HE GI ri L CL I 8 V up down 12 Same as step 14 Same as step ci 2 8 to 10 8 to 10 EVE 9 V cursor shift E t j SHIFT gt 10 A decimal point shift SHIFT 17 End ENTER End
106. or W shown on display C Characteristics such as maximum reading display range units etc which are not described on the previous page are not different from the characteristics of normal measurement 8 8 IM 253401 01E 9 1 Storing Recalling Measured Data Relevant Keys A hour min SAMPLE a M V VA 1 2 3 X auTO AUTO o c3 V OVER a lt p me k A Val FUNCTION ELEMENT v RANGE ARANGE HOLD Displays i OVER J m J M W Time LJ MODE TRIG relevant MODE g keys and AMS r l r m V PF 12324 M a EEE indicator V MEAN a E a r L k A deg Function ELEMENT _ a INTEGRATOR moc Y cm W START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET hour min sec a s mv Hz 1 2 3 x T a oa k A h Function ELEMENT J J i I f rj b INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT 5103W 303W c3 SCALING AVG c3 FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL C3HARMONICS c3304W c33V3A NE Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Setti
107. or small In the case of lt NR3 gt the after the E can be omitted but the cannot If a value outside the setting range is entered the value will be normalized so that it is just inside the range If the value has more than the significant number of digits the value will be rounded Voltage Current Voltage and Current indicate decimal values which have physical significance lt Multiplier gt or Unit can be attached to lt NRf gt They can be entered in any of the following forms Form Example NRf Multiplier Unit 5MV NRf Unit 5E 3V NRf Multiplier 5M lt NRf gt 5E 3 IM 253401 01E App2 5 Z SPUBWWOD uoneoiunuluo2 Appendix 2 2 Program Format lt Multiplier gt Multipliers which can be used are shown below Symbol Word Description EX Exa i PE Peta 05 T Tera o G Giga 0 MA Mega 0 K Kilo o M Mili 0 U Micro 0 N Nano 0 P Pico 91 F Femto ob lt Unit gt Units which can be used are shown below Symbol Word Description V Volt Voltage A Ampere Current lt Multiplier gt and Unit are not case sensitive y is used to indicate LU MA is used for Mega M to distinguish it from Mili However when using MA for current Mili ampere will be valid therefore use MAA to assign Mega ampere If both Multiplier and Unit are omitted the default unit will be used
108. output connector page 3 5 to 3 8 page 3 5 to 3 8 chapter 10 m Voltage input terminal A zi Q H page 3 5 to 3 8 o eo E ur ojo O IO o Qi Of O wo JO o LIU il power connector A a power connector A _ page 3 12 External sensor input page 3 12 Ext in output connector A terminal A L power fuseA chapter 10 page 3 9 3 10 gt E page 14 13 GP IB or RS 232 C connector chapter 11 12 Top View WT110 253401 WT130 253502 253503 rear panel rear panel v nnm m um m L0 gcc E 230808 38959 ventilation slot Seo 09090 09090 880805 280805 35 2888 040 504 0G 0G MG HOGHLOLELO 020202090 0300030809 209080802 H oo s 9o S 8 9o 3 9o t 8 8 8 8 E d 8 d 9o H 9o E 8 m 829050005 99093080 93959808 o c lo 8 ventilation slot 9808080 89385 880808 3 E 3 b So 3 b So b b So b b So 3 80 Hn 398090 Es 80888 0388 5 t t front panel front panel IM 253401 01E 2 1 2 2 Operation Keys and Function Element Display WT110 253401 Operation keys and function display Indicators for operation conditions Shows sampling voltage current overrange and measurement mode V RANGE Shows the voltage range setting menu page 4 4 A RANGE Show
109. power W voltage frequency VHz of element 1 ME Microsoft QuickBASIC 4 0 4 5 Version Nock ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ce ck ck ck ck ce ck ce ck ck ce ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ock ck kk kk ks kv ko ko ko REM SINCLUDE qbdecl4 bas N 4 DIM D N Array D 4 is prepared for receiving data BORD GPIBO CALL IBFIND BORDS BD IF BD lt 0 THEN GOTO ERRDISP CALL IBSIC BD GOSUB ERRCHK DEVICES WT CALL IBFIND DEVICES WT IF WT lt 0 THEN GOTO ERRDISP CALL IBCLR WT GOSUB ERRCHK V 1 CALL IBSRE BD V CLS Setting measurement conditions Hold OFF Measurement mode RMS Filter OFF Scaling OFF Averaging OFF CMD SAMPLE HOLD OFF CALL IBWRT WI CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK CMD MODE RMS CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK CMD FILTER OFF CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK CMD SCALING OFF CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK CMD AVERAGING OFF CALL IBWRT WI CMD GOSUB ERRCHK Setting measurement range 150V 5A CMD VOLTAGE RANGE 150V CURRENT RANGE 5A CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK Sets display C to VHzl in order to measure the voltage frequency of element 1 CMD DISPLAY3 FUNCTION VHZ ELEMENT 1 CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK Sets the communication output items V1 A1 W1 VHzl ON all others OFF CMD MEASURE ITEM PRESET CLEA
110. sent to the A D converter This method enables switching of the current range without opening the current measurement circuit so the current range can be switched while electricitiy is supplied to the circuit This also enables remote control via communications outputs The output from the A D converter in the current input and voltage input circuits is sent to the DSP Digital Signal Processor via a photo isolator which is used to provide insulation between the current input circuit or voltage circuit and the DSP One DSP is provided for each input element current voltage For example a total of 3 DSP s are used for the three phase four wire model model 253503 The DSP performs averaging of voltage current and active power for each sampled data sent from the A D converter After processing of a certain number of sets of data has been completed computation of apparent power reactive power power factor and phase angle starts Computation results are then sent from the DSP to the CPU where computation such as range conversion sigma computation and scaling is carried out Control of display and outputs is also performed by the CPU IM 253401 01E 1 1 oq ueg uawnysu siui jeUM 1 2 Functions Input Functions Voltage and Current Input Sections A voltage or current supplied to each input terminal is normalized then sent to the A D converter where the voltage or current is converted into digital signals The digital signa
111. status of bit 0 of the extended event register in the status byte STATus EESR is used to clear the extended event register The SRE command is used to generate a service request caused solely by the extended event register MEASure NORMal VALue will not be executed until a service request is generated Using the COMMunicate WAIT command The COMMunicate WAIT command halts communications until a specific event is generated Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus EESE 1 EESR CONFigure VOLTage RANGe 60V lt PMT gt Response to STATus EESR is decoded COMMunicate WAIT 1 MEASure NORMal VALue lt PMT gt For a description of STATus FILTer 1 FALL and STATus EESR refer to Using the extended event register on this page COMMunicate WAIT 1 means that communications is halted until bit 0 of the extended event register is set to 1 MEASure NORMal VALue will not be executed until bit O of the extended event register is set to 1 IM 253401 01E App2 7 Z SPUBLUWOD uoneoiunuluo2 Appendix 2 3 Commands Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 1 Command List Command Description Page AOUTput Group AOUTput Queries all settings related to D A output App 2 11 AQUTput CHANnel lt x gt Sets queries the D A output item App 2 11 AOUTput IRTime Sets queries the preset integration time for D A output of integrated values App 2
112. tee ost eet brit ivt t beni ertum o Rus 11 1 11 2 Responses to Interface Messages sees nne nnne enne nnt tnt tnter enne nette tense 11 2 11 3 Status Byte Format before the IEEE488 2 1987 Standard sse 11 3 11 4 Output Format for Measured Computed Data Harmonic Analysis Data Set up Parameters and Error Codes inea e i REN dnbersdaaedebocnees 11 4 11 5 Setting the Address Addressable Mode ccccscssssseeseeseeseceeeeeceeceeeeseeseesecseeseceeeeeeeaeeaeeseeseeneee 11 9 ILG Setting the Output Items rec Ree ei ere Re eed 11 10 11 7 Commands before the IEEEA488 2 1987 Standard essen 11 12 Chapter 12 RS 232 C Interface AN 12 T Using the RS2232 C Interface i eee Here erede C Pe eee ee tire eerie dee 12 1 12 2 Connecting the Interface Cable 54 dee Ree edet teste E RR Eleg 12 2 12 3 Setting the Mode Handshaking Method Data Format and Baud Rate 12 4 12 4 Format and Commands of Output Data brefore the IEEE488 2 1987 Standard 12 7 Chapter 13 Other Useful Functions 13 1 Back up of Set up Parameters ete edet eet pae ete tet rte eee tries 13 1 13 2 Initializing Set up Parameters ces eeseeseeseneesceeseeecseesesecseseesecscseeseecseeaeseeseeaesesaeseeaeeatees 13 2 IM 253401 01E 9 Contents Chapter 14 A Chapter 15 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Adjustment Calibration and Trouble Shooting I4 1 Adjustments
113. than 0 1 the measured current iL will be 300mA or higher load resistance is 2kQ or lower If the input voltage is 10V iL is 5mA or higher The relationship between the input voltage and the measured current in cases where instrumental error is within 0 196 and 0 01 is given below as a reference Measured current A 0 1 2 3 4 5 T T T Measured voltage V 100 200 300 400 500 T I I I I Effect decreases I I I I I 600 l 0 1 effect S 0 01 effect In many cases the recommended wiring method is suitable For instance when input voltage and current are 100V and 5A iV is 0 05mA 100V 2MQ therefore the effect on measurement accuracy is 0 001 20 05mA 5A which is low On the other hand measurement accuracy is significantly affected when the measured current is low i e high load resistance In this case make the connections as follows so that the current measurement circuit is located on the load side The voltage measurement circuit measures the sum of the voltage drop eL at the load and eA at the current measurement circuit therefore eA is erroneous However the effect of this error is small since the input impedance of the current measurement circuit is low For instance if the load resistance is 600Q the input impedance is approx 6mQ therefore the error in measurement is approx 0 001 eA eL eA which is low P SOURCE mee LOAD UN 1 V I i i e
114. the measurement range is the same as for normal measurement Note When the range changes the PLL synchronization will be re established Therefore correct measurement values might not be obtained which might result in an unstable range If this is the case set the measurement range to a fixed range Display Renewal Rate Harmonic analysis data will be updated approx every 3 seconds IM 253401 01E 8 1 euondo uonounJ sisA euy oiuouueH eui Burs i e 8 1 Harmonic Analysis Function Holding the Display When you use the display hold function and change the order or display function while the harmonic analysis function is ON you can display the harmonic data analyzed at the corresponding time Updating the Displayed Data The display can be updated in the same way as for normal measurement Overrange Error Displays In case the fundamental frequency of the PLL synchronization signal lies outside the measurement range Display B will show FrqEr Note The measurement range of the fundamental frequency of the harmonic analysis function is different from the frequency measurement range of normal measurement Refer to Ch 15 for more details Display in case of Overrange The overrange display being the same as for normal measurement will appear when all rms values of the 1st to 50th order reach the following value 140 of the rated range for the 600V voltage range or 20A current range 200 of the rat
115. the order shown on display A A Displays the relative harmonic content of the current of the order shown on display A W Displays the relative harmonic content of the active power of the order shown on display A V deg In case the 1st order fundamental is shown on display A Displays the phase angle between the voltage of the first order and the current of the first order In case the order 2 to 50 is shown on display A Displays the phase angle between the voltage of the first order and each voltage of the 2nd to 50th order A deg In case the 1st order fundamental is shown on display A Displays the phase angle between the voltage of the first order and the current of the first order same as V deg In case the order 2 to 50 is shown on display A Displays the phase angle between the current of the first order and each current of the 2nd to 50th order Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION C ER E uo ee Display function V Auto Range Operation A W Displays all rms values computed values of 1 up to 50 components of voltage current or active power V Hz Displays the fundamental frequency of the voltage for PLL synchronization displays the measurement value for only the selected voltage input A Hz Displays the fundamental frequency of the current for PLL synchronization displays the measurement value for only the selected current input The up down operation of
116. the value for the standard event enable register or queries the current setting ESE lt NRf gt ESE lt NR gt 0 to 255 ESE 253 ESE 253 Each bit is expressed as a decimal number For example if ESE 253 is set the standard enable register will be set to 11111101 This means that bit 2 of the standard event register is disabled so that bit 5 ESB of the status byte register will not be set to 1 even if a query error occurs Default is ESE 255 i e all bits are enabled The standard event enable register will be cleared when an inquiry is made using ESE For details referring the standard event enable register refer to page App2 36 ESR Function Syntax Example Description IDN Function Syntax Example Description OPC Function Syntax OPC Function Syntax Queries the value of the standard event register and clears it at the same time ESR ESR 32 Each bit is expressed as a decimal number It is possible to ascertain the type of event which has occurred while SRQ is occuring For example if ESR 32 is returned this means that the standard event register is 00100000 i e the SRQ has occurred due to a command syntax error f a query is made using ESR the standard event register will be cleared For details referring the standard event enable register refer to page App2 37 Queries the instrument model IDN
117. the voltage standard is the calibrated power factor value Note Before carrying out the calibration described above verify that this instrument performs within its accuracy specifications Set the output of the DC voltage standard to the rated range of this instrument read this voltage or current value on the display on this instrument and verify that this value lies within this instrument s accuracy Set the output of the DC voltage standard to the rated range of this instrument read the power factor value on the display on this instrument and verify that this value lies within this instrument s accuracy IM 253401 01E 14 5 Bunoous e qnoJ pue uoneJqieo ueunsn py 14 2 Calibration Calibration of AC Voltage Current and Power Wiring Connect the Digital Power meter Synchronizer and the AC voltage and AC current standard as follows Direct input EUT Equipment under test I AC voltage standard Synchronizer AC voltage standard Digital power meter External sensor input equipped with option EX1 Change as follows for wiring currents only AC voltage standard Synchronizer 14 6 IM 253401 01E 14 2 Calibration External sensor input equipped with option EX2 Change as follows for wiring currents only AC voltage standard Synchronizer Preparation Set the frequency of the AC voltage standard and of
118. time Data storage SO Store On SRm1 m2 m3 Store inteRval Data recalling ROm Recall On RRm1 m2 m3 recall inteRval starts storage sets storage interval starts recalling sets recalling interval Set up parameters SLm panel Setting Load SSm panel Setting Save RC Reset Command recalling set up parameters Storing set up parameters initialize set up parameters Communication CMm Communication coMmand commands OD Output Data OFm1 m2 m3 Output Function OFDm Output Function Default OS Output panal Setting OE Output Error code Hm Header DLm DeLimiter IMm Interrupt Mask sets command group to be used requests output of measured data Sets output items sets default output items requests output of setting parameters requests output of error code sets output data header Sets output data delimiter Sets status byte interrupt mask HAM option HAm Harmonics Analize HEm Harmonics Eiement OR harmonics ORder OHm 1 m2 Output Harmonics function PSm PII Source DFm Distortion Formula DA option OAm1 m2 m3 Output Analog OADm Output Analog Default RTm1 m2 integrate Rated Time CMP option YOm relaY On YMm relaY Mode DYm Display relaY YCm relaY Channel OYm1 m2 m3 m4 m5 Output relaY function OYHm 1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 sets harmonic analysis ON OFF sets harmonics element sets harmonics order sets communication or output block sets PLL source sets distortion formula sets outp
119. 0 00 ntegration preset time Rated Time DA 001 00 Storage ON OFF 7 Store E Off nterva Store Interval 00 00 00 Recall ON OFF _ Recall Off Interval Recall Interval 00 00 00 PLL source _ Sync Source PLL V1 i Harmonics off Harmonics Display A Order 01 function ON OFF Harmonics Element Element 1 Order Distortion Formula IEC Element Comparator Off Distortion Comparator Mode Single Comparator Display Off formula Comparator Channel 1 Comparator function ON OFF Display ON OFF Channel Comm command Communication Command 0 Output example of normal measurement data Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Sigma V 0 88 0 00 0 09 A 2 7m 0 0m 0 0m Element Ww 0 000 0 000 0 000 Voltage VA 0 002 0 000 0 000 Current Var 0 002 0 000 0 000 Active power PF 0 156 PFErr PFErr Apparent power DEG 99 0 dEGErr dEGErr Reactive power HZA 0 ErrLo Power factor Integrator Start Phase angle Integrator Time 000 05 55 Frequency Integration status Integration elapsed ti Wh Watt hour Wh 0 48 1 4m 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 156 99 0 Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Sigma 0 00m 0 03m 0 03m 0 245m 0 000m Ah Ampere hour Ape Ah 0 245m 0 00m 0 00m 0 00m 0 000m 0 000m 0 000m 0 00m 0 00m 0 00m 0 000m 0 000m 0 000m 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 245m 0 000m 0 245m O
120. 0 02 0 05 46 0 00 0 01 47 0 02 0 05 48 0 00 0 01 c 49 0 02 0 04 50 0 00 0 01 2 Q Harmonic Spectrum Voltage m a V o 100 0 z m 3 O 10 00 g Analysis Value 1 000 100 0m 10 00m IM 253401 01E 10 19 10 9 Outputting to an External Plotter Printer Output example of set up parameters WT110 130 Setup Lists Version Voltage range Model Current range N External sensor V Range A Range scaling values Items shown Ext Sensor Elem 1 Ext Sensor Elem 2 Ext Sensor Elem 3 Wiring method Display A Filter ON OFF Display B Display C 1341 253503 C1 EX1 HRM CMP 15 Vrms Manual 0 5 Arms Manual 50 00A 50 00A 50 00A Time Element 1 PF Element 1 Hold ON OFF A Hz Element 3 Wiring 1 Phase 3 Wire Filter Off Scaling ON OFF N Hold COR Scaling Off Voltage PT ratio pu Ratio m 2 o atio em 1 1 Current CT ratio Scaling Factor Elem 1 1 000 Power value PT Ratio Elem 2 1 000 CT Ratio Elem 2 21 000 Scaling Factor Elem 2 21 000 PT Ratio Elem 3 21 000 Averaging ON OFF CT Ratio Elem 3 21 000 Type N L Sealing Factor Elem 3 1 000 Coefficient Averaging Off Integration mode _ Averaging Type Liner Averaging Coefficient 8 Integration timer Integrate Mode Manual 8 z Integrate Timer 00
121. 0 Three phase three wire model GP IB interface with UL CSA power cord with external sensor input 50 100 200mV range with harmonic analysis function and 12 channels D A output 253202 C1 0 D EX2 HRM DA12 NO instrument number When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please quote the instrument No IM 253401 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are supplied with the instrument Make sure that all items are present and undamaged Name Part No Q ty Remarks 1 Power cord see page 2 1 2 Power fuse A1346EF 1 only for the three phase model Time lag 0 5A 250V located in the fuse holder Not provided with the single phase model 3 24 pin connector A1004JD 1 For remote D A output only provided with options DA4 DA12 or CMP 4 User s Manual IM253401 01E 1 this manual 5 Rubber feed A9088ZM 1 set 6 Clamp filter Ferrite core A1179MN 1 for WT110 only 1 One of the power cords is supplied according to the instrument s suffix code Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available Upon receiving any optional equipment make sure that all the items ordered have been supplied and they are in good condition If you have any questions regarding optional equipment or if you wish to place an order contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument Name P
122. 1 DISPLAY1 ELEMENT DISPLAY1 ELEMENT 1 DISPlay lt x gt FUNCtion Function Sets the function to be displayed queries the current setting Syntax DISPlay lt x gt FUNCtion lt display function gt DISPlay lt x gt FUNCtion lt x gt 1 to 3 l Display A 2 Display B 3 Display C in case of normal measurement lt display function gt V A W VA VAR PF DEGRee VHZ AHZ WH WHP WHM AH AHP AHM MATH VPK APK TIME in case of harmonic analysis display function gt V A W PF VHZ AHZ VTHD ATHD VCON ACON WCON VDEG ADEG ORDer Example DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V DISPLAY1 FUNCTION gt DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V Description For the meanings of the symbols of functions see Note on page App2 11 DISPLAY1 MODE gt DISPLAY1 MODE VALUE Description lt x gt will be ignored The contents of all the displays 1 to 3 will be received IM 253401 01E App2 17 Z SPUBWLUOD uoreoiunuiuo Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 6 HARMonics Group The commands in the HARMonics group relate to the harmonic analysis function This allow you to make the same settings and inquiries as when using the HARMONICS key on the front panel and the corresponding menus This group is only useful in case your instrument is equipped with the HRM option op O ape CD lt NRf gt ELEMent lt Space gt lt NRf gt J lt NRf gt
123. 1 1 THRESHOLD lt x gt 1 to 4 600 0E 00 RELAY HCHANNEL2 FUNCTION A 1 1 Example RELAY HCHANNEL1 RELAY HCHANNEL1 THRESHOLD 20 00E 00 RELAY HCHANNEL3 FUNCTION V 1 1 FUNCTION W 1 1 THRESHOLD THRESHOLD 600 0E 00 200E 03 RELAY HCHANNEL4 FUNCTION PF 1 THRESHOLD 1 000E 00 RELAY DISPLAY OFF App2 28 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands RELay HCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion Function Sets the function of the relay output item in case of harmonic analysis queries the current setting Syntax RELay HCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion lt harmonic analysis function lt NRf gt ELEMent lt 1 3 gt NR ORDer 1 50 OFF harmonic analysis function VTHD V VCON ATHD A ACON PF W WCON VDEG ADEG Example RELAY HCHANNEL1 FUNCTION V 1 1 RELAY HCHANNEL1 RELAY HCHANNEL1 FUNCTION V 1 RELAY HCHANNEL2 RELAY HCHANNEL2 FUNCTION OFF RELAY HCHANNEL4 RELAY HCHANNEL4 FUNCTION PF 1 Description e The order setting will be ignored in case the harmonic analysis function is set to VTHD ATHD or PF and might therefore be omitted Even if V A or W has been selected the rms value of the 1st to 50th order does not become the corresponding relay output item Also even if VDEG or ADEG has been selected the phase angle between the 1st order voltage and 1st order current does not become the corresponding relay output item RELay HCHannel x THReshold Function Sets
124. 1534 E2 WT130 EIA standard 751534 E3 WT110 JIS standard 751534 J2 WT130 JIS standard 751534 J3 Mounting procedure 1 Remove the handle For the WT110 turn the handle to position 8 refer to the picture on the previous page and remove the handle by pulling it approx 10mm from the turning axes on both sides For the WT130 remove the handle by first removing the covers of the handle and then unfastening the screws WT110 253401 WT130 253502 253503 Turn the handle to position 8 and remove it by pulling it approx 10 mm from the turning axes on both sides Cover 4 Handle Cover Turning axis For more detailed information regarding the rack mount procedure refer to the instruction manual accompanied with the rack mount kit 2 Remove the feet from the instrument 3 Remove the seals covering the mounting holes from the front side of the instrument 4 Mount the rack mount brackets 5 Mount the instrument in the rack Note When mounting the instrument in a rack make sure not to block the vent holes Refer to page 3 2 IM 253401 01E uoneJedo eJojeg 3 3 Wiring Precautions A TSS N Caution To prevent hazards make sure to apply a ground protection before connecting the object being measured Always turn OFF the power to the object being measured before connecting it to the instrument Never connect or disconnect the measur
125. 4 reactive power var 5 apparent power VA 15 Integration time TIME in case of harmonic analysis mz1 Each relative harmonic content of Ist to 50 or 30 th order of voltage V 2 Each relative harmonic content of 1st to 50 or 30 th order of current A 3 Each relative harmonic content of 1st to 50 or 30 th order of active power W 28 harmonic analysis order order DA terminator DAI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Spueuuulo uoieorunuuulo2 Sets the function for display B inquires about the current setting DBm terminator m indicates one of the following functions in case of normal measurement m 1 voltage V 2 current A 3 power W IM 253401 01E App1 1 Appendix 1 1 Commands Query Example Description DC DC Syntax Query Example Description DE DF Syntax 6 power factor PF 11 phase angle deg in case of harmonic analysis m 1 Analysis value of each component of voltage V 2 Analysis value of each component of current A 3 Analysis value of each component of active power W 6 power factor PF 16 harmonic distortion factor of voltage V THD 17 harmonic distortion factor of current A THD 19 Relative harmonic content of each voltage component V 20 Relative harmonic content of each current component A 21 Relative harmonic content of each active power component W 22 Phase an
126. 4 9 scaling value e 4 7 SDC selective device clear cccccccscsscessesscsseeteeseeseeeeeseceeees 11 2 sequential command seeseseeeeeeeeenneneeenenn App2 7 service request enable register App2 36 setting the comparator limit values eene 10 12 setting the comparator mode sse 10 9 Signal direction 5 eere eterne enn i 12 2 signal names RS 232 C sse 12 2 SIN PLE mode uice RR ERA ER een 10 7 SPECIFICATIONS recresen Eee eee deeper ete e Ee edente 15 1 jo 11 3 standard accessories sesssssssseeeeeeeeeneeennenen ener 3 standard event enable register App2 36 App2 37 standard event register sess App2 36 App2 37 standard integration mode sse 7 1 starting of the harmonic analysis seen 8 5 status Dyte App2 36 status byte format before IEEE 488 2 1987 nsss 11 3 Status TepOEts ie gel rr E EE REA HR App2 35 STOP ASS one red E dee EVER IE CENA ERE E cde 1 3 storage interval sissies sariini nennen 9 2 storing measurement data sesesssessesesteresesreststsesesresrsrereseseesesee 9 2 storing set up parameters sss 9 5 SOX COME cce tee Re ER et EBEN E E 2 switching remote and local mode see 11 2 symbol mark senes Last system configuration sneaiceanna a 1 1 IM 253401 01E Index 3 xepu
127. 5 Referto page 5 2 Note Changing the measurement mode might result in different computed results even when the input signal is the same For more details on the measurement mode refer to page 4 1 When either the voltage or current drops below 0 5 of the measurement range dEGErr will be displayed Distinction between phase lag and lead can be made properly only when both voltage and current are sine waves and when the percentage of voltage or current input relating to the measurement range does not fluctuate much Ifthe computed result of the power factor exceeds 1 the display will be as follows when the power factor ranges between 1 001 to 2 000 the phase angle displays 0 0 when the power factor is 2 001 or more the phase angle displays dEGErr IM 253401 01E 7 1 Integrator Functions Active power integration and current integration can be carried out All measurement values and computed values can be displayed even when integration is in progress except for the integrated values watt hour or ampere hour and integration elapsed time Since integrated values of negative polarity can be also displayed the consumed watt hour ampere hour value of the positive side and the watt hour value returning to the power supply of the negative side ampere hour only when the measurement mode is DC can be displayed seperately Integration Modes The following three modes are available as integration modes
128. 6 IM 253401 01E 4 9 Computing the Efficiency Applies to WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later Wiring Method and Computing Equation When the input and output are both two wire Select 1b2W 103W or 3 3W for the wiring method for the three phase three wire system 253502 and 1 2W for the wiring method for the three phase four wire system 253503 Primary side Secondary side W1 Converter w3 Output side Computing equation Efficiency u W3 W1 x100 When the input is two wire and the output is three wire Select 1b2W 103W 303W or 3V3A for the wiring method This only applies to model 253503 Primary side Secondary side W1 w2 Converter w3 Output side Computing equation Efficiency u W1 W3 W2 x100 IM 253401 01E 4 17 suonpuo JUsWaINSeE Bumes mn 5 1 Measuring Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power Relevant Keys hour min A c3 SAMPLE m V VA 12 3 X auToO Aro o c3 V OVER k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT Displays A OVER M W Time E C MODE TRIG relevant Move keys and Rus i PF pE iL SZ Le e indicator c3 V MEAN k A deg FUNCTION ELEMENT _ z INTEGRATOR c Dc MW START STOP RESET C hour min sec ci REMOTE ease hg S mV H 123 rx LOCAL k A h Function ELEMENT SETUR INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT MW ht c3103W 393W c3304W o 3V3A wining SCALI
129. 6 Setting the Output Items Relevant Keys A hour min SAMPLE ww ae V VA 1 2 3 E aau AUTO c V OVER em am k A vVar FUNCTON ELEMENT V RANGE ARANGE HOLD Displays A OVER L Li J J I M W Time L L MODE TRIG relevant MODE keys and onus P mV PF 1235 M ANE indicators E V MEAN m n f k A deg FuNcTON ELEMENT INTEGRATOR Le MW START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET hour min sec mv Hz 12 3 z L L k A h Function ELEMENT LOCAL Timea Ll rj J la la J l Maw Re INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT x c103W c 303W SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS c3304W csavaA PING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Setting the Output Item in case of Normal Measurement Selecting communication Selecting normal Selecting output format 1 Display C 3 Display C 5 Display C SETUP gt ann 9 ENTER ae nor
130. 71 25 111 9 131 25 151 9 171 25 19 25 29 41 39 57149 73 59 89 69 105 79 121 A 32 52 10 72 26 112 10 132 26 152 10 172 26 SUB J Z Z 1A 26 2A 42 3A 58 4A 74 5A 90 6A 106 7A 122 B 33 53 11 73 27 113 11 133 27 153 11 173 27 ESC K I k 1B 27 2B 43 3B 59 4B 75 5B 91 6B 107 7B 123 C 34 54 12 74 28 114 12 134 28 154 12 174 28 FS L 1C 28 2C 44 3C 60 4C 76 5C 92 6C 108 7C 124 D 35 55 13 75 29 115 13 135 29 155 13 175 29 GS M m 1D 29 2D 45 3D 61 4D 77 5D 93 6D 109 7D 125 E 36 56 14 76 30 116 14 136 30 156 14 176 30 RS N 2 n 1E 30 2E 46 3E 62 4E 78 5E 94 6E 110 7E 126 F 37 57 1577 UNL 117 15 137 UNT 157 15 177 US O o Ibl RUBOUT 1F 31 2F 47 3F 63 4F 79 5F 95 6F 111 7F 127 Universal Listener Talker Secondary Command Address Address Command GP IB code Example oca Hexadecimal Decimal ASCII character code App2 42 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 7 Communication related Error Messages Appendix 2 7 Communication related Error Messages Error messages related to communications are given below When servicing is required contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as given on the back cover of this manual Only error messages relating to the communication mode 488 2 are given here For other error messages refer to App 1 1 and 14 4 Errors in communications commands 100 to 199
131. 9E 00 0 01E 00 0 07E 00 0 00E 00 0 06E 00 0 01E 00 0 06E 00 0 01E 00 0 05E 00 0 01E 00 0 05E 00 0 01E 00 0 05E 00 0 01E 00 0 04E 00 0 01E 00 Frequency of PLL source 60 00E 00 Hz Harmonic distortion factor of voltage 12 01E 00 8 Rms value of Ist to 50th order 249 98E 00 V Fundamental analysis value 1st order 49 62E 00 V Harmonic analysis value 2nd order 0 03E 00 V Harmonic analysis value 50th order 0 00E 00 V Harmonic relative content 2nd order 0 06E 00 Harmonic relative content 50th order 0 01E 00 The data consist of 102 items in total App2 26 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 10 RECall Group The commands in the RECall group are used to make settings relating to and inquires about recalling data This allows you to make the same settings and inquiries as can be set using the lower menus of MEMORY rECAL or MEMORY PnLrC O Ao A RECall STATe lt Space gt OFF gt lt NRf gt lt Character string gt Q K _INTerval lt Space gt m lt NRf gt O lt NR gt O lt NRf gt PANel H lt Space gt lt NRf gt RECall Function Queries all the settings relating to recalling data Syntax RECall Example RECALL RECALL STATE 0 INTERVAL 0 0 0 RECall INTerval Function Sets the recalling interval queries
132. ANNEL3 RELAY NCHANNEL3 FUNCTION W 1 Description Except for the case when it is OFF you will specify normal measurement function and element for the relay output function However if the normal Example measurement function is set to MATH element is ignored The response to the query will have the element omitted For the meanings of the symbols of functions see Note on page App2 11 RELay NCHannel x THReshold Function Sets the threshold level for the relay output item in case of normal measurement queries the current setting Syntax RELay NCHannel x THReshold lt NRf gt lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NRE gt 0 000E 00 to 9 999E 09 RELAY NCHANNEL3 THRESHOLD 1 200E 03 RELAY NCHANNEL3 THRESHHOLD gt RELAY NCHANNEL3 THRESHOLD 1 200E 03 Description The mantissa of the setting value is rounded a follows Less than 1 000 Rounded to the third digit left of the Example decimal 1 000 to 9999 Rounded to the fourth significant digit RELay STATe Function Sets the comparator function ON OFF queries the current setting Syntax RELay STATe Boolean RELay STATe Example RELAY ON RELAY STATE ON RELAY STATE RELAY STATE 1 IM 253401 01E App2 29 Z SPUBWLUOD uoreoiunuiuo Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 12 SAMPle Group The commands in the SAMPle group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about sampling You can make the same set
133. ASCII code QAH is used END END message defined in IEEE488 1 EOI signal The data byte sent with an END message will be the final item of the program message unit NL with an END message attached NL is not included in the program NL END message unit App2 2 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 2 Program Format Program message unit format The format of a program message unit is shown below Program data Program header T Space lt Program header gt A program header is used to indicate the command type For details refer to page App2 4 lt Program data gt If certain conditions are required for the execution of a command program data must be added Program data must be separated from the header by a space ASCII code 20H If multiple items of program data are included they must be 6 o separated by a comma Example CONFIGURE AVERAGING TYPE LINEAR 8 lt PMT gt Header Data Response Messages The data returned by this instrument to the controller is called a response message The format of a response message is shown below L Response message unit iE lt RMT gt lt Response message units gt A response message consists of one or more response message units each response message unit corresponds to one response coy Response message units are delimited by a For the response me
134. Aba i e 2 253503 3 Selecting the Measurement Range You can select the voltage measurement range by pressing the V RANGE key and the current measurement range by pressing the A RANGE key For more details refer to either of the following 4 3 Selecting the Measurement Range in case of Direct Input on page 4 4 4 4 Setting the Scaling Value when External PT CT is Used on page 4 6 4 5 Selecting the Measurement Range and Setting the Scaling Value when External Sensor is Used option on page 4 8 4 Selecting the Measurement Mode Select the measurement mode by pressing the V RANGE MODE key after having pressed the SHIFT key so that the SHIFT indicator is lit For more details refer to section 4 1 on page 4 1 IM 253401 01E 5 1 en eA Yeed pue 10284 1812 en eA uonejedo oneuiuuy 1no J ouenbeJ4 lewog eAnoy iueJn eBeyoA Buikejdsiq Buunsee u 5 1 Measuring Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power Explanation Continuous Maximum Allowable Input Voltage peak voltage is 1 5kV or the RMS value is 1 0kV whichever is less Current peak current is 100A or the RMS value is 30A whichever is less In case of external sensor input the peak value is 5 times the measurement range or less Maximum Reading of the Display and Units e Maximum reading for voltage current and power each 9999 Units V voltage A current W power Prefix m k M Selecting the Display Function The following se
135. CFACtor Crest factor ARIThmetic Four arithmetic operations App2 20 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 9 MEASure Group The MEASure group relates to measurement computation data There are no front panel keys for these functions Also your instrument must be equipped with the HRM harmonic analysis function to be able to use the related commands Setting the output items for measurement computation data is only valid in the communication mode Q ge Measure Lol cram Caru r N O PRESet lt Space gt C NORMal INTEGrate ae J e O Normal meas function ALL Space I Corr Con V lt NRf gt f CELEMent ox Space C OFF CN lt NRf gt sigma t lt Space gt OFF Con lt NRf gt C TIME Space C OFF D C9 lt NRf gt C HARMonics e VALue 29 O Space VPATtern SYNChronize lt Space gt md OFF gt lt NRf gt 5 lt Harmonic analysis function gt QOO IM 253401 01E App2 21 Z SPUBWLUOD uomeoiunuiuo Appendix 2 3 Commands MEASure Funct
136. CHRONIZE 1 VTHD 1 V 1 VCON 1 ATHD 0 A 0 ACON 0 PF 0 W 0 WCON 0 VDEG 0 ADEG 0 MEASure HARMonics Function Queries all settings related to harmonic analysis data Syntax MEASure HARMonics Example MEASURE HARMONICS gt MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM SYNCHRONIZE 1 VTHD 1 V 1 VCON 1 ATHD 0 A 0 ACON 0 PF 0 W 0 WCON 0 VDEG 0 ADEG 0 MEASure HARMonics ITEM Function Queries all settings related to the communication output items of harmonic analysis data Syntax MEASure HARMonics ITEM Example MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM Same result as for MEASure HARMonics MEASure HARMonics ITEM PRESet Function Sets the ON OFF pattern for all communication outputs of the harmonic analysis function Syntax MEASure HARMonics ITEM PRESet VPATtern APATtern WPATtern DPATtern ALL CLEar Example MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM PRESET VPATTERN Description The following six patterns can be selected VPATtern SYNChronize VTHD V VCON ON others OFF APATtern SYNChronize ATHD A ACON ON others OFF WPATtern SYNChronize PF W WCON ON others OFF DPATtern SYNChronize VDEG ADEG ON others OFF ALL all items ON CLEar all items OFF MEASure HARMonics ITEM SYNChronize harmonic analysis function Function Sets the communication output item of harmonic analysis ON OFF queries the current setting Syntax MEASure HARMonics ITEM SYNChronize lt harmonic analysis function gt
137. COM using the DMM Verify that the resistance between NO and COM is at most 0 1Q and that the resistance between NC and COM is at least 50MQ Turn the output of the voltage standard OFF 14 8 IM 253401 01E 14 2 Calibration Calibration of the Harmonic Analysis Function Connection Use the same instruments as in case of AC power measurement and connect them in the same way refer to page 14 6 and 14 7 Preparation 1 Set the voltage range of this instrument to 15V and the current range to 1A 2 Turn the harmonic analysis function ON Calibrating Currents 1 Set the ch1 of the synchronizer to 60Hz ch 2 to 900Hz 15 times and output these frequencies 2 Set the frequency of the voltage standard to 60Hz the output voltage to 15V and output the voltage 3 Set the frequency of the current standard to 900Hz the output current to 1A and output the current 4 Set the displayed number on display A of this instrument to 15 5 Set the display function of display B to A and verify that the displayed value lies within the specifications In case of the WT130 verify each element 1 2 and 3 6 If required change the ch2 setting of the synchronizer and the frequency of the current standard and verify another number 7 Turn the output of the voltage and current standard OFF Calibrating Voltages 1 Set the ch1 of the synchronizer to 900Hz 15 times ch 2 to 60Hz and output these frequencies 2 Set the freq
138. Circuit when Using External PT CT Wiring diagram for three phase three wire system with PT and CT connected 253502 253503 g SOURCE LOAD Input terminal B Input terminal ELEMENT1 ELEMENTS3 Wiring diagram for three phase four wire system with PT and CT connected 253503 SOURCE LOAD Zzuosm Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal ELEMENT1 ELEMENT2 ELEMENTS Wiring diagram for three voltage three current system with PT and CT connected 253503 RCE p SOURC Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal ELEMENT1 ELEMENT2 ELEMENTS IM 253401 01E 3 8 3 6 Wiring the Measurement Circuit when Using the External Sensor Use an external sensor that is enclosed in a case which has sufficient N WARNING withstand voltage against the voltages to be measured Use of bare sensor may cause an electric shock if the sensor is touched accidentally Before connecting an external shunt make sure the power to the shunt is turned OFF Always make sure to turn OFF the power switch of the source When the power is supplied a voltage will be present at the shunt so don t touch the shunt with your hands When using the clamp sensor make sure to fully understand the specifications instruction manual regarding voltages of the measurement circu
139. E 12 4 Format and Commands of Output Data before the IEEE488 2 1987 Standard Output Format Commands The format of output data is the same as for the GP IB interface Refer to page 11 4 for more details The commands used for the RS 232 C interface are identical to those used for the GP IB interface except for the following commands DL DL Sets or inquires about output data terminator SyntaxDLm lt terminator gt m indicates terminator m 0 CR LF 1 LF 2 CR Query DL lt terminator gt Example DL1 Note If a value outside the setting range is set an error code will appear The interface message function of the GP IB interface is assigned to the following commands at the RS 232 C interface lt ESC gt S Equivalent to GP IB s serial poll function Status byte is output when the S command is received following reception of the lt ESC gt code 1BH lt ESC gt R Equivalent to GP IB s remote local control function The instrument is placed in remote status and panel keys become invalid when the R command is received following reception of the lt ESC gt code 1BH Press the LOCAL key to exit from the remote status ESC L Equivalent to GP IB s remote local control function When the instrument is in remote status the instrument will be placed in local status when the L command is received following reception of the lt ESC gt code 1BH lt ESC gt C Equivalent to GP IB s device clear func
140. E AND 1 Abbreviated MEASure MODE lt NR gt may be repeated 2 2 2 Messages Blocks of message data are transferred between the controller and this instrument during communications Messages sent from the controller to this instrument are called program messages and messages sent back from this instrument to the controller are called response messages If a program message contains a query command i e a command which requests a response this instrument returns a response message A single response message is always returned in reply to a program message Program Messages As explained above the data message sent from the controller to this instrument is called a program message The format of a program message is shown below Program message unit lt PMT gt lt Program message unit gt A program message consists of zero or more program message units each unit corresponds to one command This instrument executes commands one by one according to the order in which they are received Program message units are delimited by a For a description of the format of the program message unit refer to the explanation given further below Example CONFIGURE MODE RMS FILTER ON lt PMT gt V a Ve Unit Unit lt PMT gt PMT is a terminator used to terminate each program message The following three types of terminator are available NL New Line Same as LF Line Feed
141. E b ni A Protruding from rack 20 g T tn e os 3 5 He o o c r 989 cain n Q EIA rack mount 480 2 460 1 Protruding from rack 20 88 53 44 5 02 Protruding from rack 20 g 88 25 44 5 02 21 8 Unless other wise specified tolerance is 3 However tolerance is 0 3mm when below 10mm 15 4 IM 253401 01E Chapter 15 Specifications WT130 253502 253503 mE Fey ey 13 213 C3 coo N e pas oO uy JIS rack mount Protruding from rack 20 e e Protruding from rack 20 EIA rack mount Protruding from rack 20 Protruding from rack 20 149 2 149 35
142. EGRATE STOP INTEGRATE RESet When Consecutive Commands are in the Same Group This instrument stores the hierarchical level of the command which is currently being executed and performs analysis on the assumption that the next command to be sent will also belong to the same level Therefore it is possible to omit the header if the commands belong to the same group Example DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V ELEMENT 1 lt PMT gt When Consecutive Commands are in Different Groups A colon must be included before the header of a command if the command does not belong to the same group as the preceding command Example DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V SAMPLE HOLD ON lt PMT gt In Case of Consecutive Common Commands Common commands defined in IEEE 488 2 1987 are independent of hierarchical level Thus it is not necessary to add a colon before a common command Example DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V CLS ELEMENT 1 lt PMT gt When Separating Commands by lt PMT gt If a terminator is used to separate two commands each command is a separate message Therefore the common header must be typed in for each command even when commands of the same command group are being sent Example DISPLAY1 FUNCTION V lt PMT gt DISPLAY1 ELEMENT 1 lt PMT gt Upper level Query An upper level query is a compound header to which a question mark is appended Execution of an upper level query allows all settings of one group to be output at once Some query groups comprising more t
143. ENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VAR ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 E E bd rp LEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM PF LEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM DEGREE ELEMENT1 0 LEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE ORMAL ITEM VHZ ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 LEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AHZ LEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM WH ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM WHP ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 E E bd pi z b LEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM WHM LEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AH ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AHP ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 E E LEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AHM LEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VPK ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM APK ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 E T LEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM ME 0 MATH 0 App2 22 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands MEASure NORMal ITEM Function Queries all settings related to the communication output items of normal measured computed data Syntax MEASure NORMal ITEM Example MEASURE NORMAL ITEM Results are the same as for MEASure NORMal MEASure NORMal ITEM PRESet Function Sets th
144. HEN RETURN PRINT 2 2 Error 2 GOTO PRGEND App2 40 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 5 Sample Program VK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK ck kckck ck ck KKK KKK ck ck ck KKK KK KKK KKK ck ck ck KK KKK KKK KKK WT110 WT130 Ed Executes harmonic analysis for element 1 and displays the Li following n VE Frequency of the PLL source voltage of element 1 Li TE Harmonic distortion factor of the current ATHD ut VE Rms values of the 1st to 50th order current B E Fundamental 1st order and harmonic analysis values 2nd to bid 50th order currents ok Microsoft QuickBASIC 4 0 4 5 Version Nok ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ce ck ck ck ck ce ck ce ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk kk Sk kk kv kx kx REM SINCLUDE qbdecl4 bas N 53 DIM D N Array D 53 is prepared for receiving data BORD GPIBO CALL IBFIND BORDS BD IF BD 0 THEN GOTO ERRDISP CALL IBSIC BD GOSUB ERRCHK DEVICES WT CALL IBFIND DEVICES WTS IF WT lt 0 THEN GOTO ERRDISP CALL IBCLR WT GOSUB ERRCHK V 1 CALL IBSRE BD V CLS Settings related to harmonic analysis Element 1 PLL source V1 Computation method of harmonic distortion IEC CMD HARMONICS STATE ON ELEMENT 1 SYNCHRONIZE V 1 THD IEC CALL BWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK Sets the communication output items Sets all functions OFF Set
145. HP AHM MATH output items for normal measurement and integration VPK APK Example AOUTPUT CHANNELl1 V 1 AOUTPUT CHANNEL1 gt AOUTPUT CHANNEL1 V 1 AOUTPUT CHANNEL2 AOUTPUT CHANNEL2 OFF Note In the following pages the alphanumeric character strings used in the descriptions of the lt normal measurement function gt or the lt harmonic analysis function gt indicates the following data Normal measurement function V voltage current W effective power VA apparent power VAR reactive power PF power factor DEGRee phase angle VHZ voltage frequency AHZ current frequency WH watt hour WHP positive watt hour WHM negative watt hour AH current hour AHP positive current hour AHM negative current hour MATH MATH computation result VPK peak voltage APK peak current However MATH VPK APK applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later Harmonic analysis function See page App2 25 Other TIME integration time ORDer harmonic order IM 253401 01E App2 11 Z SPUBWILUOD uoreaiunuiuo Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 3 COMMunicate Group The commands in the COMMunicate group are used to make settings relating to and inquires about communications There is no front panel key for this function ao spas Co Nod
146. L j J j k A h Function ELEMENT Lt Lt Lt MW h C3 SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting Explanation When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described AUTO AUTO c V RANGE A RANGE HOLD MODE TRIG Vv gt a a ENTER INTEGRATOR START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET o REMOTE a LOCAL SETUP INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT WIRING c3103W 363W 304W o 3V3A under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Voltage Range Setting 1 Display C V RANGE EN Ca ea t3 Lu E un co LAS N Current Range Setting 1 Display C A RANGE Hol nura 3 ENTER End 3 ENTER End Manual Range fixed versus Automatic Range auto The measurement range can be of one of the following types The initial setting is Auto range ON Manual range Voltage range Current range Auto range Auto selectable from 600 300 150 60 30 15V selectable from 20 10 5 2 1 0 5A Displays relevant
147. LL IBCLR WT GOSUB ERRCHK CMDS CAL3 CALL IBWRT WT S CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK DO CLS PRINT D A output adjustment PRINT gt PRINT 1 12 Assigning D A channel PRINT S Adjustment values will be kept PRINT C Adjustment values will not be kept PRINT Command gt gt LINE INPUT CHS IF CH S THEN CMDS END CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK EXIT DO ELSEIF CHS C THEN CMDS CAN CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK EXIT DO ELSE CH VAL CHS IF CH gt 1 AND CH lt 12 THEN GOSUB DACH END IF END IF LOOP PRGEND CALL IBLOC WT END DACH CHS STRS CH CMDS CH CHS CALL IBWRT WI CMD GOSUB ERRCHK CMD DOO CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK PRINT PRINT 5V has been output to CHS channel PRINT Measure CH channel s voltage PRINT Measurement value LINE INPUT D CMD CD CHS D CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK FOR I 0 TO 2000 NEXT I CMDS ENT CALL IBWRT WT S CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK CMDS DOI CALL IBWRT WT S CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK PRINT W g RINT 5V has been output to CHS channel RINT Measure CHS channel s voltage U PRINT Measurement value LINE INPUT DS CMD CD CHS D CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK FOR I 0 TO 2000 NEXT I CMDS ENT CALL IBWRT WT S CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK RETURN When IBFIND call failed ERRDISP
148. MW or more at 500 V DC Between voltage input terminals and case Between current input terminals and output terminals Between voltage input terminals and current input terminals Between voltage input terminals of each element Between current input terminals of each element Between voltage input terminals and power plug Between current input terminals and power plug Above AC 3700 V for 1 minute at 50 60 Hz Between case and power plug AC 1500 V for 1 minute at 50 60 Hz Any power supply voltage between 100 and 240 V frequency 50 60 Hz Sweep test Frequency Withstanding voltage Power supply Vibration test condition 8 to 150 Hz sweep all 3 directions for 1 minute Endurance test Frequency 16 7 Hz all 3 directions amplitude of 4mm for 2h Impact test Acceleration at 490 m s all 3 directions Free fall test Height 100 mm 1 time for each 4 sides WT110 30 VA maximum WT130 50 VA maximum Power supply 240V WT110 20 VA maximum WT130 32 VA maximum Power supply 100V WT110 Approx W x H x D 213 x 88 x 350 mm 8 3 8 x 3 1 2 x 13 3 4 inch WT130 Approx W x Hx D 213 x 132 x 350 mm 8 3 8 x 5 3 16 x 13 3 4 inch Impact condition Power consumption External dimensions Weight WT110 Approx 3 0 kg 6 6 Ibs WT130 Approx 5 0 kg 11 0 Lbs Accessories Power cord UL CSA VDE SAA or BS standard 1 pc Spare fuse for WT130 only 24 pin connector User s Manual Rubber feed Emiss
149. N the measurement mode will automatically change to RMS mode When the harmonic analysis function is turned OFF the measurement mode will stay the RMS mode When the harmonic analysis function is ON integration cannot be started And accordingly when the integration is in progress the harmonic analysis function cannot be started refer to page 7 8 IM 253401 01E 8 5 peuondo uonounJ sisA euy oiuouueH eui usn 8 4 Setting the Harmonic Order and Displaying the Results of Harmonic Analysis Relevant Keys A SAMPLE VA 1235 V OVER A OVER Ex 3 var TIME FUNCTION ELEMENT MODE p RMS V MEAN c3Dc 3 lt PF deg 96 zr 123r FUNCTION ELEMENT V Hz 123r AUTO AUTO dc A w h ht FUNCTION ELEMENT c3 RECALL HARMONICS SCALING c3 AVG FILTER c3 STORE V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays MODE TRIG relevant keys and A ENTER indi M indicator gt E 2 INTEGRATOR START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE 2 LOCAL SETUP INTERFACE OUTPUT AFT S103W 303W c3e4w oavea MAING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure The following operations assume that the harmonic analysis function is tur
150. NCTION Wh 4 FUNCTION w P amp A Wht FUNCTION FUNCTION 4 FUNCTION _ FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION P amp V ee an At EON AR EEN A Whz and Ah will light twice and P are displayed on the top of display C You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key 1 Displayed on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later 2 Selecting the Input Element To measure or display the peak value press the ELEMENT key of display C and select the input element The procedure is the same as shown on page 5 1 Explanation Measureing displaying peak value P is displayed at the front of display C for both voltage and current If the function is set to V the peak value of the voltage is measured and displayed If the function is set to I the peak value of the current is measured and displayed Displaying the result of the four arithmetical operation abd the crest factor When display C is set to 5 the result of the computing equation specified in Section 4 7 or the crest factor specified in Section 4 8 is displayed However if the value of display B function is less than 0 000146 of the rating oF is displayed for the computation result 5 4 IM 253401 01E 6 1 Reactive Power and Power Factor Relevant Keys Computing Displaying Apparent Power
151. NG AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure 1 Selecting the Display Function Select either V voltage A current or W power by pressing the FUNCTION key Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION A eee ee Oe NES B FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION Y A W PF ou a FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION C V gt A WV iz A h Mh FUNCTION Wht 4 FUNCTION wv P amp A Wht FUNCTION FUNCTION 4 FUNCTION _ FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION P amp V a Ah e Aht Ah Whz and Ah will light twice 5 and P are displayed on the top of display C You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key 1 Displayed on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later 2 Selecting the Input Element Select the input element by pressing the ELEMENT key WT110 No such function 253401 ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT WT130 4 39 3 9d 253502 ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT
152. O PRGEND 2 GP IB error check S ERRCHK O IF IBSTA O0 THEN RETURN 3 PRINT Error 3 5 2 IM 253401 01E App1 11 Appendix 1 2 Sample Program NK ok ck Ck CK Ck Ck Ck CK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK Ck ko ck Sk KK KKK KKK Me WT110 WT130 z y Program for adjusting range x vE Turn ON the power while pressing the SHIFT key a V Microsoft QuickBASIC 4 0 4 5 Version NK ok ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK Ck Ck Ck CK 0C Ck Ck 0k Ck Ck SK Ck Ck 0k Ck Ck Sk ck Ck Ck Sk ck Ck Ck Sk ck Ck Ck Sk ck Ck kk ck Ck Ck Sk ck ko Ck ko ck Ck Ck ko ck Sk ck ok ko ko kx ko ko REM SINCLUDE qbdecl4 bas BORDS GPIBO CALL IBFIND BORDS BD IF BD lt 0 THEN GOTO ERRDISP CALL IBSIC BD GOSUB ERRCHK DEVICES WT CALL IBFIND DEVICES WT IF WT lt 0 THEN GOTO ERRDISP CALL IBCLR WT GOSUB ERRCHK DO CLS PRINT Main menu for range adjustment PRINT PRINT 1 Range adjustment PRINT 2 Adjustment of ext sensor range PRINT 0 End PRINT Command gt gt LINE INPUT C IF C 1 THEN GOSUB RANGE ELSEIF C 2 THEN GOSUB SHUNT ELSEIF C 0 THEN EXIT DO END IF LOOP PRGEND CALL IBLOC WT END RANGE CMDS CALI CALL IBWRT WT S CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK DO CLS PRINT Range adjustment PRINT PRINT 1 30 00 V range PRINT 2 300 0 V range PRINT 3 1 000 A range PRINT 4 10 00 A range PRINT
153. ODE Function Sets the integration mode queries the current setting Syntax NTEGrate MODE NORMal CONTinuous NTEGrate MODE Example NTEGRATE MODE NORMAL NTEGRATE MODE INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL INTEGrate RESet Function Resets the integrated values Syntax NTEGrate RESet Example NTEGRATE RESET INTEGrate STARt Function Starts integration Syntax INTEGrate STARt Example INTEGRATE START INTEGrate STOP Function Stops integration Syntax INTEGrate STOP Example INTEGRATE STOP INTEGrate TIMer Function Sets the integration timer queries the current setting Syntax INTEGrate TIMer lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt String gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 0 0 to 999 59 lt String gt HHH MM HHH hour MM minute Example INTEGRATE TIMER 10 0 INTEGRATE TIMER 10 00 INTEGRATE TIMER INTEGRATE TIMER 10 0 IM 253401 01E App2 19 Z SPUBWLUOD uoreoiunuiuo Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 8 MATH Group applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later The commands in the MATH group are used to make settings relating to and to make inquiries about the computing function The same function can be performed using the MATH menu of the SETUP key of the front panel MATH EFFiciency AA TYPE gt Space CFACtor lt Space gt NRf ELEMent 4 x ARIThmetic
154. ON OFF 1 0 When Boolean is expressed in lt NRf gt form OFF is selected if the rounded integer value is 0 and ON is selected if the rounded integer is Not 0 A response message is always 1 if the value is ON and 0 if itis OFF Character String Data Character string data is not a specified character string like Character data It is an arbitrary character string A character string must be enclosed in single quotation marks or double quotation marks Form Example Character string data ABC IEEE488 2 1987 Response messages are always enclosed in double quotation marks If a character string contains a double quotation mark the double quotation mark will be replaced by two concatenated double quotation marks This rule also applies to a single quotation mark within a character string Character string data is an arbitrary character string therefore this instrument assumes that the remaining program message units are part of the character string if no single or double quotation mark is encountered As a result no error will be detected if a quotation mark is omitted App2 6 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 2 Program Format 2 2 6 Synchronization with the Controller There are two kinds of command overlap commands and sequential commands Execution of an overlap command may start before execution of the previously sent command is
155. OP when options DA4 DA12 are installed Stops integration EXT RESET when options DA4 DA12 are installed Resets the integration results External Output This instrument can output the following TTL level low pulse logic signals EXT BUSY when options DA4 DA12 are installed Outputs continuously from integration start through integration stop Communication Functions Either a GP IB or RS 232 C interface is provided as standard according to the custormer s preference Measured computed data of up to 14 channels can be output It is also possible to control this instrument from the personal computer Output Function to an External Plotter Printer Measured computed data can be printed on an external plotter or printer using the GP IB or RS 232 C interface Other Useful Functions Backup Function of Set up Parameters This instrument backs up the set up parameters including computed values in case power is cut off accidentally as a result of a power failure or for any other reason Initializing Set up Parameters This function enables you to reset the set up parameters to initial factory settings 1 4 IM 253401 01E 1 3 Digital Numbers Characters and Initial Menus Digital Numbers Characters This instrument is equipped with a 7 segment LED which imposes some restrictions on the usable characters The numbers characters are styled as follows 07 1 2 g 3 1 4 4 5 5 64 7 gt 8
156. ORY 2 elits 3 Display C 5 A rELHL gt ENTER 1 AME ENTER E VI al Sep A an ng abet ie f int BL IM 253401 01E 9 1 Buljyeoey Bunos 9 1 Storing Recalling Measured Data Explanation Storing Measured Data Storing into Internal Memory The number of blocks which can be stored into the internal memory is as follows Model In case of normal measurement _ In case of harmonic analysis 253401 600 Blocks 30 Blocks 253402 300 Blocks 30 Blocks 353503 200 Blocks 30 Blocks Items which can be stored One block consists of all data which are obtained when the display is updated once The data number increases by the number of used input elements and therefore the number of blocks that can be stored depends on the model as described above when storing normal measured data harmonic analysis function is turned OFF Each measured integrated data of normal measurement will be stored However only either the voltage frequency or current frequency will be stored When either the V Hz or A Hz display function is lit the frequency of that function will be stored When neither is lit the frequency of the latest lit display function will be stored Regarding the element the frequency of the latest set element will be stored when storing harmonic analysis data harmonic analysis function is turned ON Normal measured data will not be stored All analysis data of the elements which are being used
157. OkHz lt f lt 20kHz 0 596 of rdg 0 5 of rng 0 15 x f 10 of rdg Reference value 20kHz lt f lt 50kHz 0 5 of rdg 0 5 of rng 0 15 x f 10 of rdg DC 40 2 of range is added if the 0 5 1 A range is selected DC 0 3 of rdg 0 3 of rng 10Hz lt f lt 45Hz 0 5 of rdg 0 3 of rng 45Hz lt f lt 66Hz 66Hz lt f lt 1kHz 1kHz lt f lt 10kHz 0 5 of rdg 0 3 of rng 0 3 of rdg 0 5 of rng 0 08 x f of rdg 0 8 of rdg 0 8 of rng 0 19 x f 10 of rdg t H t 0 25 of rdg 0 196 of rng 10kHz lt f lt 20kHz Reference value 20kHz lt f lt 5OkHz 0 8 of rdg 0 8 of rng 0 25 x f 10 of rdg DC 40 2 of range is added if the 0 5 1 A range is selected Effect of power factor Note The o is the phase angle between the voltage and current and the f is frequency coso 0 45 Hz f 66 Hz add 0 25 of range Reference data up to 50kHz add 0 23 0 4 x fkHz of range 1 gt cosp gt 0 add the product of tang and the effect on cos 0 Effective input range With the input range at 10 to 110 the above specified accuracy is valid With the input range at 110 to 130 the above specified reading accuracy increased 0 5 times is added to the accuracy Accuracy within 12 months after calibration The above specified reading accuracy increased 0 5 times is added to the accuracy
158. R CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK CMD MEASURE ITEM V ELEMENT1 ON CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK CMD MEASURE ITEM A ELEMENT1 ON CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK CMD MEASURE ITEM W ELEMENT1 ON CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK CMD MEASURE ITEM VHZ ELEMENT1 ON CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK Sets the filter to detect the end of data updating CMD STATUS FILTER1 FALL bit0 UPD CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK BUF SPACES 200 Reads the measurement data and displays them 10 times FOR I 1 TO 10 CMD STATUS EESR Clears the extended event register CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK CALL IBRD WT BUF GOSUB ERRCHK Waiting until data are finished updating CMD COMMUNICATE WAIT 1 CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK CMD MEASURE VALUE Requests output of measurement data CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK CALL IBRD WT BUF GOSUB ERRCHK Reads measurement data K 1 FOR J 1 TON IE J lt THEN S INSTR K BUFS ELSE S INSTR K BUFS CHR 10 D J MIDS BUFS K S K K S H 1 NEXT J Shows the measurement data per function PRINT V1 D S 1 vi PRINT A1 D 2 Al PRINT W1 D 3 WL PRINT VHzl D 4 VHz1 NEXT I PRGEND CALL IBLOC WTS END End When IBFIND call failed ERRDISP PRINT GOTO PRGEND GP IB error check w No such board or device name ERRCHK IF IBSTAS gt 0 T
159. RMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ALL Boolean Example MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ALL ON MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets the communication output concerning each element ON OFF queries the current setting Syntax MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ELEMent lt x gt lt Boolean gt MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ELEMent lt x gt Example MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT1 ON MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT 4 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT1 1 MEASure NORMal ITEM lt normal measurement function gt SIGMa Function Sets the communication output concerning 3 ON OFF queries the current setting Syntax MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt SIGMa Boolean MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function SIGMa Example MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V SIGMA ON MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V SIGMA MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V SIGMA 1 MEASure NORMal VALue Function Syntax Example Description Queries normal measured computed data set by commands other than MEASure NORMal ITEM MEASure NORMal VALue MEASURE NORMAL VALUE 10 04E 00 10 02E 00 10 03E 00 49 41E 00 The renewal of normal measured computed data output here occures when bitO UPD of the condition register refer to page App2 38 changes from high to low For more details refer to 2 2 6 For the outp
160. Response messages are always expressed in NR3 form Neither Multiplier nor Unit is used therefore the default unit is used Register Register indicates an integer and can be expressed in hexadecimal octal or binary as well as as a decimal number Register is used when each bit of a value has a particular meaning Register is expressed in one of the following forms Form Example lt NR gt j H lt Hexadecimal value made up of the digits 0 to 9 and A to F gt HOF Q lt Octal value made up of the digits 0 to 7 gt q777 B lt Binary value made up of the digits 0 and 1 gt B001100 lt Register gt is not case sensitive Response messages are always expressed as lt NR1 gt lt Character Data gt lt Character data gt is a specified string of character data a mnemonic It is mainly used to indicate options and is chosen from the character strings given in For interpretation rules refer to Header Interpretation Rules on page App2 5 Form Example RMS VMEan DC RMS As with a header the COMMunicate VERBose command can be used to return a response message in its full form Alternatively the abbreviated form can be used The COMMunicate HEADer command does not affect lt character data gt lt Boolean gt lt Boolean gt is data which indicates ON or OFF and is expressed in one of the following forms Form Example ON OFF lt NR gt
161. SPLAY ORDER 1 Function Sets the computation method for harmonic distortion HARMONICS DISPLAY ORDER gt HARMONICS THD for harmonic analysis queries the current DISPLAY ORDER 1 setting Syntax HARMonics THD IEC CSA HARMonics ELEMent HARMonics THD Function Sets the element for harmonic analysis queries the Example HARMONICS THD IEC current setting HARMONICS THD gt HARMONICS THD IEC Syntax HARMonics ELEMent lt NRf gt HARMonics ELEMent lt NRf gt aL WT110 single phase model 1 3 WT130 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT130 three phase four wire model Example HARMONICS ELEMENT 1 HARMONICS ELEMENT HARMONICS ELEMENT 1 App2 18 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 7 INTEGrate Group The commands in the INTEGrate group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about integration This allows you to make the same settings and inquiries as when using the START key STOP key RESET key INTEG SET key and their corresponding menus INTEGrate aly MODE lt Space gt NORMal A N Timer lt Space gt m lt NRi gt s O __ lt NRi gt lt Character string gt smr M STOP J RESet sa x INTEGrate Function Queries all settings relating to integration Syntax INTEGrate Example INTEGRATE INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL TIMER 0 0 INTEGrate M
162. STATus COMMUNICATE STATUS gt COMMUNICATE STATUS 0 The status condition for each bit is as follows bit GP IB RS 232 C 0 permanent Parity error comm error 1 always 0 framing error 2 always 0 break character occurrence 3andup always 0 always 0 When a status occurs which results in changing of the bits reading it will clear the error COMMunicate VERBose Function Syntax Example Determines whether a response to a query is to be returned in full form for example CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 150 0E 00 or in abbreviated form for example VOLT RANG 150 0E 00 or queries the current setting COMMunicate VERBose lt Boolean gt COMMunicate VERBose COMMUNICATE VERBOSE ON COMMUNICATE VERBOSE gt COMMUNICATE VERBOSE 1 COMMunicate WAIT Function Waits until one of the specified extended event occurs Syntax COMMunicate WAIT lt Register gt lt Register gt 0 to 65535 For a description of the extended event register refer to page App2 38 Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 Description For a description of synchronization using COMMunicate WAIT refer to page App2 8 COMMunicate WAIT Function Generates a response when one of the specified extended events occurs Syntax COMMunicate WAIT lt Register gt lt Register gt 0 to 65535 For a description of the extended event register refer to page App2 38 Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 655351 IM 253401 01E App2 13 Z SPUBWLUOD uoreoiunuiu
163. THD can be calculated Storage Recalling of Measured data and Setting Parameters This function enables the storage of measured data and setting parameters into the internal memory Furthermore after recalling measured data or setting parameters these data can be displayed or output by communication interface D A Output Function option This function enables output of measured values of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor and phase angle as a DC analog signal with full scale of 5V Output items up to 12 output channels 253401 4 channels can be selected Comparator Function option This function compares the measured values of voltage current active power apparent power reactive power power factor and phase angle and such with preset limit values When the measured values cross those preset limits a contact output relay will be activated Output items up to 4 channels can be set IM 253401 01E 1 3 oq ued 1ueuinisu Siy TeuM 1 2 Functions Remote Control Functions option External Input This instrument can be controlled using the following TTL level low pulse logic signals EXT HOLD when options DA4 DA12 CMP are installed Holds updating of the displayed values or releases the hold status EXT TRIG when options DA4 DA12 CMP are installed Updates the displayed values in hold mode EXT START when options DA4 DA12 are installed Starts integration EXT ST
164. VER indicator lights up E Bunoous e qnoJ pue uoneJqieo ueunsn py IM 253401 01E 14 11 14 4 Error Codes and Corrective Actions 54 Power factor exceeded 2 during 6 1 measurement of power factor 55 PFErr was displayed at the end of power 6 1 6 2 factor computation during measurement of phase angle 56 Input level was too low or below 5 3 measurement range during measurement of frequency Err Lo is displayed 57 Measured frequency exceeded the 5 3 measurement range Err Hi is displayed 58 Computation overflow occurred 2 4 oF is displayed 59 Harmonic analysis becomes FrgEr 8 2 390 Overrun error Lower the baud rate 12 6 Error Codes regarding Self Diagnosis Error Code Description Corrective Action 60 Data failure of set up parameters backup set up parameters are set to default 61 EEPROM element 1 failure Service is required 62 EEPROM element 2 failure Service is required 63 EEPROM element 3 failure Service is required 64 EEPROM D A board failure Service is required 65 A D converter element 1 failure Service is required 66 A D converter element 2 failure Service is required 67 A D converter element 3 failure Service is required 68 Data file failure File will be initialized measurement data set up parameter file failure automatically 69 Lithium battery voltage drop Service is required 71 DSP communications failure Service is required 75 DSP1 program RAM f
165. WT NOW T ISO Digital Power Meter USER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA 4 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM253401 01E 3rd Ed iti ition Foreword Notes Revisions Disk No BA12 3rd Edition March 1998 YK AThank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA WT110 or WT130 Digital Power Meter This User s Manual contains useful information regarding the instrument s functions and operating procedures as well as precautions that should be observed during use To ensure proper use of the instrument please read this manual thoroughly before operating it Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises The peak measurement function and the MATH function described in this manual apply to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your dealer or YOKOGAWA sales office Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited First edition September 1995 2nd edition March 1997 3rd edition March 1998 All Rights Reserved Copyright 1995 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 253401 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrume
166. a W3 data SW data Terminator Line5 Frequency Display C Terminator Line 6 END Terminator Default Output Format in case Integration Measurement WT110 253401 Line 1 pata Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall number Line 2 W1 data Terminator Line3 Whidata Terminator Line 4 Ahidata Terminator i EI d Line5 Frequency Intecredof time Terminator Line 6 END Terminator WT130 253502 Line 1 Data Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall number Line 2 W1 data W3 data SW data Terminator Line3 Whidata Wh3data SWhdata Terminator Line4 Ahidata Ah3data SAhdata Terminator EI d Line5 Frequency integration time Terminator Line 6 END Terminator WT130 253503 Line 1 Data Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall number Line 2 W1 data W2data W3 data SW data Terminator Line 3 Whidata Wh2data Wh3data SWhdata Terminator Line 4 Ahidata Ah2data Ah3data SAhdata Terminator EI d Line5 j Frequency intedratloh time Terminator Line 6 END Terminator 11 6 IM 253401 01E 11 4 Output Format for Normal Measured Computed Data Harmonic Analysis Data Set up Parameters and Error Codes Output Fo
167. ace is a 1 Communication settings depend on your communication interface GPIB the procedure ends at Refer to Ch 11 or 12 for the menu E 2 This menu only appears in case of version 1 11 and later step 5 For instruments earlier than version 1 11 the setting ends at step 3 3 PCL is displayed on WT110 WT130 with version 2 21 or later Setting the Output Items 5k 1 Display C 3 Display C SETUP 2 Lonn gt ENTER Hee eS Setting the output items c SHIFT OUTPUT 5 Display C a aj F out 4 HAr gt ENTER Hod ENTER a v m dH v 6 A End M A El f rELRMH ij V PI 3 f dEL G a H i Oo c G A i o E L P i L Hd o DN ra EY na 3 E3 oc G A d G P ALL m A B 6 V Sets the A column Activating th ctivatinging i the output T V Moves to the B column SHIFT gt 1 Display C Selecting data or set up parameters 8 V Select from 1 to 3 ETUP I m SHIFT OUTPUT 2 um CENE DisplayC 5 F au E gt ENTER aT et ENTER v dH Bd X n End I Poe f EREELHRM V 4 This menu only appears in case of version 1 11 and higher E For instruments lower than version 1 11 the setting
168. actor VFrq voltage frequency AFrq current frequency Ph total watt hour Wh Ah total ampere hour dEG phase angle VP peak value of voltage AP peak value of current MATH computation tl elapsed integration time Ph positive watt hour Wh Ph negative watt hour Wh Ah positive ampere hour Ah negative ampere hour no output For details regarding the positive ampere hour refer to page 7 3 2 Available on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later Setting the element corresponds to column B in the operating procedure The element setting depends on the model and is as follows The initial value is 1 WT110 253401 no such element setting available WT130 253502 element can be selected from 1 3 or 4 WT130 253503 element can be sleected from 1 2 3 or 4 The element number 4 represents gt Setting the Output Item in case of Harmonic Analysis The setting is carried out in the same way as described in section 10 9 However when output data by communication function graphs will be printed but only data values will be output For details refer to page 10 17 10 18 IM 253401 01E 11 11 ooepelu gi dO EI 11 7 Commands before the IEEE 488 2 1987 Standard For a detailed description of each command refer to appendix 1 1 Command Description Wiring system WRm WiRing sets wiring system Voltage range RVm Range Voltage sets voltage range AVm Au
169. ailure Service is required 76 DSP2 program RAM failure Service is required 77 DSP3 program RAM failure Service is required 79 ROM checksum error Service is required 80 RAM read write check error Service is required 81 DSP1 data RAM error Service is required 82 DSP2 data RAM error Service is required 83 DSPS data RAM error Service is required 84 DSP1 sample clock failure Service is required 85 DSP2 sample clock failure Service is required 86 DSPS sample clock failure Service is required 90 Incorrect board combination Service is required 91 Incorrect board combination Service is required 14 12 IM 253401 01E 14 5 Replacing the Fuse for WT130 A TESTS Fuse Ratings When replacing the fuse of the WT130 carry out the procedure described below The fuse used must be of the specified rating current voltage type in order to prevent a fire hazard Make sure to turn OFF the power switch and to unplug the power cord from its source before replacing the fuse Never short circuit the fuse holder The fuse used in the WT130 has the following specifications 100V 200V Common Maximum rated voltage 250V Maximum rate current 0 5A Type Time lag Approved standard UL VDE Parts number AI346EF Replacing Procedure Replace the fuse as follows 1 Turn the power switch OFF 2 Unplug the power cord from the power connector 3 Place the tip of a flat blade screwdriver in to the slot of t
170. airs of Controller or Appendix 2 3 parameters 23 Functions performed until a message indicating No such commands completion of the command is displayed 6 List of function elements which configure Refer to the function description of each command in commands used for the device All those which Appendix 2 3 and to the corresponding chapters are included in elements of composite command program headers Refer to Appendix 2 2 and 2 3 7 Buffer size which affects transmission of block data Block data are not supported 8 List of program data elements which can be used in equations and nesting limit Cannot be used 9 Syntax of response data to queries Refer to the examples of each command in Appendix 2 3 10 Communication between devices which do not follow the rules regarding response data No other modes than conforming to IEEE 488 2 1987 are supported IM 253401 01E App2 1 Z spueululo uoneoiunuluo2 Appendix 2 2 Program Format Appendix 2 2 Program Format 2 2 1 Symbols Used in Syntax Descriptions Symbols which are used in the syntax descriptions in Appendix 2 3 are shown below These symbols are referred to as BNF notation Backus Naur Form For detailed information refer to pages App2 6 to App2 7 Symbol Description Example Example lt gt Defined value CHANnel lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 CHANNEL2 One of the options in MODE AND OR MODE AND is selected Exclusive OR MODE AND OR MOD
171. alues for all elements of voltage current power at once CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ALL lt NR gt lt NR gt 0 001 to 1000 CONFIGURE SCALING PT ALL 1 000 The setting values differ as follows Less than 1 000 Three digits after the decimal point are valid 1 000 to 1000 The first five digits are valid CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt Function Syntax Example Description Sets the scaling value for voltage current power of each element queries the current setting CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt lt NRf gt CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ELEMent lt x gt lt x gt 1 ES WT110 single phase model WT130 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT130 three phase model lt NRf gt 0 001 to 1000 CONFIGURE SCALING PT ELEMENT1 1 000 CONFIGURE SCALING PT ELEMENT1 CONFIGURE SCALING PT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 Setting values differ as described at CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ALL four wire CONFigure SCALing STATe Function Syntax Example Sets scaling ON OFF queries the current setting CONFigure SCALing STATe Boolean CONFigure SCALing STATe CONFIGURE SCALING STATE OFF CONFIGURE SCALING STATE gt CONFIGURE SCALING STATE 0 CONFigure VOLTage Function Syntax Example Queries all settings relating to voltage range CONFigure VOLTage CONFIGURE VOLTAGE
172. arrier detect CG 110 SQD Data signal quality detect CH CI 111 SRS Data signal rate select DA DB TXC 113 114 ST1 ST2 Transmitter signal element timing DD RXC 115 RT Receiver signal element timing SBA 118 BSD Secondary transmitted data SBB 119 BRD Secondary received data SCA 120 BRS Secondary request to send SCB 121 BCS Secondary clear to send SCF 122 BCD Secondary received carrier detect Circles indicate pins used for the RS 232 C interface of this instrument IM 253401 01E 12 3 eoeyelu 9 c c SuH H 12 3 Setting the Mode Handshaking Method Data Format and Baud Rate Relevant Keys Cisawpip a n V VA 12 3 rx c AUTO AUTO o V OVER L Li w l j k A Var Function ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays ATO J J J r Li L1 M W Te MODE TRIG relevant MODE keys and caus P m V PF 1283 xrxj vj jer indicator Vv MEAN Yo im _ j k A deg FruwcnoN ELEMENT WTEGRATOR coc J LI J LI MW START STOP RESET R HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET our min sec c REMOTE a m V H 12 3 l O m E roca serur _ k A A Function ELEMENT D JALU uU um C3 SCALING c3 AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS Toii 5 Bn w
173. arts No Minimum Q ty Remarks Digital printer 740921 1 ESC P compatible RS 232 C Centronics Noe It is recommended that the packing box be kept in a safe place The box can be used for transporting the instrument IM 253401 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is a IEC safety class I instrument provided with terminal for protective grounding The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument If this instrument is used in a manner not sepecified in this manual the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired Also YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The fullowing symbols are used on this instrument To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to an explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual Danger risk of electric shock Alternating current ON power OFF power In position of a bistable push control Out position of a bistable push control ic Pe ip p Ground IM 253401 01E Safety Precautions Do not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to p
174. ates element m 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for model 253503 only 3 Element 3 for WT130 only m4 indicates order of the harmonic m4 any number between 1 and 50 or 30 m5 indicates setting value 0 000 lt m5 lt 9999 m6 indicates prefix m6 0 m E 3 1 E 0 2 k E 3 3 M E 6 OYH3 lt terminator gt OYH3 3 1 1 1 200 2 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value No output is not related to any element order or setting value so in case the OYH command is set set these all to 1 as a dummy PR VTHD and ATHD are not related to any order so in case the OYH command is used set 1 as a dummy Spueuuulo uoieorunuuulo2 Sets the input as the PLL source inquires about the current setting IM 253401 01E App1 7 Appendix 1 1 Commands Syntax Query Example Description RA RA Syntax Query Example Description RC Syntax RO RO Syntax Query Example Description RR RR Syntax PS m lt terminator gt m indicates the input as the PLL source m 1 V1 2 A1 3 V2 for model 253503 only 4 A2 for model 253503 only 5 V3 for WT130 only 6 A3 for WT130 only PS terminator PS1 Parameter error 12 will occur if any illegal value is set While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets current range inquires about the current setting RA m terminator m indica
175. be kept Selecting the comparator function 1 Display C SETUP 2 Lann SHIFT OUTPUT m A F nL E v H Selecting the display function gi Display C f r EL AY gt ENTER arr 4 on A v nade 5 Display C 7 ij d 5 P gt ENTER T Bj ENTER dHtH n 6 nn End dHEH H C IM 253401 01E 10 14 10 7 Comparator Display optional Explanation Comparator Display Function This function allows you to verify the set limits together with measurement computation analysis data on the display when using the comparator function The display is as follows depending on whether the comparator function is set to single or dual mode Display in case the comparator function is set to single mode Unit k m M Applies to each corresponding display r channel Relay Selectable from ch1 to ch4 by V Unit Corresponding to the relay on displayA ceh X L1 d l Cream input element Coresponding to the relay on LE LIL displayA i ee ee rrr CLELEL S S s Measurement computation analysis data Corresponding to the relay on displayA L Limit value Corresponding to the relay on displayA Display in case the comparator function is set to dual mode Unit k m M Applies t
176. c Order and Displaying the Results of Harmonic Analysis Computation Equation n Vad Vi k 1 W YWk k 1 Vk Ak Wk Each component of Ist to 50th order of voltage current and active power k Analysis order n Maximum order The maximum order depends on the fundamental frequency of the input set as the PLL source Refer to Ch 15 for more details V Hz Shows the fundamental frequency of the voltage of the PLL source This frequency applies only to the element selected as PLL source For details regarding the PLL source setting refer to page 8 3 The measurement range is the same as in case of normal measurement The range of fundamental frequencies in case of harmonic analysis is 40 to 440Hz However depending on internal timing there are cases where measurements in the 20 to 700Hz range can be performed A Hz Shows the fundamental frequency of the current of the PLL source The rest is the same as in case of V Hz Note Incase you select an input element using the ELEMENT key which is not the assigned element for the harmonic analysis or you selected a display function which is not being analyzed measured then the bar display appears When the harmonic analysis function is turned ON on the WT 130 pressing the ELEMENT key will not result in moving to gt When pressing the FUNCTION key on display A and the display function becomes V A or W then display A will show the same analysis items as the V A
177. ch element by CMO differ from each other While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur e n Sets the measurement mode for voltage and current inquires about the current setting MN m terminator m1 indicates the measurement mode m120 RMS 1 V MEAN MEAN in case of voltage RMS in case of current 2 DC MN terminator MNO Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Changing of the measurement mode is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur MT MT Syntax Query Example Description OA OA Syntax While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets the computing equation of MATH function inquires about the current setting MTm lt terminator gt m indicates the computing equation m 0 Efficiency available only on the WT130 Crest factor of the voltage input waveform of input element 1 Crest factor of the voltage input waveform of input element 2 available only three phase four wire model of the WT130 Crest factor of the voltage input waveform of input element 3 available only on the WT130 4 Crest factor of the current input waveform of input element 1 5 Crest factor of the current input waveform of input element 2 available only three phase four wire model of the WT130 6 Crest factor of the current input waveform of input element 3 availabl
178. command Parameters Characters or numericals are in ASCII code Terminator e In case of GP IB When this instrument is set to listener mode either CR LF LF or EOI can be used as the terminator When this instrument is set to talker mode the terminator set using the DL command becomes valid Refer to page App1 2 e In case of RS 232 C Refer to page 12 7 and Appl 2 Sending Several Commands You can express several commands on one line In such a case enter a semicolon between two commands command parameter Note It makes no difference whether a space tab or similar is entered between command and parameter Query A command followed by a question mark is called a query command When such a command is sent the current data will appear Query Current data DA DAi Parameter Values Up to 5 digits after the decimal point will be recognized App1 10 IM 253401 01E Appendix 1 2 Sample Program Sample Program NK KKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck KK KKK KKK ko KK NE WT110 WT130 wi Program to read measurement data 10 times and then display them x Microsoft QuickBASIC 4 0 4 5 Version NO Ok Ck Ck Ck KC Ck Ck 0C Ck C0 Ck CC Ck Ck C CK Ck Ck Kk Ck Ck CK kk Ck kk Ck Ck Ck Sk Sk Ck Ck kk Ck Ck oko Sk Ck Ck ck Sk Sk ko ko ck Ck Ck ko ck Sk ck ko ko ko ko ko ko GOTO PRGEND REM SINCLUDE
179. ct the DC voltage and DC current standard as follows In case of the WT 130 voltages are connected parallel and currents in series Direct input EUT Equipment under test DC voltage standard DC voltage standard 14 4 IM 253401 01E 14 2 Calibration External sensor input equipped with option EX2 EUT DC voltage standard Calibration Regarding the combination of voltage and current ranges we recommend applying the following Test the current ranges with the voltage range set to 150V Test the voltage ranges with the current range set to 5A Of course testing can be carried out using other combinations as well 1 Set the voltage or current range of this instrument to the testing range 2 Set the output voltage of the DC voltage standard to the rated range value of this instrument and output the voltage 3 Set the output current of the DC current standard to the rated range value of this instrument and output the current 4 Fine adjust the output setting value of the voltage standard so that the voltage or current value displayed on this instrument shows the rated range 5 Read the output voltage or current setting value of the voltage standard and treat this as the reference 6 Verify that the power factor value displayed on this instrument shows the rated value The product of the voltage setting value and the current setting value of
180. cter data Enter one of the character strings in l l App 2 3 144 Character data too long Check the character strings in l l App 2 3 148 Character data not allowed Enter in a format other than one of those in l l App 2 3 150 String data error Character string must be enclosed by double quotation marks App2 7 or single quotation marks 151 Invalid string data Character string is too long or contains characters which cannot App 2 3 be used 158 String data not allowed Enter in a data format other than Character string App 2 3 161 Invalid block data Block data is not allowed 168 Block data not allowed lt Block data gt is not allowed 171 Invalid expression Equation is not allowed App 2 3 178 Expression data not allowed Equation is not allowed App 2 3 181 Invalid outside macro definition Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 IM 253401 01E App2 43 Z SpueWWOD uoneoiunuluo2 Appendix 2 7 Communication related Error Messages Errors in communications execution 200 to 299 Code Message Action Reference Page 221 Setting conflict Check the relevant setting App 2 3 222 Data out of range Check the setting range App 2 3 223 Too much data Check the data byte length App 2 3 224 Illegal parameter value Check the setting range App 2 3 241 Hardware missing Check availability of options 260 Expression error Equa
181. ction ELEMENT v ranae ARANGE HOLD Displays Sx l L LL L J M W Te LJ MODE TRIG relevant wor 5 keys and AMS m V PF 1 2 3 x E indicator V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ z E INTEGRATOR coc MW START STOP RESET HARMONCS MEMORY INTEG SET hour m n sec e i D m V Hz 1 2 3 x HL fi l1 d 1 k A h Function ELEMENT LL m mw e CJ 193W c 393W wm SCALING c3 AVG c3 FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL C3HARMONICS c3304W co 3V3A WIRING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Selecting the four arithmetical operations function 1 Display C Display C 5 SETUP 5 FLE 3 EFF 9 ENTER Ayo AIK oF ui P MU SEALE VIL PF AI f Ein t Arb Pnbr5E s H h A RE H 9 ENTER Hub Alb tA be H g h Explanation Setting the Wiring Method The computing equation for efficiency changes according to the wiring method as indicated on the next page For the operating procedure see section 3 9 Selecting the Wiring Method for WT130 4 1
182. current capacity must be used for these lines Use of a PT or CT enables measurement of voltage or current even if the maximum voltage or maximum current of the object to be measured exceeds the maximum measuring range If the maximum voltage of the object to be measured exceeds 600V connect an external uoneJedo eJojeg n potential transformer PT and connect the secondary side of the PT to the voltage input terminals If the maximum current of the object to be measured exceeds 20A connect an external current transformer CT and connect the secondary side of the CT to the current input terminals Wiring diagram for single phase two wire system with PT and CT connected 253401 253502 253503 SOURCE LOAD SOURCE LOAD SOURCE g 9 l p CT Oo OViPT 1 ogg i Logg OO MUDE 1 O b 1 O Ovi L l pon cope Input terminal Input terminal ELEMENT ELEMENT Wiring diagram for single phase three wire system with PT and CT connected 253502 253503 SOURCE LOAD Input terminal Input terminal ELEMENT1 ELEMENT3 Note Using the scaling function enables direct reading of measured values on the display Refer to section 4 4 on page 4 6 It must be noted that measured values are affected by the frequency and phase characteristics of PT and CT IM 253401 01E 3 7 3 5 Wiring the Measurement
183. current setting When CMO is set SA n terminator When CMI is set SA m n terminator m indicates element m 0 All elements Setting not allowed during inquiry 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 only for model 253503 3 Element 3 only for the WT130 indicates external sensor scaling value 0 001 n lt 1000 When CMO is set SA terminator When CMI is set SAm terminator When CMO is set SA50 00 When CM1 is set SA1 50 00 e Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Error 12 will occur when an inquiry is made if the shunt current values set for each element by CMO differ from each other ee n App1 8 IM 253401 01E Appendix 1 1 Commands SC SC Syntax Query Example Description SL Syntax Description SO SO Syntax Query Example Description SR SR Syntax Query Example Description SS Syntax Description While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Determines whether or not to use the scaling function inquires about the current setting SC m terminator m indicates whether scaling is ON or OFF m 0 OFF 1 ON SC terminator SCI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Recalls set up parameters from a selected file SL m terminator m indicates file no an
184. d 5 J mentioned above Pri nk Lun L LLL Select this when setting commands according to IEEE 488 2 1987 Note that this menu only appears in case of version 1 11 and later Refer to page 3 14 to confirm your version Mode Setting Refer to page 11 1 for details Address Setting A particular address is assigned to each device connected to the GP IB interface so that each device can be recognized by every device Therefore an address must be assigned to this ooepnelu gi d9 instrument when it is connected to a personal computer Address setting range 0 to 30 The initial value is 1 Initializating the instrument will not result in changing the address setting Talk only Function This function only allows the instrument to send data to other devices If talk only is off the instrument can both send and receive data In talk only mode the instrument cannot be controlled by the controller Terminator When this instrument is used as a listener Use CR LF LF or EOT as the receiving terminator When this instrument is used as a talker The sending terminator is set using the DL command The initial setting is CR LF EOI Note tis not possible for this instrument to receive data if the CR terminator is sent from the controller It is also not possible to set CR as the terminator which is to be sent from this instrument IM 253401 01E 11 9 11
185. d must be set within the following range l lt m lt 4 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value t is not possible to recall communications related information communication mode address etc using this command While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets the store function ON OFF or inquires about the current setting SO m terminator m indicates whether storage is ON or OFF m 0 OFF 1 ON SO lt terminator gt SO1 e Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets the storage interval inquires about the current setting SR m1 m2 m3 terminator m1 indicates the hour Oxml lt 99 m2 indicates the minutes 0xm2 s59 m3 indicates the seconds 0 lt m3 lt 59 SR lt terminator gt SRO 0 0 Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set When the storage interval is set to Ohrs Omin Osec refer to page 9 2 While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Stores set up parameters into a selected file SS m terminator m indicates file no and must be set within the following range l lt m lt 4 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value The following set up parameters can be stored All set up parameters which can be output by the OS c
186. d pue 10284 45919 en eA uonejedo oneuiuuy 1no J ouenbeJ4 iewog eAnoy iueJn eBeyoA Buikejdsiq Buunsee u Maximum reading 9999 Units Hz Prefix DOK Selecting the Display Function The following selections are available V Hz voltage frequency will be displayed A Hz current frequency will be displayed Selecting the Input Element The type of input element which can be selected depends on the model number Make your selection after having verified your model number 1 2 3 Displays the measurement values of element 1 2 3 X INO te T_T __ LLLEL LLALL Incase the level of the input signal is low below approx 7 or when the frequency is smaller than the measurement range the display will show ErrLo When the frequency is larger than the measurement range the display will show ErrHi This instrument measures the frequency after synchronizing to the cycle of the input signal We recommend to turn ON the filter when measuring an inverted waveform or a waveform with high noise However depending on the signal s frequency and level ErrLo might appear on the display Since the filter s cutoff frequency is 300Hz the signal attenuates and no signal will be detected Even when the filter is set OFF but the frequency exceeds the measurement range ErrLo might appear since no signal will be detected anymore due to the internal circuit s attenuation Displays no measurement values only dots
187. d time and frequency 2 E IW IVA Svar IPF xo Writing intervals 250 ms and 1 s to 99 h 59 min 59s cz 43 Iw Reading intervals 250 ms and 1 s to 99 h 59 min 59 s both amp 6 Wi Ws _ v3 vari vars a ZW s oo 778 SVA cos Syn intervals can be set on a second basis VA1 VA2 VA3 Panel setup information Four pattern information can be written read z Wi VAizVixAi vari PFi 9i 15 9 D A Converter optional 2 1 2 3 i21 2 3 VAi We Wi a Wi i i NAI WI 7cos Ld Output voltage 5 VDC FS approximately 37 5 V maximum at rated value or i i 1 2 3 A 3 12123 i range Number of output channels 12 when the DA12 option is g T I installed 4 when the DA4 option is installed i zw XVA var PF Eo Output data selection Can be selected for each channel WieWez W3 VA1 VA2 VA3 varievareevars _ w cos Iw Accuracy Display accuracy 0 2 of range 2 EVA EVA Update rate Identical to display update interval Temperature coefficient 0 05 of f s C in d Depends on the Computatinghngselected selected V and A Same as apparent 4 to 0 to 11 180 to 0 to 180 Range v and A ranges ranges p s Frequency F D A output Display 40000 10000 10000 1 000 180 0 i UU resolution Approx 7 5V Computing accuracy for z Resolution feya i TER of 0 005 of 0 0005 power factor hits mesure range var range 0 0005 5 0V value Note 1 The apparent power VA reactive power var power factor PF and phase angl
188. data are retrieved when during the recall process oFF is selected at the store ON OFF setting Setting the Recalling Interval Sets the time during which recalling will be carried out Setting range 00 00 00 Ohrs Omin Osec to 99 59 59 99hrs 59min 59sec e Initial value 00 00 00 When recalling normal measured data the interval will become 250ms when the setting is 00 00 00 When recalling harmonic analysis data the interval will become 1s when the setting is 00 00 00 Recalling ON OFF After having set the recalling interval select the recall menu once again The initial value is oFF on Recalling will start by pressing the ENTER key after selecting on the RECALL indicator will light while recalling is in progress oFF Recalling will stop by pressing the ENTER key after selecting oFF the RECALL indicator will extinguish Note During recalling the measurement conditions range will become as those of the data being recalled After recalling finishes the original measurement conditions will return measurement range measurement mode filter ON OFF scaling ON OFF scaling values averaging ON OFF averaging mode averaging values integration mode integration time harmonic analysis function ON OFF PLL source input element computation method of harmonic distortion factor When recalling data to a personal computer by communication interface data might be cut due to the data length or used
189. ddress specified in the program match the 11 1 11 9 address set up in the instrument Does the interface meet the IEEE standard 488 1978 electrical and mechanical requirements Are the instrument and controller using the same communication settings 12 1 to 12 3 14 10 IM 253401 01E 14 4 Error Codes and Corrective Actions Error Codes for Operation and Measurement Error Code Description Corrective Action Reference page 11 Received a command not used by this Check for error in the command 11 12 instrument sent 12 Parameter value specified is outside the Correct the value App 2 allowed range 13 Attempted to execute a key operation or Check whether integration is in 7 8 11 12 received a communications command while progress or is interrupted integration was running or was interrupted that cannot be executed or received in such a state 14 Attempted to set auto range while external It is not possible to set auto 4 5 sensor range is selected range while external sensor range is selected 15 Attempted to execute a command or key Check whether the command or operation that was protected key operation is correct 16 Attempted to execute a key operation or Check whether harmonic 8 5 received a communications command while analysis is in progress or is harmonic analysis was being performed or interrupted was interrupted that cannot be executed or received in such a state 17 Print output time out 10 18
190. de sese 10 18 output format D A output seeseeseeeeeenerennnee nennen 10 4 output format error code essere 11 8 output format harmonic analysis data 11 7 App2 25 output format model 2533 ssssssesssseeee Appl 16 output format normal measured computed data 11 4 App2 24 output format set up parameter seen 11 8 Output function 5 3 ert EP Ore eere se cioe eue 1 4 Output QUEUE s uuo eene reete nete etre aii App2 36 App2 39 overlap commandos iie esaet ar eret te App2 7 overrange display 525 ettet ete egets 2 4 overview of IEEE 488 2 1987 sssssssssseeeee App2 1 P packaged d eo Bei Ae ie t NO NE s 2 peak over display ee ieee ernest e Pe QOEM qp 2 4 phase angle display essere 6 2 Phase Lae cies RM 6 2 phase lead 6 2 phase locked loop ertet terree ecole ene 8 4 pin ASSISMMEN sees nre rented tiir 10 1 PLL source PMT 3o nte ESO REID Rep er rad tue potential transformer ssesesesseeeeeeeeeeeetneetetneenenntnenenes 4 7 inisduonce E alse taser tones sania eased locas a ea eae 2 5 power display ettet tb Re do RESO EE MS 5 1 POW ED TAC LON deco Wa p UR EE MEER 4 7 power factor display esee 6 1 power integration method ssesseeseeeeee 7 2 power range power supply interval talk only mode preset time for integrator airis a E 7 1 p
191. dicates the harmonic order mc any number between 1 to 50 or 30 OR terminator OR50 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Depending on the fundamental frequency of the PLL source set as the input the maximum number of orders varies When an order exceeding the maximum has been set display B will show Requests output of setting parameters via communications OS terminator Line 1 Model name MODEL253503 terminator Line 2 Voltage range RV9 AVI terminator Line 3 Current range When CMO is set RA9 AA1 SA50 00 terminator When CMI is set RA9 AA1 SA1 50 00 SA2 50 00 SA3 50 0 terminator Line 4 Display function DA1 DB2 DC3 terminator Line 5 Element EA1 EB1 EC1 terminator Line 6 Measurement condition WR2 FL0 SC0 AGO HD0O MTO terminator App1 6 IM 253401 01E Appendix 1 1 Commands OY OY Line 7 Measurement mode MNO lt terminator gt Line 8 Scaling constant When CMO is set KV1 000 KA1 000 K W1 000 terminator When CM1 is set KV1 1 000 KA1 1 000 KW 1 1 000 KV2 1 000 K A2 1 000 K W2 1 000 KV3 1 000 K A3 1 000 K W3 1 000 terminator Line 9 Averaging setting ATI ACI terminator Line 10 Integration setting IC0 TMO 0 terminator Line 11 Storing recalling setting SOO SRO0 0 0 ROO RRO0 0 0 terminator Line 12 Command group used CMO terminator Line 13 Output end END terminator The number of l
192. dshake when transmitting data to personal computer Signal direction input 6 CC DSR Data Set Ready Signal used to handshake when transmitting data to personal computer Signal direction input 7 AB GND Signal Ground Ground for signals 20 CD DTR Data Terminal Ready Signal used to handshake when receiving data from personal computer Signal direction output Note Pins 8 to 19 and 21 to 25 are not used Signal Direction The figure below shows the direction of the signals used by the RS 232 C interface CC DSR 6 CD DTR data terminal ready Paiiputer CA RTS request to send 4 This CB CTS clear to send ready 5 instrument BA TXD transmitted data 2 BB RXD received data 3 12 2 IM 253401 01E 12 2 Connecting the Interface Cable Table of RS 232 C Standard Signals and their JIS and CCITT Abbreviations Pin No Abbreviations 25 pin connector RS 232 C CCITT Name AA GND 101 FG Protective ground AB GND 102 SG Signal ground BA TXD 103 SD Transmitted data BB RXD 104 RD Received data CA RTS 105 RS Request to send CB CTS 106 CS Clear to send CC DSR 107 DR Data set ready CD DTR 108 2 ER Data terminal ready CE RI 125 CI Ring indicator D D 2 8 4 8 6 20 22 8 CF DCD 109 CD Data channel received c
193. e 2 5V deg measurements in this instrument are computed digitally from the voltage current and effective power If the input is non sinusoidal the measured values may differ from those obtained with instruments employing different measurement 0 5Vi principles 0 2V1 Note 2 When the current or voltage is less than 0 5 of the range the VA and var will be displayed as 0 and PF deg will be displayed as an error Note 3 The Lead and Lag are displayed for V and A input at 50 or more The detected lead lag accuracy is 5 degrees over the frequency range of 20 Hz to 2 kHz Integration 15 6 Display Functions Di output Display type 7 segment LED Approx 7 0V se ce en insane n e ie y a Number of displays 3 i n z 140 input of the rated value i DISPLAY Displayed Value Maximum Reading A V A W VA var each element elapsed integration time V A W 9999 BOV peeeennnu nee rati enne nere ee rg innnan B V A W PF deg each element contents ratio in THD Wh Ah 999999 C V A W V AHz Wh Ah each element V AHz 9999 i vp N pk MATH Rated value input Vpk Apk and MATH are supported only for ROM versions 2 01 or later Unit m k M V A W VA var Hz ht deg Display update rate 4 times s 0 f to integration time Response time Approximately 0 5 s time for displayed value to settle within to Rated
194. e ON OFF pattern for all communication outputs of the normal measurement function Syntax MEASure NORMal ITEM PRESet NORMal INTEGrate CLEar Example MEASURE NORMAL ITEM PRESET NORMAL Description The following three patterns can be selected The same setting applies to the current all elements or NORMal V A W ON others0FF INTEGrate W WH AH TIME ON others OFF CLEar all items OFF MEASure NORMal ITEM TIME MATH Function Sets the communication output of integration elasped time MATH ON OFF queries about the current setting Syntax MEASure NORMal ITEM TIME MATH lt Boolean gt MEASure NORMal ITEM TIME MATH Example MEASURE NORMAL ITEM TIME OFF MEASURE NORMAL ITEM TIME gt MEASURE NORMAL ITEM TIME 0 MEASure NORMal ITEM lt normal measurement function gt Function Queries communication output settings of the normal measurement function Syntax MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt normal measurement function V A W VA VAR PF DEGRee VHZ AHZ WH WHP WHM AH AHP AHM VPK APK Example MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 Description For the meanings of the symbols of functions see Note on page App2 11 MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ALL Function Sets the communication output concerning all elements or 3 ON OFF at once Syntax MEASure NO
195. e corresponding values for the transformer primary sides can been displayed or otherwise output This function is exactly the same as the one described previously for use with PT CT Measured computed value Scaled result Current A ExA E External sensor scaling value Active power W ExW Reactive power var E x var Apparent power VA ExVA Selecting the Setting Format of the Scaling Value The following two setting formats are available The initial value is ALL At the WT110 this selection menu will not appear ALL Select this when the same scaling values should be applied to all elements together EACH Select this when the scaling values should only be applied to each element seperately Setting the Scaling Value The procedure to set the scaling values depends on the setting format previous setting The setting ranges from 0 001 to 1000 The initial value is 50 00 In case of the WT110 the scaling value is set at display C When ALL is selected The scaling value set at display C will be applied to all elements together When EACH is selected The scaling value set at display A will be applied to element 1 only The scaling value set at display B will be applied to element 2 only This selection will not appear on model 253502 The scaling value set at display C will be applied to element 3 only After having selected ALL or EACH and entered the scaling values press the ENTER key to end this scalin
196. e of normal measurement App 2 29 RELay NCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion Sets queries the function of the relay output in case of normal measurement App 2 29 RELay NCHannel lt x gt THReshold Sets queries the threshold level for the relay output item App 2 29 RELay STATe Sets queries the comparator function ON OFF App 2 29 SAMPle Group SAMPle Queries all settings related to sampling App 2 30 SAMPle HOLD Sets queries to hold the output of data display communication App 2 30 STATus Group STATus Queries all settings related to the status of communication App 2 31 STATus CONDition Queries the contents of the condition filter and clears it at the same time App 2 31 STATus EESE Sets queries the extended event register App 2 31 STATus EESR Queries the contents of the extended event register and clears it App 2 31 STATus ERRor Queries the occurred error code and message App 2 31 STATus FILTer lt x gt Sets queries the transit filter App 2 31 STATus QMESsage Sets queries whether or not to apply the corresponding message to the query STATus ERRor App 2 31 STATus SPOLl Serial Poll Executes serial polling App 2 31 STORe Group STORe Queries all settings related to storing data App 2 32 STORe INTerval Sets queries the interval for storing data App 2 32 STORe PANel Saves the set up parameters to a file App 2 32 STORe STATe Sets queries the store function ON OFF App 2 32 Common Command Group CLS Clears th
197. e only on 7 display A display B 8 display A display B 9 display A X display B 10 display A display B 11 display A display B 12 display A display B MT lt terminator gt MTO This command applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later N w Sets D A output items inquires about the current settings Up to 4 or 12 measured data can be selected and output as analog signal from the D A converter OA m1 m2 m3 lt terminator gt m1 indicates D A output channel and must be set within the following range 1 lt ml lt 12or4 m2 indicates output item no m2 0 No output 1 Voltage V 2 Current A 3 Power W 4 Reactive power var 5 Apparent power VA 6 Power factor PF 7 Input voltage frequency V Hz 8 Input current frequency A Hz 9 Watt hour Wh 10 Ampere hour Ah 11 Phase angle deg 12 Peak voltage value Vpk 13 Peak current value Apk 14 Computation result MATH 24 Positive watt hour Wh 25 Negative watt hour Wh 26 Positive ampere hour Ah 27 Negative ampere hour Ah Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later ee m3 indicates element m 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for model 253503 only 3 Element 3 for WT130 only 4 gt for WT130 only App1 4 IM 253401 01E Appendix 1 1 Commands Query Example Description OAD OAD Syntax Query Example Description OD Syntax Description OE
198. e rated range value PLL synchronization may sometimes fail In this case it is suggested that a suitable measurement range be selected so that the input level exceeds 30 of the rated range value Setting the Computation Method of Harmonic Distortion The computation method of harmonic distortion can be selected from the following two In the following explanation a maximum of 50 analysis orders is assumed In case of a maximum less than 50 computation display will be performed up to that order iEC Computes the ratio of the rms value of the 2nd to 50th order component to that of the fundamental 1st order CSA Computes the ratio of the rms value of the 2nd to 50th order component to that of the rms value of the Ist to 50th component Computation Equation In case of iEC C1 Fundamental component 1st order Ck Fundamental or harmonic component Analysis order n Maximum order The maximum order depends on the fundamental frequency of the input set as the PLL source Refer to Ch 15 for more details 8 4 IM 253401 01E 8 3 Switching the Harmonic Analysis Function ON OFF Relevant Keys A hour min c3 SAMPLE l r1 m V VA 12 3 X AUTO AUTO c3 V OVER yf yi k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays B OVER J I J I J W Time L MODE TRIG relevant moe keys and cimus m V
199. e standard event register extended event register and error queue App 2 33 ESE Sets queries the value of the standard event enable register App 2 33 ESR Sets queries the value of the standard event register and clears it App 2 33 IDN Queries the instrument model App 2 33 OPC This command is not supported by this instrument App 2 33 OPC This command is not supported by this instrument and is always 1 App 2 33 OPT Queries installed options App 2 34 PSC Sets queries whether or not to clear some registers at power ON App 2 34 RST Initializes the present settings App 2 34 SRE Sets queries the value of the service request enable register App 2 34 STB Queries the value of the status byte register App 2 34 TRG Executes the same operation as the TRIG SHIFT HOLD key App 2 34 TST Executes a self test and queries the results App 2 34 WAI This command is not supported by this instrument App 2 34 App2 10 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 2 AOUTput Group The commands in the AOUTput group are used to make settings relating to and inquires about D A output This allows you to make the same settings and inquiries as can be set using the lower menus of OUTPUT dA or INTEG SET dAtimE a Y AOUTput c PRESet 3 4 Space C NORMal gt INTEGrate _CHANne x m Space Normal measurement
200. each channel of the synchronizer to 60Hz Then while not exceeding the maximum values of the external synchronization inputs of the voltage and current standard rise the output level of the synchronizer until the standards are synchronized Make sure that the phase angle between each channel of the synchronizer is 0 degrees Calibrating 1 Set the voltage or current range of this instrument to the range to be calibrated 2 Set the output voltage of the AC voltage standard to the rated range of this instrument and output the voltage 3 Set the output current of the AC current standard to the rated range of this instrument and output the current 4 Fine adjust the output values of the standard so that the displayed voltage or current value on this instrument show the rated range 5 Read the output voltage or current value and keep it as a reference 6 Verify that the displayed power value corresponds to the rated value The product of the voltage value and the current value is the reference value of the power Noe Before starting the above described calibration verify that the accuracy of this instrument lies within the specifications Adjust the output of the standard to the rated range value of this instrument then read the displayed voltage or current value on this instrument and verify that this value lies within the specifications Slightly change the phase angle of ch2 of the synchronizer current signal so that the displa
201. easured computed values using three red high intensity 7 segment LED displays A total of three values can be displayed at once Computing Functions Apparent Power Reactive Power Power Factor and Phase Angle Based on the measurement values of voltage current and active power the values of apparent power reactive power power factor and phase angle can be computed Scaling Function When performing voltage or current measurements with an external PT CT shunt external sensor clamp or such connected you can set a scaling factor to the primary secondary ratio This is called scaling This function enables display of the measured values of voltage current active power reactive power integrated current and integrated power factor in terms of primary side values Averaging Function This function is used to perform exponential or moving averaging on the measured values before displaying them in cases where the measured values are not stable 1 2 IM 253401 01E 1 2 Functions Four Arithmetic Operation Function Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later Results from six types of arithmetic operations can be displayed A B A B A B A B A2 B A B2 Crest Factor Computing Function Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later Crest factor is determined by peak value RMS value Crest factor of the voltage and current are computed and displayed on models that have the peak measurement funct
202. ection consists of 11 bytes di d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d1 polarity space or minus d2 to d8 mantissa floating point number of the maximum six digits In case of harmonic distortion and relative harmonic content d9 96 d10 to d11 _ space In other cases d9 to d11 exponent E 3 gt m E 0 E 3 5 k E 6 5M IM 253401 01E 11 7 ooepnelu dl d EI 11 4 Output Format for Normal Measured Computed Data Harmonic Analysis Data Set up Parameters and Error Codes Output Format The output format depends on the selected output items which can be selected by the OH command In case of voltage and current All computed values of vi pjs Line 1 the 1st to 50th order harmonic distortion Terminator Line 2 Analysis value for F 1 inat fundamental 1st order gt requency erminator Analysis value for 2nd Relative harmonic content F nines harmonic gt for 2nd harmonic Terminator Line 51 Analysis value for 50th Relative harmonic content Terminator harmonic gt for 50th harmonic Line 52 END Terminator In case of active power All computed values of i Line 1 the 1st to 50th order 3 Power factor Terminator Analysis value for i Line 2 fundamental 1st order f Frequency Terminator Analysis value for Relative harmonic content Line3 2nd harmonic
203. ed Displayed Items After having set the harmonic analysis function to ON the harmonic component of voltage current or active power will be analyzed and displayed for one of the input elements not applicable for the WT110 Depending on the setting of the display function the display changes as follows Display A FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION i No display function lit V A W 1 No display function lit Displays the harmonic order 1 to 50 Display function V A W Displays all rms values computed values of 1up to 50 components of voltage current or active power Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION B V A gt WV PF V A FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION Adeg Vdeg W lt A V Display function V Displays the voltage analysis value of the order shown on display A A Displays the current analysis value of the order shown on display A W Displays the active power analysis value of the order shown on display A PF Displays the power factor of the fundamental 1st order V 96 Displays the voltage harmonic distortion proceeded by t on display B A 96 Displays the current harmonic distortion proceeded by t on display B V Displays the relative harmonic content of the voltage of
204. ed data Set up parameters are saved in another internal memory than measured data Saved set up parameters are backed up by the lithium battery in the same way as measured data Recalling Set up Parameters When set up parameters are being retrieved all set up parameters are being set accordingly After that measurements can be carried out IM 253401 01E 9 5 Buyjpeoay Bunos n 10 1 Remote Control and D A Output Connector optional Using the remote control and the D A output connector this instrument can be remotely controlled and D A output can be done The connector s pin sequence and signal assignment is as follows Connector s Pin Sequence WT110 253401 13 24 Pin Assignment A Ts 1 12 Rear panel WT130 253502 253503 DA4 specifications for WT110 253401 only remote control 4 channel D A output 12 13 24 DA12 specifications for WT130 253502 253503 remote control 12 channel D A output Pin No Signal Pin No Signal 1 DIGITAL COM 13 DIGITAL COM 2 EXT HOLD Input 14 EXT TRIG Input 3 EXT START Input 15 EXT STOP Input 4 EXT RESET Input 16 iNTEG BUSY Output 5 No Connection 17 No Connection 6 DA 11ch Output 18 DA 12ch Output 7 DA 9ch Output 19 DA 10ch Output 8 DA 7ch Output 20 DA 8ch O
205. ed range for voltage ranges except 600V or current ranges except 20A The relative harmonic content and harmonic distortion are related to voltage and current Error Display The power factor or phase angle will show PFErr or dEGEr when either the voltage range or power exceeds 200 of the range Computation Over Display Appears in the same way as for normal measurement Dot Display The display will show dots in any of the following cases When there are no more analysis data to be displayed during harmonic analysis Soon after the harmonic analysis function has been turned ON When the PLL synchronization is being re established Until the initial analysis data are obtained after having changed the settings When the analysis order which depends on the fundamental frequency exceeds the upper limit after having set the order at display A e When the display function is set to relative harmonic content 26 and the order at display A is set to 1 When the PLL source is set to voltage and an attempt is made to display the current frequency AHz or when the PLL source is set to current and an attempt is made to display the voltage frequency VHz When an element which is not assigned to the measurement object is selected However since the frequency is not related to the element setting the fundamental frequency designated as the PLL source can be displayed Averaging Function Effect of Aliasing Exponentia
206. ee Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Setting the mode Selecting handshaking method Selecting data format 1 Display C 3 Display A 5 Display B T LOCAL 2 na r ENTER 1 hHndl ENTER 6 Far g ENTER SHIFT INTERFACE 1 he Dor f i tanLH i nnnast rmaur it v v v Pri nt hAnde Far d k ij HAAT ij hHnd3 ij Far bod cn 1 I I 1 i n hHndi Setting terminator Setting baud rate For mode k 11 eap Display C 9 Display C nar or 488g r nn ENTER EFFELE 704 ENTER 6 9600 8 iu fr A b 4800 v v LF b g40 f b eui ij h B h 3 b 5H hb 145 Setting interval F Display C aae 11 rhouryrmin qr sec 14 ENTER IB ILE E 9 ENTER Select this when setting commands according to IEEE 488 2 1987 12 V up down END Note that this menu only appears in case of version 1 11
207. elect in case V Moves to the B column of a negative value and nothing incase of a positive SHIFT gt value 10 v Select from 1 to 3 2 c 7 11 v Moves to the C column EI SHIFT gt 12 v Select from 01 to 50 3 a 21 D E n d gt ENTER 3j End o S xo amp IM 253401 01E 10 11 10 6 Setting the Comparator Limit Values optional Explanation Setting the Comparator Limit Values in case of Normal Measurement You can set the type of the limit and its value for each relay seperately Relay setting Selects the relay ch1 to ch4 for which the type of limit and its value will be set Setting the type of limit corresponding to column A in the procedure The following selections are available When the comparator mode is dual chl amp ch2 and ch3 amp ch4 are pairs and the same type of limit should be set for the channels of one pair V voltage A current P active power VAr reactive power VA apparent power PF power factor VFrq voltage frequency AFrq current frequency Ph total Watt hour Wh Ah total Ampere hour dEG phase angle VP peak value of voltage AP peak value of current MATH computation Ph positive watt hour value Wh Ph negative watt hour value Wh Ah positive ampere hour value Ah negative ampere hour value no data For details concerning the positive value of the ampere hour refer to page 7 3 2 Ava
208. ement Setting the limit value No element setting is available on the WT110 Setting range 0 000 to 9999 Initial setting chi V type 1 element 600 0 value E 0 exponent 600V voltage limit of element 1 for channel 1 ch2 A type 1 element 20 00 value E 0 exponent 20 00A current limit of element 1 for channel 2 ch3 P type 1 element 1 200 value E 3 exponent 1 2kW active power limit of element 1 for channel 3 ch4 PF type 1 element 1 000 value E 0 exponent Power factor 1 limit of element 1 for channel 4 Setting the exponent The following selections are available The initial value is as described above E 3 105 E 0 10 E 3 10 E 6 10 Note When you use limit values based on harmonic analysis data make sure to set the harmonic analysis function to ON page 8 5 before you set the comparator function ON page 10 16 Although the four relays used in case of normal measurement and in case of harmonic analysis are the same the contents of the settings will be kept for both seperately For example even after setting a limit for chl in case of harmonic analysis after previously having set a limit for ch1 in case of normal measurement will result in keeping both values The determination method does not change as a result of minus limit values For example if a limit of 1 is set the relay will not be activated when the input signal value reaches 2
209. ement lead wires from the object while power is being supplied to it otherwise a serious accident may result When the power switch is ON never apply a voltage or current exceeding the level specified in the table below to the voltage input or current input terminal When the power switch is OFF turn off the power of the instrument under measurement as well For details regarding the other terminals such as the external input terminal refer to chapter 15 Specifications Max allowable input Voltage input Current input Instantaneous max The peak value is 2000V The peak value is 150A for 1s or the RMS value is 1500V or the RMS value is 40A whichever is less whichever is less Continuous The peak value is 1500V The peak value is 100A or the RMS value is 1000V or the RMS value is 30A whichever is less whichever is less In case you are using an external potential transformer PT or current transformer CT use one which has a sufficient withstand voltage against the voltage to be measured a withstand voltage of 2E 1000V is recommended where E is the measurement voltage Also be sure not to allow the secondary side of the CT to go open circuit while power is supplied otherwise an extremely dangerous high voltage will be generated on the secondary side of the CT If the instrument is used in a rack provide a power switch so that power to the instrument can be shut off from the front of the rack in an emergency For safety reasons
210. ends at step 3 IM 253401 01E 10 17 10 9 Outputting to an External Plotter Printer Explanation Setting the Output Printing Mode This setting is to select whether you are printing out on a plotter or a printer HPGL For printing on an external HPGL compatible plotter ESCP For printing on an external ESC P compatible printer PCL For printing on an external PCL5 printer language of HP compatible printer This mode is available on WT110 WT130 with version 2 21 or later Setting the Output Contents in case of Normal Measurement All measured computed data will be output Setting the Output Items and the Element in case of Harmonic Analysis Setting the Output Item Column A One of the following items should be set which then will be printed out on an external plotter ptinter The initial value is V V Prints the numerical values of the analysis value and relative harmonic content of the voltage A Prints the numerical values of the analysis value and relative harmonic content of the current P Prints the numerical values of the analysis value and relative harmonic content of the active power dEG Prints the numerical values of the phase angle G V Prints the numerical values and the graph of the analyzed voltage values G A Prints the numerical values and the graph of the analyzed current values G P Prints the numerical values and the graph of the analyzed active p
211. er printer output and comparator output Ch 10 to 12 SETUP For settings such as initializing settings filter average scaling and ext sensor input Ch 4 Indicators for operating functions When a function is set and in operation this indicator will light up IM 253401 01E 2 3 2 3 Displays in case of Overrange Error during Measurement Overrange display Overrange occurs when the measured voltage or current exceeds 140 of the rated measurement range In that case the range will automatically be increased however up to 14096 of the maximum range When this level is exceeded the overrange display wil appear which looks as follows l ol Computation over display When the computed value becomes too high during the computation process the following display will appear Lx 9l Peak over display When the sampled data instantaneous voltage or instantaneous current exceed approx 30096 of the measurement range the V over or A over indicators at the front panel will light up V OVER A OVER Note The V over and A over indicators at the front panel will light up in case of overrange or peak over of any signal which is input to the elements Display in case the measurement value is too small In case either the measured voltage or measured current drops below 0 5 of the measurement range the display will indicate as fol
212. er Service is required Warnings 350 390 Reference Page Code Message Action Reference Page 350 Queue overflow Read out the queue App2 39 390 Overrun error Adjust the baud rate only for RS 232C Note The warning code 350 only appears in case of an overflow of the error queue The error which occurs in case of clearing the STATus ERRor will not appear on the screen App2 44 IM 253401 01E Index Symbols 488 2 mode GPIB nete tiii ri orte 11 1 488 2 mode RS 232 C 12 1 7 seement EED 5 5 teer e mn ete PPP 7 A AJ D CODVertet aser cere reete redeo thes ves cedes aba eS egee Do aeo venere aano 1 1 ACCESS OTIOS aa da A RITE e ern e aa eines 3 activ power display conssir inini Ban iiie afa eee ets 5 1 active power integration eseseseeeeeeeeereeeneneneneene enne 7 1 address setting 11 9 addressable mode eee eee e edades 11 1 adjustment oerte erts ete feeds 14 1 AlIasiDg s esae eee ERE PEERS A A E HUE TREES 8 2 ampere Out rese eerte ie xe e te eere e a eaten e dedu en 7 1 apparant power display e ssesssssesssseeesesesssesesseserssereesrsrsesrsrsesrsese 6 1 ASCGILchracter code minre eree E ak App2 42 attenuation constant 4 11 ato TAN Be cos o ce Recette a K e averaging function averaging function harmonic analysis eee averaging sample number CODD TSAA c dI EYAEA NDS LIU Is UAM Neve tgo A Ateius 8 continous integratio
213. erflow or when an error occurs Display shown oF oL PFErr or dEGEr Bit 10 POV2 Element 2 voltage peak over Set to 1 when the voltage value of element 2 exceeds the peak value Bit 11 POA2 Element 2 current peak over Set to 1 when the current value of element 2 exceeds the peak value Bit 12 OVR3 Element 3 measured data over Set to 1 when the measurement computed data of element 3 overflow or when an error occurs Display shown oF oL PFErr or dEGEr Bit 13 POV3 Element 3 voltage peak over Set to 1 when the voltage value of element 3 exceeds the peak value Bit 14 POA3 Element 1 current peak over Set to 1 when the current value of element 3 exceeds the peak value The transition filter is applied to each bit of the condition register seperately and can be selected from the following Note that the numbering of the bits used in the filter setting differs from the actual bit number 1 to 16 vs 0 to 15 App2 38 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 4 Status Report Manual integration mode Standard integration mode Continuous integration mode Integration Integration Integration Integration Timer preset time Timer preset ITimer preset Timer p 5 time Ptime preset time Reset Start Stop Reset Start Stop Reset Start f iStop i i 1 ITG ITG ITG L When the elapsed integration time reaches the p
214. ers are removed or when using connectors the voltage ratings across the measuring input and the ground become as follows Voltage across A V and A side input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max Voltage across V terminal and ground 600 Vrms max Put the protective cover on the connector when this function is not used IM 253401 01E 12 1 eoeyelu O cEe SY H 12 2 Connecting the Interface Cable When connecting this instrument to a personal computer make sure that the handshaking method data transmission rate and data format selected for the instrument match those selected fro the computer For details refer to the following pages Also make sure that the correct interface cable is used Connector and Signal Names Numbers in the figure represent the Pin Nos Pins 4 through Pins through are not used ara not used TOORO OST SOO OS yrptaess2ss did dd d b pins ous 43 are not used RS 232 C Connector DBSP JB25S or equivalent 1 AA GND Protective Ground Grounded to the case of this instrument 2 BA TXD Transmitted Data Data transmitted to personal computer Signal direction output 3 BB RXD Received Data Data received from personal computer Signal direction input 4 CA RTS Request to Send Signal used to handshake when receiving data from personal computer Signal direction output 5 CB CTS Clear to Send Signal used to han
215. et IM 253401 01E 3 1 uoneJedo eJojeg n 3 2 Installing the Instrument Installation Conditions The instrument must be installed in a place where the following conditions are met Ambient temperature and humidity Ambient temperature 5 to 40 C Ambient humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation Horizontal position The instrument must be installed horizontally A non horizontal or inclining position can impede proper measurement of the instrument Well ventilated location Vent holes are provided on the top and bottom of the instrument To prevent rise in internal temperature do not block these vent holes In case you removed the feet for rack mounting the instrument make sure to keep a space of at least 20mm as not to block the vent holes Never install the instrument in any of the following places n direct sunlight or near heat sources Near noise sources such as high voltage equipment or power lines Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gases is present Where the level of mechanical vibration is high Near magnetic field sources Inan unstable place Note Toensure high measurement accuracy the instrument should only be used under the following conditions Ambient temperature 23 5 C Ambient humidity 30 to 75 RH no condensation When using the instrument in the temperature ranges of 5 to 18 or 28 to 40 C add the temperature coefficient to the accuracy as spec
216. et to 1 when execution of the command is not possible due to an internal problem in the instrument that is not a command error or an execution error Bit 2 QYE Query Error Set to 1 if the output queue is empty or if the data is missing even after a query has been sent Examples No response data data is lost due to an overflow in the output queue Bit 1 RQC Request Control Not used always 0 Bit 0 OPC Operation Complete Set to 1 when the operation designated by the OPC command has been completed Bit Masking To mask a bit in the standard event register so that it does not cause bit 5 ESB of the status byte to change set the corresponding bit in the standard event enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 QYE so that ESB will not be set to 1 even if a query error occurs set bit 2 of the standard event enable register to 0 This can be done using the ESE command To inquire whether each bit of the standard event enable register is 1 or 0 use the ESE For details of the ESE command refer to App 2 3 IM 253401 01E App2 37 Z spueuuulo uoneoiunuluo2 Appendix 2 4 Status Report Operation of the Standard Event Register The standard event register is provided for eight different kinds of event which can occur inside the instrument Bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set to 1 when any of the bits in this register becomes 1 or when t
217. etting Communication Interface RS 232 C 1 Display C LOCAL 2 nor Setting normal mode SHIFT INTERFACE 7 m f A Lan 3 Setting talk only mode V Pr nE Print mode setting setting plotter printer output 4a Setting communication commands according to IEEE 488 2 1987 1 6 IM 253401 01E 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel and Top View Front Panel WT110 253401 WT130 253502 253503 r 7 segment display j 7 segment display function unit element display operation keys gt page 2 3 r function unit display r operation keys page 2 2 s e dsiq pue shay eunje pueuioN Dh handle pus power switch ventilation slot power switch ventilation slot page 3 13 page 3 13 Rear Panel WT110 253401 WT130 253502 253503 r External sensor input terminal A i i p Current input terminal GP IB or RS 232 C connector page 3 9 3 10 page 3 5 to 3 8 chapter 11 12 Current input terminal A Voltage input terminal A 1 r Ext in
218. f this instrument and connect the L terminal of the standard to the terminal of this instrument In case of the WT130 bundle all EXT terminals together and bundle all terminals together 4 Set the output voltage of the standard to 10 000V or 200 00mV and output this voltage 5 Press the ENTER key after the value on display C stabilizes Even in a stabilized condition drifting within 2 digits limit may occur 6 Press the SHIFT key and display C will change to Ein This completes the external input adjustments When you press the RESET key instead of the SHIFT key the carried out adjustments will become invalid Note The displayed value of the external input will become 50 000A by the rated range 14 2 IM 253401 01E 14 1 Adjustments Adjusting the D A Output Preparations 1 Connect the pin No of the output connector corresponding to the channel to be adjusted to the H terminal of the DMM and connect pin No 12 and 24 of the output connector to the L terminal 2 Set the range of the DMM to 20V 3 After dA appears on display C using the or v key press the ENTER key Adjusting After having carried out the above described preparations the displays will show the following Display A will be blinking display A ch 1 display B 5 000 display C 5 0000 1 Select the channel to be adjusted on display A by pressing the or v key and then press the ENTER key The head digit of display C will start
219. for five seconds 2 Connect the voltage output of the AC voltage current standard to the voltage input terminal of this instrument Connect the H terminal of the standard to the V terminal of this instrument and connect the L terminal of the standard to the terminal of this instrument In case of the WT130 bundle all V terminals together and bundle all terminals together 3 Set the output voltage of the standard to 30 00V and output this voltage IM 253401 01E 14 1 E Bunoous e qnoJ pue uoneJqijeo ueunsn py 14 1 Adjustments 4 Press the ENTER key after the value on display C stabilizes Even in a stabilized condition drifting within 2 digits limit may occur 5 Display B will change to 300 0 V 6 Set the output voltage of the standard to 300 0V 7 Press the ENTER key after the value on display C stabilizes Even in a stabilized condition drifting within 2 digits limit may occur 8 Turn the output of the standard OFF This completes the adjustment of the voltage range The current range will be adjusted next If the current range is not to be adjusted press the SHIFT key here Adjusting the Current Range 1 After having completed adjusting the 300V voltage range display B will show 1 000 A 2 Connect the current output of the AC voltage current standard to the current input terminal of this instrument Connect the H terminal of the standard to the A terminal of this instrument and connect the L ter
220. g PT ELEMENT1 100 lt Voltage gt lt Current gt Physical value Example Voltage range CONFigure VOLTage RANge 150V lt Register gt Register value expressed as either binary octal decimal or hexadecimal Example Extended event register value STATus EESE HFE Specified character string mnemonic Can be selected from Example Selecting measurement mode CONFigure MODE RMS VMEan DC Indicates ON OFF Set to ON OFF or value Example Averaging ON CONFigure AVERaging STATe ON Character string data Arbitrary character string Example Timer INTEGrate TIMer 100 00 Character data Boolean Decimal Decimal indicates a value expressed as a decimal number as shown in the table below Decimal values are given in the NR form specified in ANSI X3 42 1975 Symbol Description Example NRI Integer 125 1 1000 lt NR2 gt Fixed point number 125 0 90 001 lt NR3 gt Floating point number lt NRf gt Any of the forms lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt is allowed 125 0E 0 9E 1 1E4 Decimal values which are sent from the controller to this instrument can be sent in any of the forms to lt NR3 gt In this case lt NRf gt appears For response messages which are returned from this instrument to the controller the form lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt to be used is determined by the query The same form is used irrespective of whether the value is large
221. g setting Selecting the Measurement Range Current with Scaling function ON After having set the scaling values select the menu for the current measurement range Select the rated output of the external sensor from this menu refer to the Operating Procedure on the previous page Scaling of the external sensor input will start as soon as you press the ENTER key after selecting Scaling will stop as soon as you select a measurement range other than external sensor input from the menu Setting Example of Scaling Values for External Sensor Input Incase the rated specs of the external sensor are 50A 50mV measurement range is 50mV then 50A 50mV x 50mV 50A scaling value is 50 00 n case the rated specs of the external sensor are 100A 50mV measurement range is 50mV then 100A 50mV x 50mV 100A scaling value is 100 00 Incase the rated specs of the external sensor are 50A 80mV measurement range is 50mV then 50A 80mV x 50mV 31 25A scaling value is 31 25 However since the setting range is 50mV use a setting within the 0 to 50mV range Noe When performing measurements using the external sensor make sure to turn off the scaling function for the external PT CT When this function is ON the scaling value of the CT ratio will interfere The input range for the external sensor can only be of the manual type When you switch from external sensor input to direct auto range input an error will appear First select ma
222. gger E terminator ST terminator interface message GET This command is valid only during sample hold mode Determines whether or not filter is used inquires about the current setting FL m terminator m indicates whether filter is ON or OFF m 0 OFF 1 0N FL lt terminator gt FLI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Filter cannot be switched ON or OFF while integration is in progress error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Determines whether or not output data should be updated inquires about the current setting HD m terminator m indicates the sampling mode m 0 Updates the data at each sampling rate 1 Hold HD terminator HDO Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Determines whether or not to add a head to measured data output via communication inquires about the current setting H m terminator m indicates whether a header is added or not m 0 No header added 1 Header added H terminator HO e Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Determines whether or not to turn ON the harmonic analysis function inquires about the current setting HA m terminator m indicates whether the harmonic analysis function or normal measurement function is set m 0 Normal measurement 1 Harmonic analysis HA ter
223. ght result in unexpected statuses of the output relay IM 253401 01E 10 9 1ndino u jeui9 x3 Busy 10 6 Setting the Comparator Limit Values optional Relevant Keys ps ey ads a az mem OV OVER L LI Ll k A Var Function ELEMENT Displays A over J L L J l M W TME CI C mo maia relevant woe E keys and Aus mv PF 123 x5 Y j Jv indicator V MEAN fi Fr r k A deg Funcrion ELEMENT _ INTEGRATOR e MW START STOP RESET z HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET Cc hour min sec m V Hz 1 2 3 Y c3 REMOTE D L 6 k A hs Function ELEMENT LOCAL EH la J MW ht INTERFACE OUTPUT c3103W c3393W SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS cs3e4w cava PING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Setting the Comparator Limit Values in case of Normal Measurement Selecting the comparator function 1 Display C SETUP 2
224. gle between each voltage of the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order and the fundamental 1st order voltage 23 Phase angle between each current of the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order and the fundamental 1st order current DB lt terminator gt DB1 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the function for display C inquires about the current setting DCm terminator m indicates one of the following functions in case of normal measurement mz1 voltage V 2 current A 3 power W 7 Input voltage frequency V Hz 8 Input current frequency A Hz 9 watt hour Wh 10 ampere hour Ah 12 Peak voltage value Vpk 13 Peak current value Apk 14 Computation result MATH 24 positive watt hour Wh 25 negative watt hour Wh 26 positive ampere hour Ah 27 negative ampere hour Ah Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later in case of harmonic analysis m 1 Rms value of the 1st to 50 or 30 th order of voltage V 2 Rms value of the Ist to 50 or 30 th order of current A 3 Rms value of the Ist to 50 or 30 th order of active power W 7 Input voltage frequency V Hz 8 Input current frequency A Hz DC terminator DC1 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the computation method for harmonic distortion THD inquires about the current setting DFm lt terminator gt m indicates the computation method f
225. han three hierarchical levels can output all their lower level settings INTEGRATE lt PMT gt INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL TIMER 0 0 Example In reply to a query a response can be returned as a program message to this instrument Header Interpretation Rules This instrument interprets the header received according to the following rules Mnemonics are not case sensitive Example FUNCtion can also be written as function or Function The lower case part of a header can be omitted Example FUNCtion can also be written as FUNCT or FUNC If the header ends with a question mark the command is a query It is not possible to omit the question mark Example FUNCtion cannot be abbreviated to anything shorter than FUNC If the x at the end of a mnemonic is omitted it is assumed to be 1 Example If ELEMent lt x gt is written as ELEM this represents ELEMent 1 Any part of a command enclosed by can be omitted CONFigure SCALing STATe ON can be written as SCAL ON However a part enclosed by cannot be omitted if is Example located at the end of an upper level query SCALing and SCALing STATe belong to different upper level query levels Example App2 4 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 2 Program Format 2 2 4 Responses On receiving a query from the controller this instrument returns a response message to
226. he Results of Harmonic Analysis Displaying the Results of Harmonic Analysis Depending on the setting of display function of display B and C the analyzed items will appear on the display as follows In the following explanation a maximum of 50 analysis orders is assumed In case of a maximum less than 50 computation display will be performed up to that order Display B V Shows the analysis value of the voltage corresponding to the order shown on display A A Shows the analysis value of the current corresponding to the order shown on display A WwW Shows the analysis value of the active power corresponding to the order shown on display A PF Shows the power factor of the fundamental 1st order V Shows the harmonic distortion of the voltage followed by the character t Two computation methods are available Refer to page 8 4 for details The display range is 0 00 to 99 99 and 100 0 to 999 9 A Shows the harmonic distortion of the current followed by the character t Two computation methods are available Refer to page 8 4 for details The display range is 0 00 to 99 99 and 100 0 to 999 9 V Shows the relative harmonic content of the voltage corresponding to the order shown on display A The display range is 0 00 to 99 99 and 100 0 to 999 9 A Shows the relative harmonic content of the current corresponding to the order shown on display A The display range is 0 00 to 99 99 and 100 0 to 999 9 W Sho
227. he corresponding bit of the standard event enable register becomes 1 Examples 1 A query error occurs 2 Bit 2 QYE is set to 1 3 Bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set to 1 if bit 2 of the standard event enable register is 1 It is also possible to check what type of event has occurred inside the instrument by reading the contents of the standard event register 2 4 4 Extended Event Register Reading from the Standard Event Register The contents of the standard event register can be read by the ESR command After completion of the read out the register will be cleared Clearing the Standard Event Register The standard event register is cleared in the following three cases When the contents of the standard event register are read using ESR When the CLS command is received When power is turned ON again Reading the extended event register tells you whether changes in the condition register reflecting internal conditions have occurred A transition filter can be applied which allows you to decide which events are reported to the extended event register FlLTerxx 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Condition register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 STATus CONDition 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 POAS3 POV3 OVR3 POA2 POV2 OVR2 POA1 POV1 OVR1 SRB FOV OVRS ITM ITG UPD Transition filter 1 5 y y i y i STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE
228. he fuse holder and move the screwdriver in the direction of the arrow to remove the fuse holder 4 Remove the blown fuse 5 Insert a new fuse into the holder then install the holder in place Note The fuse used in the WT110 can not be replaced by the user because of the fuse inside the case If you believe the fuse is blown please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative listed on the back cover of this manual The ratings of the fuses used inside the case are indicated below Location Max rated voltage Max rated current Type Approved standard Part No Main board 250 V 1A Time lag UL VDE S9564VK IM 253401 01E 14 13 E Bunoous e qnoJ pue uoneJqieo ueunsn py Chapter 15 15 1 Input Specifications Item Input circuit type Voltage V Floatin Current A g input Resistive voltage divider Shunt input Rated inputs range rms 15 30 60 150 300 600V Direct input 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 A External input optional 2 5 5 10 V or 50 100 200 mV Input impedance Input resistance approx 2MQ Input capacitance approx 13 pF Direct input approx 6 MQ approx 0 1 uH External input 2 5 5 10 V approx 100 kQ 50 100 200 mV approx 20 kQ Instantaneous maximum allowable input for 20 ms 1 cycle The peak is 2 8 kV or the RMS value is 2 0 kV whichever is less The peak is 450 A or the RMS value is 300 A whichever is less External input Peak value is 10 times the range or
229. he internal data reaches a value of 10 000 the relay will be activated IM 253401 01E 10 15 1ndino uy jeuie x3 Busy H 10 8 Turning the Comparator Function ON OFF optional Relevant Keys A hour min SAMPLE m V VA 12 3 rx c AUTO AUTO V OVER L k A Var Function ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays CAT OPER Li Le L M W Te E MODE TRIG relevant MODE keys and c Ris PF Pi m V PF 1 2 3 xr j a indicator V MEAN f EL J r1 1 k A deg Function ELEMENT _ z INTEGRATOR EI m am MW START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET hour m n sec at wd E m y Hz 1 2 3 r n I LOCAL SETUP e aw a Kk A h Function ELEMENT I J J INTERFACE OUTPUT MW ht 103W 363W SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS amaw avaa MAING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Selecting the comparator function
230. hod is provided for forcibly clearing all the bits in the status byte Bits which are cleared are shown below When an inquiry is made using the sTB query No bit is cleared When a serial poll is performed Only the RQS bit is cleared When the cLs command is received When the CLS command is received the status byte itself is not cleared but the contents of the standard event register which affects the bits in the status byte are cleared As a result the corresponding bits in the status byte are cleared except bit 4 MAV since the output queue cannot be emptied by the CLS command However the output queue will also be cleared if the CLS command is received just after a program message terminator 2 4 3 Standard Event Register Overview of the Standard Event Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Bit 7 PON Power ON Bit 7 PON Power ON Set to 1 when power is turned ON Bit 6 URQ User Request Not used always 0 Bit 5 CME Command Error Set to 1 when the command syntax is incorrect Examples Incorrectly spelled command name 9 used in octal data Bit 4 EXE Execution Error Set to 1 when the command syntax is correct but the command cannot be executed in the current state Examples Parameters are outside the setting range an attempt is made to make a hard copy during acquisition Bit 3 DDE Device Dependent Error S
231. ibed under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Selecting the filter 1 Display C 3 Display C 5 SETUP 29 T ci L 9 ENTER aa orF T ENTER End nr A E HBHL SCALE Cy lt gt m 3 Ce lt gt EFES E nic Ske LAA LP Explanation Filter Function The instrument will perform measurements after synchronizing to the cycle of the input signal Consequently the frequency of the input signal can be measured properly The filter at a cut off frequency of 300Hz will only be applied to the frequency measurement circuit and will remove noise from distorted and inverted waves etc This allows the frequency to be measured correctly which improves the accuracy of each measurement value The filter will not be applied to the voltage and current circuit The initial value is OFF Note The filter setting cannot be changed while integration is being carried out IM 253401 01E 4 3 suonipuo 1ueujeunsee y Bumes 4 3 Selecting the Measurement Range in case of Direct Input Relevant Keys cosas d M m V VA 12 3 x V OVER LI L k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT A OVER Li Li L L M W TIME MODE g AMS M V PF 1235 OV MEAN Li em J L k A deg FUNCTION ELEMENT A EC ie I S e a mvH i123r
232. ified in chapter 15 Specifications Ifthe ambient humidity of the installation site is 3096 or below use an anti static mat to prevent generation of static electricity nternal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the room temperature changes rapidly In such cases acclimatize the instrument to the new environment for at least one hour before starting operation Installation Position Desktop Place the instrument in a horizontal position or tilted using the stand as shown below WT110 253401 When installing using the handle verify that the handle is in a fixed position While pulling the handle approx 2 to 3mm from the turning axes on both side slowly turn the handle until it slips into the fixed position Fixed positions of the handle We recommend the positions 1 3 5 or 8 When using no 4 don t put any weight on the instrument Turning axis Turn the stands after pulling them approx 2 3 mm on both sides 3 2 IM 253401 01E 3 2 Installing the Instrument Rack mount To install the instrument in a rack use one of the following optional rack mount kits Rack mount kit option Specifications Kit Specifications Kit WT110 EIA standard 751533 E2 WT130 EIA standard 751533 E3 WT110 JIS standard 751533 J2 WT130 JIS standard 751533 J3 WT110 EIA standard 75
233. ilable on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later Setting the element corresponds to column B in the operating procedure WT110 253401 no such element setting available WT130 253502 element can be selected from 1 3 or 4 WT130 253503 element can be selected from 1 2 3 or 4 The element number 4 represents gt Setting the limit value No element setting is available on the WT110 Setting range 0 000 to 9999 Initial setting chi V type 1 element 600 0 value E 0 exponent 600V voltage limit of element 1 for channel 1 ch2 A type 1 element 20 00 value E 0 exponent 20 00A current limit of element 1 for channel 2 ch3 P type 1 element 1 200 value E 3 exponent 1 2kW active power limit of element 1 for channel 3 ch4 PF type 1 element 1 000 value E 0 exponent Power factor 1 limit of element 1 for channel 4 Setting the exponent The following selections are available The initial value is as described above E 3 10 E 0 10 E 3 105 E 6 109 Setting the Comparator Limit Values in case of Harmonic Analysis You can set the type of the limit and its value for each relay seperately Relay setting Selects the relay ch1 to ch4 for which the type of limit and its value will be set Setting the type of limit corresponding to column A in the procedure The following selections are available When the comparator mode is dual chl amp ch2 and ch3 amp
234. ile recalling is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets attenuation constant inquires about the current setting The constant set is used as the attenuation constant for exponential averaging or as the number of data for moving averaging ACm terminator m indicates attenuation constant m 1 8 2 16 3 32 4 64 5 128 8 256 AC terminator ACI e Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Determines whether or not averaging should be performed inquires about the current setting AGm terminator m indicates if averaging is ON or OFF m 0 OFF 1 0N AG lt terminator gt AGI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Averaging cannot be set to ON while integration is in progress Error 13 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets averaging type exponential or moving inquires about the current setting ATm terminator m indicates averaging type m 0 Exponential averaging 1 Moving averaging AT terminator ATI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur AV AV Syntax Query Example Description CM CM Syntax Query Example Description DA DA Syntax Query Example Description DB DB
235. ines varies depending on the options used When the harmonic analysis option is used the following line must be installed before the used command group PS1 HA0 OR1 HE1 DFO terminator When the D A output option is used the following line must be inserted before the used command group RTO 1 terminator When the comparator option is used the following line must be inserted before the used command group YOO YML DYO YCI terminator When a CMO is issued if the shunt current values or scaling values set for each element Description differ from each other the value set for element 1 will be output Sets the relay output items in case of normal measurement inquires about the current setting Up to four items can be set OY m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 terminator m1 indicates the output relay channel 1 lt ml lt 4 m2 indicates the output item number m2 0 no output 1 Voltage V 2 Current A 3 Power W 4 Reactive power var 5 Apparent power VA 6 Power factor PF 7 Input voltage frequency V Hz 8 Input current frequency A Hz 9 Watt hour Wh 10 Ampere hour Ah 11 Phase angle deg 12 Peak voltage value Vpk 13 Peak current value Apk 14 Computation result MATH 24 Positive watt hour Wh 25 Negative watt hour Wh 26 Positive ampere hour Ah 27 Negative ampere hour Ah Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later m3 indicates element m 1 Eleme
236. ing e DA4 4 channels DA12 12 channels CMP 4 channels Setting the output function corresponds to column A in the procedure The output function can be set to any of the following V voltage A current P active power VAr reactive power VA apparent power PF power factor VFrq voltage frequency AFrq current frequency Ph total Watt hour Wh Ah total Ampere hour dEG phase angle VP peak value of voltage AP peak value of current MATH computation Ph positive watt hour value Wh Ph negative watt hour value Wh Ah positive ampere hour value Ah negative ampere hour value D A output OV no further elements can be set For details concerning the positive value of the ampere hour refer to page 7 3 2 Available on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later Setting the element corresponds to colum B in the operating procedure WT110 253401 no such element setting available WT130 253502 element can be selected from 1 3 or 4 WT130 253503 element can be selected from 1 2 3 or 4 The element number 4 represents gt Note D A output of each display function can be done when the rated range of voltage current and power is 5 0V FS This is also true when scaling function is being used When the scaling value is different for each element and the element is set to D A output can be done when the rated range is set to 5 0V FS for each element
237. ion Peak Measurement Function Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later This function measures the peak value of the voltage and current Crest factor peak value RMS value can also be computed and displayed Integrator Functions This function enables integration of active power and current All measurement values and computed values can be displayed even when integration is in progress except for the integrated values watt hour and ampere hour and elapsed integration time Since also integrated values of negative polarity can be displayed the consumed watt hour ampere hour value of the positive side and the watt hour value returning to the power supply of the negative side can be displayed seperately Frequency Measurement Function This function enables measurement of the frequency of input voltage and current Measuring range is from 10Hz to 50kHz however depending on the internal timing of the instrument measurement might be carried out in the range from 4Hz to 10Hz also Harmonic Analysis Function option This function enables computation of voltage current active power and so forth of up to the 50th order the relative harmonic content of harmonic orders and the phase angle of each order compared to the fundamental first order This is for one selected input element Furthermore the total rms value fundamental harmonic of the voltage current and active power and the harmonic distortion factor
238. ion Complying Standard EN55011 Group1 Class A This is a Class A product for industrial environment In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which cause the user may be required to take adequate measures Cable Condition Measuring Input WT100 To bundle the wires between source and load with Ferrite Core A1179MN WT130 To bundle the wires between source and load for each phase and to separate the input signal wires by less than 50 mm between each phase and neutral line External Senser Input installed EX1 or EX2 option 500 mm max External Input Output Signals installed DA4 DA12 CMP option To use shielded wires Immunity Complying Standard EN50082 2 1995 Susceptibility Under Immunity Condition Measuring Input 5 of range max DA Output 40 96 of range max Testing Condition Voltage range 150 V Input 100 V 50 Hz Current range 1 A Input 1 A 50 Hz Safety standard Complying Standard EN61010 Overvoltage Category II Pollution degree 2 Applies to products manufactured after Jan 1997 having the CE Mark For all other products please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Items to be analyzed V1 V2 V3 A1 A2 A3 W1 W2 W3 deg1 deg2 deg3 Each harmonic components Total Vrms Total Arms Total effective power PF of the fundamental Phase angle of fundamental For each harmonic phase angle related to the fundamental T
239. ion Queries all the settings related to measurement computation data Syntax EASure Example Example of WT130 three phase four wire model ROM version 2 01 EASURE MEASURE NORMAL ITEM V ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 MEASURE ORMAL ITEM A ELEMENT1 1 ELEMENT2 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA MEASURE NORMAL ITEM W ELEMENT1 1 ELE 1 ELEMENT3 1 SIGMA 1 EASURE NORMAL ELEMENT3 0 SIG ENT2 ITEM VA ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 A 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VAR ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 EASURE NORMAL ITEM PF ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE ORMAL ITEM DEGREE ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 A E I E E ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM VHZ ELEMENT1 0 ELE T2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 EASURE NORMAL ITEM AHZ ELEMENTI 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELE T3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE ORMAL ITEM WH ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM WHP ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 EASURE NORMAL ITEM WHM ELEMENTI 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE ORMAL ITEM AH ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM AHP E I E ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 FASURE NORMAL ITEM AHM ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELE T3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE ORMAL ITEM VPK ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 MEASURE NORMAL ITEM APK ELEMENT1 0 ELEMENT2 0 ELEMENT3 0 SIGMA 0 EASURE NORMAL ITEM TIME 0 MATH 0 MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM SYN
240. ious message which was sent did not contain any queries If the previous message contained a query it is not possible to send another program message until a response message has been received An error will occur if a program message is sent before a response message has been received in its entirety A response message which has not been received will be discarded If an attempt is made by the controller to receive a response message even if there it no response message an error will occur An error will also occur if the controller makes an attempt to receive a response message before transmission of a program message has been completed If a program message of more than one unit is sent and some of the units are incomplete this instrument receives program message units which the instrument thinks complete and attempts to execute them However these attempts may not always be successful and a response may not always be returned even if the program message contains queries Dead Lock This instrument has a buffer memory in which both program and response messages of 1024 bytes or more can be stored The number of bytes available will vary depending on the operating state of the instrument If both buffer memories become full at the same time this instrument becomes inoperative This state is called dead lock In this case operation can be resumed by discarding the response message No dead lock will occur if the size of the
241. isters other than Resets initializes the present settings RST RST Refer to 13 2 for initial settings Sets the value of the service request enable register or queries the current setting SRE lt NRf gt SRE lt NR f gt 0 to 255 SRE 239 SRE 239 Each bit is expressed as a decimal number For example if SRE 239 is set the service request enable register will be set to 11101111 This means that bit 4 of the service request enable register is disabled so that bit 5 ESBO of the status byte register will not be set to 1 even if the output queue is not empty However bit 6 MSS of the status byte register is the MSS bit so it will be ignored Default is SRE 255 i e all bits are enabled The service request enable register will not be cleared even if a query is made using SRE For details of the service request enable register refer to page App2 36 Queries the value of the status byte register STB STB 4 Each bit is expressed as a decimal number Bit 6 is RQS and not MSS because the register is read without serial polling For example if STB 4 is returned the status byte register is set to 00000100 i e the error queue is not empty an error has occurred The status byte register will not be cleared even if a query is made using STB For details of the status byte register refer to page App2 36 TRG Function Sy
242. it and the clamp sensor and verify that no hazard exists Do not touch the current terminal of the input element and not connect any measurement lead When power is applied to the measurement circuit a voltage will be generated at the current terminal which constitutes a hazard The connector to the input terminal for the external sensor should not have bare wires protruding make sure to make connections to this terminal according to safety measures since voltages will be present at the bare wires which constitutes a hazard uoneJedo eJojeg Aload current flow in the thick lines shown in the diagrams therefore a CAUTION wire with sufficient current capacity must be used for these lines Note The external sensor must be selected carefully and its frequency and phase characteristics taken into account The external sensor must be wired so that the area between the wires connected to both ends of the sensor is minimized in order to reduce the effect of the magnetic field generated by the current to be measured Measurement is affected by field lines entering this area Minimizing this area also reduces the effects of external noise Connect the external shunt as in the figures below To avoid the effects of common mode voltage the external shunt must be connected using AWGIS wires cross sectional area of 1mm Since measurement accuracy decreases as an effect of an increase of wiring resistance and floating capacity
243. l and X on is sent when received data buffer becomes 1 4 full CD DTR is CA RTS is No set to False set to False handshake when when received data received data buffer buffer becomes 3 4 becomes 3 4 full and is set full and is set to True when to True when received data received data buffer buffer becomes 1 4 becomes 1 4 full full llo o joJjmi o Precautions Regarding Data Receiving Control When handshaking is used to control received data data may still be sent from the computer even if the free space in the receive buffer drops below 16 bytes In this case after the receive buffer becomes full the excess data will be lost whether handshaking is in use or not Data storage to the buffer will start again when there is free space in the buffer 64 bytes L J Used Free 16 bytes EN Used Free 48 bytes NNNM Used When handshaking is in use reception of data will stop when the free space in the buffer drops to 16 bytes since data cannot be passed to the main program fast enough to keep up with the transmission After reception of data stops data continues to be passed to the internal program Reception of data starts again when the free space in the buffer inceases to 48 bytes Whether handshaking is in use or not if the buffer becomes full any additional data received is no longer stored and is lost
244. l averaging is performed with an attenuation constant of 8 Output to an External Plotter Using the GP IB or RS 232 C interface harmonic analysis data can be printed as value or graph on an external plotter This instrument is not equipped with an internal aliasing filter Due to aliasing accidental errors may occur under the following circumstances Fundamental frequency f in Hz 40 lt f lt 70 errors may occur in case of harmonic components of the 256th or higher 70 lt f lt 130 errors may occur in case of harmonic components of the 128th or higher 130 lt f lt 250 errors may occur in case of harmonic components of the 64th or higher 250xf 440 errors may occur in case of harmonic components of the 32nd or higher 8 2 IM 253401 01E 8 2 Setting the Element PLL Source and Harmonic Distortion Method Relevant Keys chui Dez m m V VA 12 35 c AUTO AUTO co V OVER Li ri em k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT lv RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays A OVER J J l J M W TME MODE TRIG relevant MODE keys and c nus m V PF 1234 MP ANM ENTER indicator V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ 7 o o NIEGRATOR cee W
245. later 5 2 utes e EO AERE VER INIT ONT WHA AIA QUE o E GASS 4 12 4 8 Computing the Crest Factor Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later 4 15 4 9 Computing the Efficiency Applies to WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later 4 16 Chapter 5 Measuring Displaying Voltage Current Active Power Frequency Four Arithmetic Operation Value Crest Factor and Peak Value 5 1 Measuring Displaying Voltage Current and Active Power eese 5 1 5 2 Measuring Displaying Frequency essere eene KEE EEEE nenne nen 5 3 5 3 Measuring Displaying Four Arithmetic Operation Value Crest Factor and Peak Value 5 4 IM 253401 01E Contents Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 PP PP gt Computing Displaying Apparent Power Reactive Power Power Factor and the Phase Angle 6 1 Computing Displaying Apparent Power Reactive Power and Power Factor 6 1 6 2 Computing Displaying the Phase Angle eee 6 2 Integration Tel Integrator Functions iR Ie ee a ee deese toe oi perra et Uae 7 1 7 2 Setting Integration Mode and Integration Timer eere 7 4 7 3 Displaying Integrated Values eerte nee nete ere reiten 7 5 7 4 Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function eese 7 1 Using the Harmonic Analysis Function optional 8 1 Harmonic Analysis Function
246. lections are available V voltage will be displayed A current will be displayed W power will be displayed Selecting the Input Element The type of input element which can be selected depends on the model number Make your selection after having verified your model number 1 2 3 Displays the measurement values of element 1 2 3 9 Displays according to the wiring method and is as follows Wiring method XV YA EW IVA var 13W Anus Aufe Wi Ws ViAi V3A3 vari vars 3 3W MV AnsAs waws JP viuAueAs varvar 304W Vi V2 Vs A A2 s Wi W2 W3 V1A1 V2A2 V3A3 var var2 vars 3V3A Vi V2 V5 A A2 s Wi Ws 13 Viai VoAe VaAs vari vars Wiring method PF Xdeg 13W 393W IW cos PF 304W XVA 3V3A 5 2 IM 253401 01E 5 2 Measuring Displaying Frequency A hour min SAMPLE m V VA 1 2 3 E aumo c avro c3 V OVER k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays um W te MODE TRIG relevant k keys and Aus mv PF 123rx v jJ indicator V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ a INTEGRATOR EI W START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET cS hour min sec c3 REMOTE a mv Hz 12305 LOCAL SETUP k A h Function ELEMENT INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT MW ht 103W 363W SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS aseaw avaa MAING Shows the o
247. less Instantaneous maximum allowable input for 1 s The peak is 2 0 kV or the RMS value is 1 5 kV whichever is less The peak is 150 A or the RMS value is 40 A whichever is less External input Peak value is 10 times the range or less Continuous maximum allowable input The peak is 1 5 kV or the RMS value is 1 0 kV whichever is less The peak is 100 A or the RMS value is 30 A whichever is less External input Peak value is 5 times the range or less Continuous maximum common mode voltage at 50 60 Hz 600 Vrms when the protective cover for the output connector is used CAT II 400 Vrms when the protective cover for the output connector is removed CAT II Common mode rejection ratio at 600 Vrms between input terminals and case 50 60 Hz better than 80 dB 0 01 of range maximum Voltage input terminals short Current input terminals open Reference value 50 kHz max maximum range rating range rating x 0 001 x f of range or less 0 01 or more the unit f kHz Input terminals Binding posts Direct input Large binding posts External input Safety terminals A D conversion Simultaneous sampling of voltage and current inputs Resolution 12 bits Maximum conversion rate approx 22us approx 45 kHz Range switching Range can be selected manually automatically or by communication control Automatic range switching Range up When the measured value exceeds 110
248. lid keys for remote control Pressing the LOCAL key in remote control will switch the instrument to local control However this is not possible in case the Local Lockout has been set by the controller 11 2 IM 253401 01E 11 3 Status Byte Format before the IEEE 488 2 1987 Standard DIO 8 DIO 7 DIO6 DIO5 DIO 4 DIO 3 DIO 2 DIO 1 Integration SRQ ERROR STORE OVER Syntax ntegration Computation BUSY RECALL ERROR END END BUSY Integration Busy DIO 8 This bit is set to 1 when integration is in progress This bit cannot be disabled by the IM command since it is a status bit Even if this bit is set to 1 SRQ will not be affected SRQ DIO 7 This bit is set to 1 when computation End DIO 1 integration End DIO 2 OVER DIO 4 or Syntax error DIO 3 occurs When RQS is set to 1 SRQ is set to True issuing a service request to the controller This bit is reset to 0 when a response is sent to the serial poll To prevent the SRQ and status byte being affected by computation End integration End Over or Syntax error this bit must be disabled by the IM command After an IM15 SRQ is affected by a computation End integration End Over or Syntax error After an IMI SRQ is affected only by a computation End In case of IM4 SRQ is affected only by a Syntax error ERROR DIO 6 When a Syntax error or Over occurs this bit is set to 1
249. ling values for the external sensor for each element App 2 15 CONFigure CURRent RANGe Sets queries the current range App 2 15 CONFigure FILTer Sets queries the filter ON OFF App 2 15 CONFigure MODE Sets queries the measurement mode App 2 15 CONFigure SCALing Queries all settings related to the scaling function App 2 16 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor Queries all settings related to scaling value for voltagelcurrentlpower App 2 16 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ALL Sets the scaling values for all elements of voltagelcurrentlpower App 2 16 CONFigure SCALing PT CT SFACtor ELEMent x Sets the scaling values for each element of voltagelcurrentlpower App 2 16 CONFigure SCALing STATe Sets queries the scaling function ON OFF App 2 16 CONFigure VOLTage Queries all settings related to the voltage range App 2 16 CONFigure VOLTage AUTO Sets queries the voltage auto range ON OFF App 2 16 CONFigure VOLTage RANGe Sets queries the voltage range App 2 16 CONFigure WIRing Sets queries the wiring method App 2 16 DISPlay Group DISPlay lt x gt Queries all the display settings App 2 17 DISPlay lt x gt ELEMent Sets queries the element to be displayed App 2 17 DISPlay lt x gt FUNCtion Sets queries the function to be displayed App 2 17 DISPlay lt x gt MODE Sets queries the contents of the display App 2 17 HARMonics Group HARMonics Queries all settings related to harmonic analysis App
250. llows Less than 1 000 Three digits after the floating point are valid 1 000 to 1000 The first five digits are valid CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ELEMent lt x gt Function Sets the scaling values for the external sensor for each element separately queries the current setting Syntax CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ELEMent x NRf CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ELEMent x lt x gt 1 WT110 single model 1 3 WT130 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT130 three phase four wire model lt NR gt 0 001 to 1000 CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING ELEMENT1 50 00 CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING ELEMENT1 CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING ELEMENT1 50 00E 00 Description Setting values differ as described at CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ALL Example CONFigure CURRent RANGe Function Sets the current range external sensor input range queries the current setting Syntax CONFigure CURRent RANGe lt current gt EXTernal voltage CONFigure CURRent RANGe lt current gt 500mA to 20A 0 5 1 2 5 10 20A lt voltage gt 50mV to 200mV 50 100 200mV for EX2 option 2 5V to 10V EX1 option Setting of current range query CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE 20A CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE gt CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE 20 0E 00 Setting of external sensor input range query in case of EX2 option CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE EXTERNAL 50MV CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE gt CONFIGURE
251. low measurement range ErrLo is displayed 57 Frequency was above the measurement range ErrHi is displayed 58 Computation overflow occurred oF is displayed 59 When harmonic analysis is carried out FrqEr is displayed Sets communication output information types inquires about the current settings Up to 14 measured data can be selected and output OF m1 m2 m3 lt terminator gt m1 indicates communication output channel and must be set within the following range l lt ml lt 14 m2 indicates output type no m2 0 No output 1 Voltage V 2 Current A 3 Power W 4 Reactive power var 5 Apparent power VA 6 Power factor PF 7 Input voltage frequency V Hz 8 Input current frequency A Hz 9 Watt hour Wh 10 Ampere hour Ah 11 Phase angle deg 12 Peak voltage value Vpk 13 Peak current value Apk 14 Computation result MATH 15 Integration time 24 Positive watt hour Wh 25 Negative watt hour Wh 26 Positive ampere hour Ah 27 Negative ampere hour Ah Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later m3 indicates element and must be set within the following range 1 lt m3 lt 4 OF 1 terminator OF1 3 2 Parameter error 12 will occur if m1 m2 or m3 is set to an illegal value No output computation range and integration time have no relation to the element but when using them with the OF com
252. lows This is only in case the measurement mode is RMS or V MEAN Function Display V voltage A current displays zero var reactive power PF power factor BPFErr deg phase angle dELEr Interruption during measurement If the measurement range or function element is changed and the contents of the display changes the display will indicate as follows 2 4 IM 253401 01E 3 1 Usage Precautions Safety Precautions Before using the instrument for the first time make sure you have read the safety precautions on page 4 and 5 Do not remove the case from the instrument Some areas in the instrument use high voltages which are extremely dangerous When the instrument needs internal inspection or adjustment contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord Also turn OFF the power to all the objects being measured that are connected to the input terminals If such an irregularity occurs contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual Do not place anything on the power cord and keep it away from any heat generating articles When unplugging the power cord from the power outlet always hold the plug and pull it never pull the cord itself If the power cord becomes damaged
253. ls are then sent via photo isolator to a 16 bits high speed DSP Digital Signal Processor or CPU where computation of the measured value is carried out Frequency Measuring Range Measurement of DC voltage current and power as well as AC voltage and current in the frequency range 10Hz to 50kHz Filter This instrument carries out various measurements after synchronizing the frequency of the input signals Therefore correct measurements are necessary Thus a filter is being applied to the frequency measurement circuit to eliminate noise of waveforms such as inverted and distortion waveforms Wiring Method The input units for voltage or current measurement are located on the rear panel of this instrument These units are called input elements The number of input elements depends on the model and the possible wiring methods are as follows The wiring method demonstrates the circuit configuration to measure voltage current and power and this circuit configuration varies by phase and number of electrical wires model number of elements wiring method 253401 1 single phase two wire 12W 253502 2 single phase two wire 1 2W single phase three wire 13W three phase three wire 8 3W 253503 3 single phase two wire 1 2W single phase three wire 13W three phase three wire 8 3W three phase four wire 3 4W three voltage three current 3V3A Display Functions This function enables display of m
254. lysis Relative Harmonic Function and element Order Value Content PLL source THHHHHHE Harmonic Voltage List Frequency of PLL source Rms value et 1st tooth Model M 253503 HRM Or Volt V Cont Or Volt V Cont ange 60 1 49 62 2 003 006 order of voltage A Range 1A l 3 550 11 09 4 00 0 02 Rms value of 1st to 50th N Function ved 5 1 99 4 01 6 002 0 03 order of current Syne v en oa H 7 1 01 2 03 8 0 01 0 01 req z 9 0 62 1 24 10 0 00 0 01 Rms value of 1st to 50th V1 rms 49 98 V 1 04 0 82 12 0 00 0 01 order of active power A1 rms 0 002 A 13 0 30 0 60 14 0 00 0 00 Wi 0 02 WW 15 0 22 0 45 16 0 00 0 01 Phase angle between the pEG1 LEAD 50 1 deg 17 0 17 0 35 18 0 00 0 01 fundamental current and PF1 0 641 19 014 0 28 20 0 00 0 00 V1 THD IEC 12 01 fundamental voltage A 21 0 12 0 23 22 0 00 0 01 Power factor of the 1 THD IEC 95 58 23 0 09 0 19 24 0 00 0 01 fundamental ist oide PS M OEE 25 0 08 0 16 26 000 001 cating 27 0 07 0 14 28 0 01 0 01 Harmonic distortion of 29 0 06 0 11 30 0 00 0 01 h vol 31 0 05 0 10 32 0 00 0 01 me E EXT Em 33 004 0 08 34 000 001 armonic distortion o 35 0 05 0 09 36 0 00 0 01 the current 37 0 03 0 07 38 0 00 0 00 39 0 03 0 06 40 0 01 0 01 Averaging 41 0 03 0 06 42 0 00 0 01 43 0 03 0 05 44 0 00 0 01 Scaling 45
255. mand set m3 1 Initializes communication output information type inquires about the current settings Two sets of default setting are available one is for normal measurement and the other is for integration OFD m terminator m indicates default no m 2 Select mode valid only for the inquiry command 0 Default for normal measurement 1 Default for integration OFD terminator OFDI e Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Spueuuulo uoieorunuuulo2 IM 253401 01E App1 5 Appendix 1 1 Commands OH OH Syntax Select mode OFD2 is validated when the OF command is executed if m is set to 0 default for normal measurement or 1 default for integration If you select default for normal measurement the output of channel 13 is the information on the frequency target function that is currently measured and the output of channel 14 is the information displayed on display C If you change either the frequency measurement target or display information of display C the output also changes Sets communication output information types in case of harmonic analysis inquires about the current settings OH m1 m2 terminator m1 indicates output type no in case of print mode m1 1 V outputs voltage analysis value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value 2 A outputs current analysis value and relative harmonic content as a
256. measurement errors may occur IM 253401 01E 3 15 uoneJedo eJojeg n 3 10 Improving the Measurement Accuracy Recommended Wiring Method The instrument is designed so that voltage input impedance is high and current input impedance is low to reduce the effect of power loss on measurement accuracy Voltage input impedance Approx 2MQ all ranges with a capacitance of appox 15pF connected in parallel Current input impedance Approx 6mQ 0 1uH all ranges From the explanation given below it can be understood that the effect of power loss on measurement accuracy can be reduced by wiring according to the load resistance SOURCE SOURCE Es Input terminal ELEMENT m This instrument In the above diagram the voltage measurement circuit is connected to the load side The effects of power loss on measurement accuracy are explained below For simplification it is assumed that a DC power source and resistive load are used The current measurement circuit measures the sum of the current iL that flows to the load object being measured and the current iV that flows to the voltage measurement circuit This means that the current iV is erroneous since the current to be measured is iL Since the input impedance of the voltage measurement circuit is high appox 2MQ and even if the input voltage is 600V iV becomes approx 0 3mA 2600V 2MX If the instrumental error is assumed to be lower
257. mes 250ms in case of normal measurement For the storage interval in case of harmonic analysis refer to page 9 2 STORe PANel Function Saves the set up parameters to a file Syntax STORe PANel lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 4 file number Example STORE PANEL 1 STORe STATe Function Sets store ON OFF queries the current setting Syntax STORe STATe lt Boolean gt STORe STATe Example STORE STATE ON STORE STATE STORE STATE 1 App2 32 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 15 Common Command Group The commands in the common command group are independent of the instrument s functions and are specified in IEEE 488 2 1987 There is no front panel key that corresponds to this group p C ESE Puy Space L NRf My Te 66 PSC Space L NRf RST 4 CLS Function Syntax Example Description ESE Function Syntax Example Description NMC SRE ap Space ____ lt NRf gt res 38 5 3405 I C 88 0 Clears the standard event register extended event register and error queue CLS CLS The output will also be cleared if a CLS command is appended after the program message terminator For details on the registers and queues refer to appendix 2 4 Sets
258. minal of the standard to the terminal of this instrument In case of the WT130 connect the current terminal of each input element horizontally That is connect the H terminal of the standard to the A terminal of element 1 the terminal to the A terminal of element 2 the to the A terminal of element 3 followed by connecting the terminal to the L terminal of the standard 3 Set the output of the standard to 1 000A and output this current 4 Press the ENTER key after the value on display C stabilizes Even in a stabilized condition drifting within 1 digit limit may occur 5 Display B will change to 10 00 A 6 Set the output of the standard to 10 000A 7 Press the ENTER key after the value on display C stabilizes Even in a stabilized condition drifting within 1 digit limit may occur 8 Turn the output of the standard OFF 9 Press the SHIFT key and display C will change to rAnGE This completes the range adjustments When you press the RESET key instead of the SHIFT key the carried out adjustments will become invalid In case the External Input Option is installed EX1 or EX2 1 Select Ein in step 2 of Preparing this instrument see previous page and press the ENTER key 2 Display B will change to 10 00 V or 200 0 mV 3 Connect the voltage output of the AC voltage current standard to the voltage input terminal of this instrument Connect the H terminal of the standard to the EXT terminal o
259. minator HAI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value When integration is in progress or being aborted harmonic analysis cannot be performed error 13 will occur HE HE Syntax Query Example Description IC IC Syntax Query Example Description IM IM Syntax Query Example Description IP Syntax Description IR Syntax Description Integration cannot be started when the harmonic analysis function is in progress error 16 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Determines the element of the harmonic analysis function inquires about the current setting HE m terminator m indicates the element of the harmonic analysis function m 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for model 253503 only 3 Element 3 for WT130 only HE lt terminator gt HEI e Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets the integration mode inquires about the current setting IC m terminator m indicates one of the following integration modes m 0 Normal integration mode 1 Continuous integration mode IC terminator ICI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Changing the integration mode is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur If contin
260. n Queries the contents of the extended event register and clears it Syntax STATus EESR Example STATUS EESR 1 Description Refer to App 2 4 for details on the extended event register IM 253401 01E App2 31 Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 14 STORe Group The commands in the STORe group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about storing data This allows you to make the same settings as when using the lower menus of MEMORY StorE or MEMORY PnLSt C STORe O STATe lt Space gt OFF gt lt NRf gt lt Character string gt lt NRf gt O lt NRf gt C NTervai Spaces E lt NRf gt O C PANel_ Space _ lt NRi gt STORe Function Queries all settings related to storing data Syntax STORe Example STORE gt STORE STATE 0 INTERVAL 0 0 0 STORe INTerval Function Sets the interval for storage queries the current setting Syntax STORe INTerval lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR gt lt String gt STORe INTerval lt NR gt lt NR gt lt NRf gt 0 0 0 to 99 59 59 lt String gt HH MM SS HH hour MM min SS sec Example STORE INTERVAL 0 0 0 STORE INTERVAL 00 00 00 STORE INTERVAL STORE INTERVAL 0 0 0 Description If the storage interval is set to 0 0 0 the storage interval beco
261. n elapsed time 2 A current 9 Wh watt hour 24 Wh positive watt hour 3 W power 10 Ah ampere hour 25 Wh negative watt hour 4 var reactive power 11 DEG phase angle 26 Ah positive ampere hour 5 VA apparent power 12 Peak voltage value Vpk 27 Ah negative ampere hour 6 PF power factor 13 Peak current value Apk 7 HzV voltage frequency 14 Computation result MATH Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later Note 5 LL If 15 is set to h3 and h4 while DB is set to hl and h2 DB4_ is output to h1 through h4 This is done to conform to 2533E format h5 to h6 Output channel EA chl EB ch2 EC ch3 h7 Element 1 element 1 2 element 2 3 element 3 4 Y _ no element h8 Data state N normal I overrange no data O computation overflow h9 to h11 Unit V__ V VA_ VA DEG DEG HM integration elapsed time A__ A HZ_ Hz Vpk Vpk W W Wh Wh Apk Apk VAR var Ah Ah Efficiency EFF or computation result 1 CV1 CV2 CV3 CA1 CA2 CA3 A B A B A B A B A 2 meaning A B A2 meaning A JB 2 Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later h12 fixed to Output Section d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d12 d1 Polarity _ space or minus d2 to d9 Mantissa floating decimal of max 7 digits d10 to d12 Exponent E 3 gt m E 0 E 3 gt k E 6 gt M
262. n mode sse 7 2 continuous maximum allowable input eene 5 2 viole 10 2 corrective action 1 1 1 3 4 15 5 4 4 7 Current display ssl ee eee teet ete e eie edes 5 1 current frequency display essere 5 3 current integration ecce iere reto ete Yero eene tego 7 1 current integration method eerte 7 2 Current FansfOFIDne Ez serere RS Ie ER 4 7 D D A output 10 4 D A output function 5 2 5 renis ose te ro nere is 1 3 D A output voltage ee tiefe mee tere reete etes 10 6 data format RS 232 C iiiesisssitie tei eseit ted eiek eee 12 6 ipo M 4 1 DGL device cle ar sete e rode sabe tactabsrsvaneecses 11 2 dead lock ose eR BUD App2 3 digital character ie ec rn eR eS ee PER E Ri 1 5 digital numbers essere nente nnne nennen 1 5 digital printer cce re eere eren e R RE HIIS ERIS 3 GIS Play sc ai edet NER RECS MR CER ETE da display function E effect of aliasing back up of set up parameters sss 13 1 MIRIG NEM uad E ME Th error display harmonics analysis eee 8 2 mock daa um a fU message eommunieation M BNF notation Backus Naur Form sss Ae eee DD hindi App2 6 Sample ot an petals pr ORE dubbi brainer tet taciti 7 exponential averaging sese eene 4 11 C e
263. nction Wiring method only WT130 O O O Measurement mode O x x Filter O x x Measurement range O x x Scaling O O O Averaging O x x Display function O O O Input element only WT130 O O O Hold O O O Trigger O O O Integration mode O Settings cannot be changed but can be displayed Integration timer O Settings cannot be changed but can be displayed Integration start O X O Integration stop x O x Integration reset O X O Harmonic analysis function option O x x Store recall O XStore possible XStore possible O Settings can be changed X Settings cannot be changed Attempts will result in an error code When integration is started during auto range the measurement range will change to manual range Integration Computation when the Measured Value Exceeds Measurement Limits When the active power measurement current instantaneous voltage or current exceeds the measurement range the integration computation will be handled as follows When the active power or measurement current exceeds the measurement range by 163 84 their integrated values become 163 84 of the measurement range When the instantaneous voltage or current exceeds the measurement range by 300 their integrated values become 300 of the measurement range 7 8 IM 253401 01E 8 1 Harmonic Analysis Function This chapter explains the harmonics analysis function which can be applied to normal measurements of voltage current and power Analyz
264. ned ON Setting the Harmonics Order 1 Light up the display function indicator of display A Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION A Light up display function A gt W 2 Set the harmonics order Display A or Hi edk Displaying the Values of Harmonic Analysis Displays each analysis value after having set the display function of either display B or C Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION B eee V FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION at Vdeg _ W lt A FUNCTION V 5 FUNCTION FUNCTION Adeg A Display C FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION PIENO E us ERU ENG ee Setting the Order of Harmonics The maximum order for which analysis results can be displayed varies depending on the Explanation frequency of the fundamental Example When the fundamental frequency is 50Hz up to 50 orders can be displayed When the fundamental frequency is 400Hz up to 30 orders can be displayed When an order is set exceeding the maximum order display B will change to the dot display Refer to Ch 15 for more details on upper limits of analysis orders IM 253401 01E 8 6 8 4 Setting the Harmonic Order and Displaying t
265. ng method in the following order Two 2 elements have been installed ELEMENTI ELEMENT3 13W Single phase three wire system c31903W 3 303W 303W Three phase three wire system 34W 3V3A In case of a measurement circuit of single phase two wire system and having selected either element 1 or 3 selecting any of the above mentioned wring methods will result in correct measurement computation However the measurement computation results in case element X has been selected lose the physical meaning WIT130 253503 Pressing the WIRING key results in changing the wiring method in the following order Three 3 elements have been installed ELEMENTI ELEMENT2 ELEMENT3 Ys 103W Single phase three wire system 103W gt 393W 33W Three phase three wire system 34W Three phase four wire system RON a 3V3A Three voltage three current system In case of a measurement circuit of single phase two wire system and having selected either element 1 2 or 3 selecting any of the above mentioned wring methods will result in correct measurement computation However the measurement computation results in case element X has been selected lose their physical meaning Nolgg a Select a wiring method which matches the actual wiring since the computation method varies according to the wiring method Consequently when the wiring method does not match the actual wiring
266. ng the Storage Interval for Measurement Data Selecting the store function 1 Display C 3 Display C STOP gt T 5E ar E ENTER 7 aF F Setting interval SHIFT MEMORY s ES Display C Al rr EL AL A Dh 5 phourrminzrsecq 8 YL PaLs5tr YL gaEHL gt ENTER 70 0000 9 ENTER LE pste t f 6 V A Up down Eng 7 V Shift cursor SHIFT gt Storage of Measurement Data ON OFF Selecting the store function 1 Display C 3 Display C 5 STOP T 5b or E gt ENTER aFF T ENTER SHIFT MEMORY s E l rELHL nn i H eat ae IC eek f eg Pra L f LL m ij Setting the Recall Interval for Measurement Data Selecting the recall function 1 Display C L PE cpm SHIFT MEMORY 2 EGER 3 Display C A rELHL ENTER 1 aFF Setting Interval v Display C PnLb5br an 5 rhourjminsrsecs 8 spat ere Y ak HL ENTER ULL UU gt ENTER End 6 V A Up down 7 V Shift cursor SHIFT gt Recalling Measurement Data ON OFF Selecting the recall function 1 Display C Free m x SHIFT MEM
267. nge adjustment mode CHm Switches the channel in D A output adjustment mode m 1 to 12 CDm n Enters the actual output value in D A output adjustment mode m 1 to 12 n actual output value DOO Outputs 5V in D A output adjustment mode DO1 Outputs 5V in D A output adjustment mode OD Requests the output of measurement data and sets the output format to normal measurement default ENT Corresponds to the ENTER key operation confirming the adjustment value CAN Corresponds to the RESET key operation ignoringthe adjustments END Corresponds to the SHIFT key operation keeping the adjustments Note Incase of D A adjustment change the channel using the CHm command then carry out DOO or DOL command and the request output using the CDm n command After the CDm n command is being executed by 5V or 5V make sure to confirm by the ENT command After the display has been stabilized in the range adjustment mode or external input range adjustment mode execute the ENT command IM 253401 01E 14 3 E Bunoous e qnoJ pue uoneJqieo ueunsn py 14 2 Calibration Required Equipment DC Voltage Current Standard recommended Yokogawa 2552 2550 AC Voltage Current Standard recommended Yokogawa 2558 or 9100 up to 400Hz or Fluke 5200A 5215A or 5200A 5220A Digital Power Meter recommended Yokogawa WT2000 or 2531 2ch Synchronizer recommended Yokogawa FG120 Calibration of DC Voltage Current and Power Wiring Conne
268. nstrument execute the output of data dATA All data selected as output items will be output PnL Allset up parameters will be output 10 18 IM 253401 01E 10 9 Outputting to an External Plotter Printer Note When the output items are to be sent by communication interface and they are set to V A P or dEG these items are then output When the output item to be sent by communication is set to ALL not only the V and A data are output but P and dEG data as well When the output item to be sent by communication is set to G V to CG P the output data will not be the graph but the numerical values The orders are printed up to the maximum analysis order When the fundamental frequency lies outside the measurement range of the harmonic analysis display B will show FrqEr an attempt to output will result in an error code When you set an element which is not the element of measurement column B an attempt to output will result in an error code When no analysis data are present will be printed There are cases where the active power value becomes negative The corresponding bargraph will be printed in thin print When no plotter is connected output time out will result in an error code Example of Output to an External Plotter Output example in case of output item G V of harmonic analysis data Slight differences may exist due to used plotter etc Voltage range Current range Ana
269. nt In case the wrong instrument or accessories have been delivered or if some accessories are not present or if they seem abnormal contact the dealer from which you purchased them WT110 WT130 Main Body Check that the model code and suffix code given on the name plate located at the right side of the main body are according to your order WT110 model code 253401 WT130 model code 253502 253503 MODEL SUFFIX No Model and Suffix codes Model code Suffix code Specifications 253401 WT110 Single phase model 253502 WT130 Three phase three wire model 253503 WT130 Three phase four wire model Interface C1 GP IB interface C2 RS 232 C interface Power voltage 0 100 120V 220 240V Power cord D Maximum rated voltage 125V Maximum rated current 7A F VDE Standard Power Cord Part No A1009WD Maximum rated voltage 250V Maximum rated current 10A J BS Standard Power Cord Part No A1023WD Maximum rated voltage 250V Maximum rated current 5A R SAA Standard Power Cord Part No A1024WD Maximum rated voltage 240V Maximum rated current 10A Options External sensor input function EX1 2 5 5 10V range EX2 50 100 200mV range Harmonic analysis function HRM External input output function DA4 4 channels D A output for 253401 DA12 12 channels D A output for 253502 253503 CMP Comparator 4 channels D A output 4 channels Ex WT13
270. nt 1 2 Element 2 for model 253503 only 3 Element 3 for WT130 only 4 gt for WT130 only Syntax Query Example Description OYH OYH Syntax Query Example Description PS PS m4 indicates setting value 0 000 m4 x 9999 m5 indicates prefix m5 0 m E 3 1 E 0 2 k E 3 3 M E 6 OY 1 terminator OY1 1 1 600 0 1 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value No output and computation result have no relation to the element but when using them with the OY command set m3 1 Sets the relay output items in case of harmonic analysis inquires about the current setting Up to four items can be set OYH ml m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 terminator m1 indicates the output relay channel l lt ml lt 4 m2 indicates the output item number m2 0 no output 1 Voltage V 2 Current A 3 Power W 6 Power factor PF 16 harmonic distortion factor of voltage V THD 17 harmonic distortion factor of current A THD 19 Relative harmonic content of each voltage component V 20 Relative harmonic content of each current component A 21 Relative harmonic content of each active power component W 22 Phase angle between each voltage of the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order and the fundamental 1st order voltage V deg 23 Phase angle between each current of the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order and the fundamental 1st order current A deg m3 indic
271. nt lt x gt Sets queries the communication output items concerning each element ON OFF App 2 23 MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt SIGMA Sets queries the communication output items concerning S ON OFF App 2 23 MEASure NORMal VALue Queries normal measured computed data set by commands other than MEASure NORMal ITEM App 2 23 RECall Group RECall Queries all settings related to recalling data App 2 27 RECall INTerval Sets queries the recalling interval App 2 27 RECall PANel Retrieves the set up parameters file App 2 27 RECall STATe Sets queries recalling ON OFF App 2 27 Z spueululo uoneoiunululo2 IM 253401 01E App2 9 Appendix 2 3 Commands Command Description Page RELay Group RELay Queries all settings related to the comparator function App 2 28 RELay DISPLay Sets queries the comparator display OFF or in case of ON the channel to be displayed App 2 28 RELay HCHannel lt x gt Queries all settings related to relay output items in case of harmonic analysis App 2 28 RELay HCHannel x FUNCtion Sets queries function of the relay output item in case of harmonic analysis App 2 29 RELay HCHannel lt x gt THReshold Sets queries the threshold level for the relay output item App 2 29 RELay MODE Sets queries the mode of the comparator function App 2 29 RELay NCHannel lt x gt Queries all settings related to the relay output items in cas
272. ntax Description TST Function Syntax Example Description WAI Function Syntax Executes the same operation as the TRIG SHIFT HOLD key on the front panel TRG Executes the same operation as when using the multi line message GET Group Execute Trigger Executes a self test and queries the result All internal memory boards are tested TST TST 0 0 will be returned when the result are satisfactory If an abnormality is detected 1 will be returned Waits for the command following WAI until execution of the designated overlap command has been completed This command is not supported by this instrument WAI App2 34 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 4 Status Report Appendix 2 4 Status Report 2 4 1 Overview of the Status Report The figure below shows the status report which is read by a serial poll This is an extended version of the one specified in IEEE 488 2 1987 j 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Service request enable register uS i
273. ntf See etre rox baie debite tkt ats a Side dte toutes 14 1 14 2 Calibration i005 ERN 14 4 14 3 In Case of Malftinctioning Ie rer act eet ies eee ean ees 14 10 14 4 Error Codes and Corrective Actions essent enne nete nenne nenne 14 11 14 5 Replacing the Fuse for WT130 reisien e neenon etn tette tnt tetn testen enne 14 13 Specifications 15 1 15 2 15 3 Fr quency Measurement e ap e Ec dine cee Cette a e ELSE EU EUER SERERE ieee 15 1 15 4 Commubic ati n iE REUTERS eee ete 15 1 15 5 Computing Functions 15 2 156 Display Functions eee eU NEED HOHER GRE DER OD oH BERE IO EU RD 15 2 15 7 Integrator Functions de te RR ER OR be P ires 15 2 15 8 Internal Memory Function eseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee ennt A ARES SEENE enne nennen Eata TeS RSi 15 2 15 9 D A Converter optional 15 10 External Input optional 15 11 Comparator Output optional sisenes enne teen nennen nennen 15 3 15 12 External Control and Input Signals in combination with the D A converter and comparator options 15 13 General Specifications re 2i aee ORI Ete E Ee EORR d rae i eee nre ap rius 15 14 Total Harmonic Analysis Function optional eee tenere 15 15 External DimensiOons 3655 oorr ERE a PEE GR ERR E eU RATE Communication Commands before the IEEE488 2 1987 Standard APP ls Commands s i tern ed Ern ere doles diete E Appl 1 App 1 2 Sample PrOgratn oie rte
274. nu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Selecting the comparator function 1 Display C SETUP Lann SHIFT OUTPUT P nut v dA 3 Display C f r EL AY 9 ENTER nFF Selecting the mode 4 En 5 Display C 7 7 nagdE gt ENTER T 5 dran ENTER pe d 5P 6 du AL xs jm v dRER H f Explanation Setting the Comparator Mode The following two settings are available For details refer to pages 10 7 10 8 The initial value is SinGL e SinGL the comparator mode will be set to single mode e duAL the comparator mode will be set to dual mode Note When you change the comparator mode after having set the comparator limit refer to page 10 10 the situation will change as follows Also verify the comparator limits again When you change the mode to the dual mode after having set limits in the single mode the limit of ch2 will take the value of the limit of chl and the limit of ch4 will take the value of the limit of ch3 When you return again to the single mode the previous values of each channel will be restored N CAUTION Do not change the comparator mode measurement mode or harmonic analysis ON OFF while the comparator function is in progress ON Similar to the Note above changing the type of limit mi
275. nual range for direct input and afterwards select auto range same goes for setting by communication interface IM 253401 01E 4 9 suonpuo 1ueujeunsee y Bumes B 4 6 Using the Averaging Function Relevant Keys A hour min SAMPLE a 7 9 MV VA 1 2 3 E GauTo auto o V OVER L L L D k A Var Function ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays Sa on aa L L LI J M W Te CJ L MODE TRIG relevant moe 5 l keys and AMS mv PF 123rx Jr indicator 2 V MEAN k A deg FuncTion ELEMENT _ S INTEGRATOR pe MW START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET hour m n sec tA saa s m v H 12 3 z t D LOCAL SETUP ri Ei i k A h FUNCTION ELEMENT INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT lS los w n EO CA ER 193W c 363W SCALING AVG FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL HARMONICS 34W amp 3V3A wiRiNa Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Setting Averaging Selecting the averaging function
276. numerical value 3 W outputs active power analysis value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value 4 deg outputs the phase angle as a numerical value 5 GV outputs voltage analysis value as numerical value and graph 6 GA outputs current analysis value as numerical value and graph 7 GW outputs active power analysis value as numerical value and graph 8 GVD outputs the phase angle between the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order voltage and the fundamental 1st order as numerical value and graph 9 GAD outputs the phase angle between the 2nd to 50 or 30 th order current and the fundamental 1st order as numerical value and graph 10 CGV outputs the relative harmonic content of voltage as numerical value and graph 11 CGA outputs the relative harmonic content of current as numerical value and graph 12 CGW outputs the relative harmonic content of active power as numerical value and graph 13 ALL outputs the relative harmonic content and analysis value of both voltage and current in case of any other mode m1 1 V outputs voltage analysis value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value 2 A outputs current analysis value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value 3 W outputs active power analysis value and relative harmonic content as a numerical value 4 deg outputs the phase angle between the first order voltage current and the 2nd to 50 or 30 th voltage current as a numerical value
277. o Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 4 CONFigure Group The CONFigure group relates to the measurement settings The same function can be performed using the WIRING key V RANGE key A RANGE key MODE SHIFT V RANGE key and SETUP key except for PnLrSt on the front panel The external sensor input range and external sensor scaling values are only vald if equipped with the external sensor option EX1 or EX2 CONFigure O WIRing Space IC P1W2 jr MC MODE gt gt Space RMS D I VOLTage RANGe gt Space gt Voltage E AUTO gt Space OFF 9 lt NRf gt zs RANGe Space lt Current gt G lt Voltage gt H lt Space gt OFF Con lt NRf gt m lt Space gt I 4 lt NRf gt ELEMent x Space lt NRf gt oan PC FILTer lt Space gt OFF gt CNE lt NRf gt Space C OFF CoN lt NRf gt 3 Space gt lt NRf gt ELEMent pr
278. o each corresponding Limit ralue Display the limit value of ch1 4 display or ch3 by v JA j Unit Corresponding to the relay on displayA A m VA IMM a IZ ILa B _ _ PF Input element Corresponding to the relay on eerveoverea displayA LIL s EM amm am e a M 96 E M V Heli 23 EFL ALI LIL Aw ie Measurement computation analysis data Corresponding to the relay on displayA and B 1 Limit value Displays the limit value of ch2 or ch4 by v A 1 The limit values on display A and B will show the pairs of ch1 amp ch2 and ch3 amp ch4 alternately by pressing the v A keys Comparator Display Function ON OFF This setting allows you to turn the above described display function ON or OFF oN The comparator display will appear by pressing the ENTER key after selecting on oFF The normal measurement or harmonic analysis display will appear by pressing the ENTER key after selecting oFF Note Pressing the FUNCTION or ELEMENT key will result in an error Other keys can be operated Determination is done by internal data of the input signal and not by displayed data For example when the limit is set to 10 00 and the internal data of the input signal coming from a lower value reaches 9 999 the relay will not be activated Only when t
279. o the figure below When the current value is less than 3A NO GO will be determined and the circuit becomes open When the current value is 3A or more GO will be determined and the circuit becomes closed Below limit Current open status DU MASS nm 3A Limit of ch2 is set to 3A 24V lies ps 1 Cl 1ndino uy jeuie x3 Busy H COM NO GO determination area Q i al 5 SN oe oe Time Ginent Exceeding limit gt closed status GO determination area alo peo 3A Limit of ch2 is set to 3A 24V NC LW Time IM 253401 01E 10 7 10 4 Comparator Function optional CAUTION Dual Mode This mode allows you to combine the limit values of two relays e g the upper value Hi and the lower value Lo to determine the contact status The four relays will be fixed as two pairs of chl amp ch2 and ch3 amp ch4 Setting the limit values of a pair of relays e g chl amp ch2 can only be done at the same display function The setting method relay operation etc are the same as in the single mode and when the measured computed integrated analysis values exceed the preset limits the contact status will become NO The following shows an example When the current value exceeds 1A but is less then 3A GO will be ditermined and the circuit becomes closed When the current value lies below 1A or exceeds3A NO GO will be determined and the circuit becomes open Current
280. oan SHIFT OUTPUT 4 roc v dH 3 Display C f r EL AH gt ENTER aFF 4 on A JIC v nargzrc f di 5P d HEH qn 9 ENTER Relay setting Setting type of limit Setting limit value Setting exponent Display C T Display A 11 Display B 15 Display C Eh i ENTER HI ENTER gt iii fifi 9 ENTER E 3 ENTER 6 18 ch g 8 Al 12 V Up down 16 Era A A A chi PI 13 d Shift cursor Ivi EF SHIFT pou Loa IHE L ij EE ij Bfr 14 Shift decimal ij EFB HAI SHIFT gt point PF i oer Gf AF at Ph 1 When you press the ENTER key at step 17 the output channel displayed at display C will Ani change to the next channel i e from ch1 to ch2 JEG and so forth OLH 2 Depends on the model number Refer to the 3 HPI specifications section for more details s 3 Displayed on WT110 WT130 with ROM version US MP 2 01 or later nHEH Phe Ph Ab HL d AE 8 V Sets the A column ERN vio he B column are 9 oves to the B colu 19 A B SHIFT gt End gt ENTER 10 V Select from 1 to 4 2 End 10 10 IM 253401 01E 10 6 Setting the Comparator Limit Values optional Setting the Comparator Limit Values in case of Harmonic Anaiysis Selecting the comparator function 1 Display C
281. ode Manual integration mode Wi VAi VixAi vari PFi Qi Timer When the timer is set integration will be stopped automatically 21 3 i 1 3 fivay _we Wi a Wi Setting range 000 h 00 min to 999 h 59 min 000 h 00 min will be i st M VA 7cos VA shown when manual integration mode is selected automatically e xa 121 3 i 1 3 Count overflow If the integration count flows above 999999 MWh or MAh or below g 99999 MWh or MAh integration stops and the elapsed time is S W EVA Xvar PF Xo held on the display Wi Ws VAi VA3 Vari vars ZW cos Ew Accuracy display accuracy 0 2 of rdg However only when the input ZVA XVA signal is continuous Timer accuracy 0 02 Remote control Start stop and reset can be remotely controlled by external E Wi VAi VixAi vari PFi Qi contact signals g B i 1 3 i 1 3 VA wW soos However the DA4 or DA12 options must be installed 35 1 3 VAi VAi p 2 i 1 3 i 1 3 eo 5 15 8 Internal Memory Function s 8 8 xw XVA Svar SPF Zo 5 8 Internal Memory Functio E E 2 W1 Ws V3 Vari vars OW Ew j Measurement data 5 g 2 EVA EVA Number of data that can be stored EL VA1 VAs WT110 253401 600 blocks 8 os Wi VAi VixAi vari PFi Qi WT130 253502 300 blocks i123 11 23 fvarowe i Wi WT130 253503 200 blocks g i21 2 3 VAI ceos VAi Each block has following data 25 eee i21 2 8 i21 2 8 measurement setting mode measurement ranges V A W oo Wh Wh Ah Ah elapse
282. of V Hz or A Hz is lit the frequency corresponding to the lit function indicator will be output When neither indicator is lit the frequency of the last used function indicator will be output The frequency of the last assigned element will be output 2 The number corresponds to input element 1 2 or 3 dFLt i integration measurement values are set as default Select this when you want to output integration measurement values Which items are output to which channel is described below Option DA4 DA12 CMP Model 253401 253502 253503 253401 253502 253503 cht w wi wi w wi wi ch2 Wh W2 Wh Wh1 Wh1 ch3 Ah W3 W3 Ah Ah1 Ah1 ch4 Hz XIW IW Hz Hz Hz ch5 Wh1 Wh1 Output ch6 Wh2 channel ch7 These Wh3 Wh3 ch8 channels Wh x Wh ch9 anor Ahi Ahi These channels cannot be set ch10 set Ah2 ch11 Ah3 Ah3 chi2 Ah Ah 1 When either the function indicator of V Hz or A Hz is lit the frequency corresponding to the lit function indicator will be output When neither indicator is lit the frequency of the last used function indicator will be output The frequency of the last assigned element will be output 2 The number corresponds to input element 1 2 or 3 10 4 IM 253401 01E 10 3 D A Output optional Selecting the Desired Item of the Output Format The items to be output are set per each output channel Setting the output channel The number of channels depends on the installed options and can be selected from the follow
283. ommand Information related to communications GP IB RS 232 C etc TM TM Syntax Query Example Description WR WR Syntax Query Example Description YC YC Syntax Query Example Description YM YM Syntax Query Example Description YO YO Syntax Query Example Description While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets integration preset time inquires about the current setting TM ml m2 terminator m1 indicates hour and must be set within the following range 0 ml x 999 m2 indicates minute and must be set within the following range 0 lt m2 lt 59 TM lt terminator gt TMO 0 Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets the wiring system inquires about the current setting WR m terminator m 2 103W 3 303W 4 304W available only for the 253503 5 3V3A available only for the 253503 WR terminator WR2 Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set Sets the display channel while the comparator function is ON inquires about the current setting YC m terminator m indicates the channel number for display in case of single mode m 1 Displays limit and measurement value on display 1 2 Displays limit and measurement value on display 2 3 Displays limit and measurement value on display 3 4 Displays
284. on 3 2 3 Fa n Direct E E E E E current n P P 2 2 P P Triangular sEP En Ep 0 wave 0 T i 43 2 4 2 Square TEP T wave Ep Ep Ep Pulse 0 T Qn 2 2 t T TT T S ug steps Ep Ep 27 27 4n J2 27 Pulse Ep When duty D 5 is applied 0 2n nD Ep DED PORE aye isi 4 2 IM 253401 01E 4 2 Turning the Filter ON OFF A hour min SAMPLE my M V VA 12 3 Z aau auto cvoveR am L L Li k A Var Function ELEMENT v RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays A OVER l L L Li J W TIME LJ MODE TRIG relevant move keys and nis m V PF 123r S2 peo Eis indicator c3 V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ E INTEGRATOR EI W START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET hour min sec us em g m V Hz i 2 3 LOCAL L k A A FUNCTION ELEMENT J J J INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT 5193W 363W c3 SCALING AVG FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL C3HARMONICS c33064W c353V3A WIRING Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key descr
285. onds in the lt NR1 gt format Example 999 59 59 Output Format of Normal Measured Computed Data The communication output is set ON by any of the commands starting with MEASure NORMal ITEM and the normal measured computed data or integration elasped time are output according to the following order of priority Besides in case of recalling normal measurement or integration data the data number will be output in NR1 format as well Data will be output in the following order corresponding to each element However note that for model 253401 only element 1 is valid and for model 253502 only element 1 3 and X are valid 0 Data number in case of recalling 1 V1 V2 V3 gt V 23 KI 4A2 4A3 gt A 3 W1 W2 W3 gt W 4 VA1 VA2 VA3 VAY 5 VAR VAR2 VAR3 VARY 6 PF1 PF2 PF3 PFY 7 DEGR1 DEGR2 DEGR3 DEGRY 8 VHZ VH2Z2 VH2Z3 VH2ZY 9 AHZ AHZ2 AHZ3 AH2ZY 0 WHI WH2 WH3 WHY 1 WHP WHP2 WHP3 WHPY 2 WHM WHM2 WHM3 WHM 3 AHI AH2 4AH3 AHY 4 AHP AHP2 AHP3 AHPY 5 AHM AHM2 AHM3 AHM 6 TIME integration elasped time Each data is divided by a comma and is ended by the terminator lt RMT gt Output Example of Normal Measured Computed Data Output example for model 253502 after having sent the following commands Sent MEASURE NORMAL ITEM PRESET NORMAL MEASURE
286. or harmonic distortion refer to page 8 4 m 0 IEC 1 CSA Query Example Description DL DL Syntax Query Example Description DR DR Syntax Query Example Description DY DY Syntax Query Example Description EA EA Syntax Query Example Description EB EB Syntax Query Example Description EC EC DF lt terminator gt DFO Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Sets the terminator for communication output data inquires about the current setting DL terminator m indicates terminator GP IB RS 232 C m 0 CR LF EOI CR LF 1 LF LF 2 EOI CR DL lt terminator gt DLO Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Displays the current range DRm lt terminator gt m indicates the range m 0 cancels the range display and returns to measurement display 1 displays voltage current and shunt value of element 1 on display A B and C respectively 2 displays the shunt value of element 1 2 and 3 on display A B and C respectively WT130 only DR lt terminator gt DRO Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the display for comparator ON OFF or inquires about the current setting DYm terminator m indicates display for comparator ON OFF m 0 cancels the display for comparator 1 sets
287. or during Measurement Chapter 3 Before Operation 3 1 Usage Precautions 3 2 Installing the Instrument JN 8 Wiring Precautions 5s opes een ana RM RA QUERN RUAGTIRUN GERA QUU INI ARE A 3 4 Wiring the Measurement Circuit essent nennen nennen nnne 3 5 AN 3 5 Wiring the Measurement Circuit when Using External PT CT seen 3 7 AN 3 6 Wiring the Measurement Circuit when Using the External Sensor ess 3 9 AN 3 7 Connecting the Power Supply cere e e eene ee etd e tata eases 3 8 Turning the Power ON OFF 3 9 Selecting the Wiring Method for WT130 3 10 Improving the Measurement Accuracy esseseeeeeeeeeeeet reete netten ener eene Chapter 4 Setting Measurement Conditions 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode essere nennen eene nennen enennenen 4 2 Turin the Filter ON OFF k e 1 beer pet e e Rte fus 4 3 Selecting the Measurement Range in case of Direct Input 4 4 Setting the Scaling Value when External PT CT is Used essere 4 5 Selecting the Measurement Range and Setting the Scaling Value when External Sensor is Used Option cien e ERROR tibt ba ca e e Me eb ae 4 8 4 6 Using the Averaging Function eesesseeesseeeseee esten enn enne nn tnnt tnt nennen nne nn etna 4 10 4 7 Using the Four Arithmetical Operation Function Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM Version 2 0 T or
288. or error The NC contact is closed ErrLo frequency error The NC contact is closed ErrHi frequency error The NO contact is closed for this case only FrqErr frequency error in case of harmonic analysis The NC contact is closed error when no data are present The NC contact is closed 10 8 IM 253401 01E 10 5 Setting the Comparator Mode optional Relevant Keys A hour min SAMPLE m V VAL 1 2 3 X SauTo AuTO CV OVER m Li LI k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT v rance ARANGE HOLD Displays AC OVER L La J l W TIME LJ MODE TRIG relevant MODE g keys and AMS mvVvyPF 123r SE ANS LENTER indicator V MEAN ri r ri FE k A deg Funcrion ELEMENT _ c NTBGRATOR c pc a a W START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET rc s mv H 12 3 r E 4 r gt k A h FUNCTION ELEMENT l J J Lal La MW ht E CJ INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT 103W 363W wn SCALING c3 AVG c3 FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL C3HARMONICS c3304W c33V3A NO Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current me
289. otal harmonic distortion ratio in and contents ratio in 96 However a simultaneous analysis can be made for a specified input module Sampling speed method The sampling speed depends on the fundamental frequency to be input Input j Window frequency Sampling up to the n th Order range q y harmonic 40 lt f lt 70Hz fx512Hz 1 period of f 50 70 lt f lt 130Hz fx256Hz 2 period of f 50 130 lt f lt 250Hz fx128Hz 4 period of f 50 250 lt f lt 440Hz fx64Hz 8 period of f 30 FFT number of points 512 points FFT FFT calculation accuracy 32 bits Window Rectangular window Display update interval Approx 3 s Accuracy 0 2 of range is added to the normal display accuracy suoneouiedsg IM 253401 01E 15 3 Chapter 15 Specifications 15 15 External Dimensions WT110 253401 Unit mm Rear 73 23 356 ie l ceo A o R c N r o r 480 JIS rack mount 460 Protruding from rack 20 7 Ti i n s y E le o OL O eS
290. ower values G Vd Prints the numerical values and the graph of the phase angle between each voltage of the 2nd to 50th order and the fundamental 1st order G Ad Prints the numerical values and the graph of the phase angle between each current of the 2nd to 50th order and the fundamental 1st order CG V Prints the numerical values and the graph of the relative harmonic content of voltage CG A Prints the numerical values and the graph of the relative harmonic content of current CG P Prints the numerical values and the graph of the relative harmonic content of active power ALL Prints the numerical values and the graph of the analysis values and relative harmonic content of voltage and current V and A are both printed 1 HPGL PCL plotters print both numerical values and the graph but ESCP printers only print the graph Setting the Element Column B One of the following should be set The output items corresponding to the set element will then be printed out on an external plotter The initial value is 1 In case of the WT110 this setting is always 1 1 Select this when the output items of element 1 should be printed out 2 Select this when the output items of element 2 should be printed out This setting is not available on model 253502 3 Select this when the output items of element 3 should be printed out Executing Output After having connected the external plotter printer to this i
291. p 2 22 MEASure HARMonics Queries all settings related to harmonic analysis data App 2 22 MEASure HARMonics ITEM Queries all settings related to the output items of harmonic analysis data App 2 22 MEASure HARMonics ITEM PRESet Sets the ON OFF pattern for all communication outputs of the harmonic analysis function App 2 22 MEASure HARMonics ITEM SYNChronize harmonic analysis function gt Sets queries the communication output item of harmonic analysis ON OFF App 2 22 MEASure HARMonics VALue Queries harmonic analysis data set by commands other than MEASure HARMonics ITEM App 2 22 MEASure NORMal Queries all settings related to normal measured computed data App 2 22 MEASure NORMal ITEM Queries all settings related to the output items of normal measured computed data App 2 23 MEASure NORMal ITEM PRESet Sets the ON OFF pattern for all communication outputs of the normal measurement function App 2 23 MEASure NORMal ITEM TIME MATH Sets queries the ON OFF state of the communication output of integration time MATH App 2 23 MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function Queries communication output settings of the normal measurement function App 2 23 MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ALL Sets the communication output items concerning all elements or S ON OFF at once App 2 23 MEASure NORMal ITEM normal measurement function gt ELEMe
292. peration panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure 1 Selecting the Display Function Select either V Hz voltage frequency or A Hz current frequency by pressing the FUNCTION key of display C FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION SHIFT SHIFT A SHIFT Display FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION C A wW V Hz gt A Hz gt Wh FUNCTION Wht 4 FUNCTION Ny P amp A Wy FUNCTION FUNCTION 4 FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION P amp V A Aht At Ah Wh and Ah will light twice ri and are displayed on the top of display C You can reverse the order by first pressing the SHIFT key followed by the FUNCTION key 1 Displayed on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later 2 Selecting the Input Element Select the input element by pressing the ELEMENT key of display C The operation is the same as the one described on page 5 1 Explanation Measurement Range The measurement range lies from 10 to 50kHz Depending on the internal timing however measurements can be done in the range from 4 to 10Hz At 100Hz 1kHz 10kHz 100kHz the measurement range is auto range Maximum Reading of the Display and Units en eA Yee
293. personal computer In such a case increase the recalling interval IM 253401 01E 9 3 BuieoeH Bunos n 9 2 Storing Recalling Set up Parameters Relevant Keys a AUTO AUTO c V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays relevant keys and indicator MODE TRIG Vv ENTER gt a ea INTEGRATOR START STOP RESET Pisis oe r m V VA 12354 V OVER I m k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT A OVER J L J M W TIME me B V PF 1 2 3 RMS _ m x V MEAN L q Li k A deg FuncTION ELEMENT LLLI NA 1 min sec mv H 12 3r Ls k A h Function ELEMENT JL LL C3 SCALING AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET o REMOTE a LOCAL SETUP Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure INTERFACE OUTPUT SHIFT c3103W 364W mince c33063W 3V3A Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Storing Set up Parameters 1 Selecting storage of set up parameters SHIFT MEMORY
294. play WT130 253502 253503 Operation keys and function element display r Indicators for operation conditions HOLD Shows sampling voltage current overrange and Keeps the displayed value and the HOLD measurement mode indicator will light up Pressing once again will result in canceling HOLD V RANGE Shows the voltage range setting menu page 4 4 HOLD A RANGE SHIFT TRIG Shows the current range setting menu page 4 4 4 8 When in the HOLD situation this results in z updating the displayed value o V RANGE 3 SHIFT MODE v D Switches between modes page 4 1 For decreasing the voltage current range S AUTO indicator and for setting of functions values ce Lights up when range is AUTO NS ni ELEMENT x Sets the input element for For increasing the voltage current range g measurement integration The corresponding and for setting of functions values o indicator will light up Ch 5 6 2 a FUNCTION ENTER Sets the displayed function Ch 5 6 For verifying the set range function value E Function unit display m Y F SHIFT gt 123r AUTO Moves the cursor of a value from left to right FUNCTION ELEMENT ARANGE HOLD TRIG A SHIFT v
295. play C RESET nndE Setting integration mod SHIFT INTEG SET a n amp r Setting integration timer 2 t f dE AE Setting integration preset time e Turning the Harmonic Analysis Function ON OFF 1 Display C START oF F SHIFT HARMONICS 2 on LEA Setting the element Hn E Setting PLL source E E Hg Setting computation methood of harmonic distortion 5k Storing Recalling to from Internal Memory 1 Display C STOP 2 Star E Storing measurement data SHIFT MEMORY ro A rELRL Recalling measurement data Y PoiStre Storing set up parameters f PuniriL Recalling set up parameters Setting Output 1 Display c SETUP 2 L ann Setting comm plotter printer output SHIFT OUTPUT p aut Execute plotter printer output v d H Setting D A output f LAY Comparator setting relay output setting Setting Communication Interface GP IB 1 Display C a LOCAL Addr SHIFT INTERFACE Setting addressable mode A DUM Setting addressable mode B C 5 J N tant 4 Setting talk only mode Pr mk Print mode setting setting plotter printer output 4444 2 Setting communication commands according to IEEE 488 2 1987 S
296. program message including the PMT is kept below 1024 bytes Furthermore no dead lock will occur if the program message does not contain a query Z spueuuulo uoneoiunuluo2 IM 253401 01E App2 3 Appendix 2 2 Program Format 2 2 3 Commands There are two types of command program header which can be sent from the controller to this instrument They differ in the format of their program headers They are Common command header Compound header Common Command Header Commands defined in IEEE 488 2 1987 are called common commands The header format of a common command is shown below An asterisk must always be attached to the beginning of a command GH lt Mnemonic gt OT An example of a common command CLS Compound Header Commands designed to be used only with this instrument are classified and arranged in a hierarchy according to their function The format of a compound header is illustrated below A colon must be used when specifying a lower level header lt Mnemonic gt An example of a compound header CONFIGURE MODE RMS Note A mnemonic is a character string made up of alphanumeric characters Consecutive Commands Command Group A command group is a group of commands which have the same compound header A command group may contain sub groups Example Commands relating to integration INTEGRATE INTEGRATE MODE INTEGRATE TIMer INTEGRATE STARt INT
297. puting the Crest Factor Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later Relevant Keys hour min A SAMPLE PF PF l Fi m V VA 1 2 3 X aauto c AUTO CIVOVER So ame k A Val FUNCTION ELEMENT v ranae ARANGE HOLD Displays cd OVE l L L L J W Me L MODE TRIG relevant moe keys and Rus mv PF 123 x eR indicator c3 V MEAN k A deg FUNCTION ELEMENT _ Ld zs INTEGRATOR mae Ww START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET hour min sec e Hs i m V Hz 1 2 3 Hu gt a k A h FUNCTION ELEMENT J I J I J J INTERFACE OUTPUT mm MW ht c3103W 393W c3304W amp 3V3A WIRING c3 SCALING c3 AVG FILTER STORE RECALL HARMONICS Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Operating Procedure Perform operations following the thick line in the below menu Press the ENTER key to confirm the selection or setting When you want to leave the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Selecting the four arithmetical operations function 1 Display C Display C SETUP 2 FLE 4 E
298. queries the current setting Syntax CONFigure AVERaging TYPE LINear EXPonent lt NRf gt CONFigure AVERaging TYPE lt NRf gt 8 16 32 64 averaging constant CONFIGURE AVERAGING TYPE LINEAR 8 CONFIGURE AVERAGING TYPE gt CONFIGURE AVERAGING TYPE LINEAR 8 Example CONFigure CURRent Function Queries all setting values relating to the current range external sensor range Syntax CONFigure CURRent Example CONFIGURE CURRENT gt CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE 20 0E 00 AUTO 1 ESCALING ELEMENT 50 00E 00 ELEMENT2 50 00E 00 ELEMENT3 50 00E 00 CONFigure CURRent AUTO Function Sets the current auto range ON OFF or queries the current setting Syntax CONFigure CURRent AUTO lt Boolean gt CONFigure CURRent AUTO CONFIGURE CURRENT AUTO ON CONFIGURE CURRENT AUTO CONFIGURE CURRENT AUTO 1 Example CONFigure CURRent ESCaling Function Queries all scaling values for the external sensor Syntax CONFigure CURRent ESCaling Example CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING gt CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING ELEMENT1 50 00E 00 ELEMENT2 50 00E 00 ELEMENT3 50 00E 00 CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ALL Function Sets the scaling values for the external sensor for all elements at once Syntax CONFigure CURRent ESCaling ALL lt NRf gt lt NR gt 0 001 to 1000 Example CONFIGURE CURRENT ESCALING ALL 50 00 Description The setting values differ as fo
299. r Range The measuring range for active power apparent power and reactive power is determined as follows Wiring method Power range single phase two wire 1 2W voltage range x current range single phase three wire 1 3W voltage range x current range x 2 three phase three wire 33W three voltage three current 3A3V three phase four wire 3 4W voltage range x current range x 3 The maximum display is 9999 When the result of voltage range x current range exceeds 1000W the unit on the display will change to kW When this result exceeds 1000kW the unit on the display will change to MW Note When the range is set to auto the measuring range switches according to range up range down conditions Therefore the range may vary even if the measured values remain the same IM 253401 01E suomnpuo 1ueujeunseejy Bumes 4 4 Setting the Scaling Value when External PT CT is Used Relevant Keys A hour min SAMPLE p or M V VA 1 2 3 X Avo auTO c V OVER L L L Li k A Var Function ELEMENT V RANGE A RANGE HOLD Displays Iaoi l L L Ll J M W Te LL LL mo TRIG relevant wo 5 keys and AMS m V PF 1 2 3 r gener indicator c2 V MEAN k A deg FUNCTION ELEMENT rz x INTEGRATOR cape MW START STOP RESET z HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET hi m n sec REMOTE a Cm
300. r queue is not empty i e when an error occurs For details refer to page App2 39 Bit 3 EES Extended Event Summary Bit Set to 1 when a logical AND of the extended event register and the corresponding enable register is 1 i e when an event takes place in the instrument Refer to page App2 38 Bit 4 MAV Message Available Set to 1 when the output queue is not empty i e when there is data which is to be output when an inquiry is made Refer to page App2 39 Bit 5 ESB Event Summary Bit Set to 1 when a logical AND of the standard event register and the corresponding enable register is 1 i e when an event takes place in the instrument Refer to page App2 37 Bit 6 RQS Request Status MSS Master Summary Status MSS is set to 1 when a logical AND of the status byte except for bit 6 and the service request enable register is not 0 i e when the instrument is requesting service from the controller RQS is set to 1 when MSS changes from 0 to 1 and is cleared when a serial poll is performed or when MSS changes to 0 Bit Masking To mask a bit in the status byte so that it does not cause an SRQ set the corresponding bit of the service request enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 EAV so that no service will be requested even if an error occurs set bit 2 of the service request enable register to 0 This can be done using the SRE command To quer
301. reading Integrated value 999999 99999 in case of minus display Integration elapsed time 999 59 Units Wh power integration watt hour value Ah current integration ampere hour value e Prefix m k M Selecting the Display Function The following selections are available Wh displays both the positive and negative watt hour values e Whz displays the positive watt hour value Ah displays the total ampere hour values e Ahz displays the total ampere hour values or the positive ampere hour value For more details refer to page 7 3 Selecting the Input Element 1 2 3 Displays the measurement values of element 1 2 3 Y Displays the total integrated values of the elements installed The method of computation depends on the wiring method The computation method changes to Wh or Ah for the active power W refer to chapter 15 When the display function TIME is selected on display A there is no element function available on display A Pressing the ELEMENT key on display A will result in an error code Update Hold Function Although the held values will not be updated integration continues When hold is being cancelled the integration results values and time corresponding to the point of cancellation will be displayed For details regarding the relation with the START STOP key refer to the following page Integration Reset Resetting will result in returning the integration results to the status before
302. reset integration time data will be reset automatically and the contact status will change Rise The bit of the extended event register becomes 1 when the bit of the condition register changes from 0 to 1 Fall The bit of the extended event register becomes 1 when the bit of the condition register changes from 1 to 0 Both The bit of the extended event register becomes 1 when the bit of the condition register changes from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 Never The bit of the extended event register is disabled and always 0 2 4 5 Output Queue and Error Queue Overview of the Output Queue The output queue is provided to store response messages to queries For example when the WAVeform SEND query is sent to request output of the acquired waveform the response data will be stored in the output queue until it is read out The example below shows that data is stored record by record in the output queue and is read out oldest item first newest item last The output queue is emptied in the following cases in addition to when read out is performed When a new message is received from the controller When dead lock occurs page App2 4 When a device clear command DCL or SDC is received When power is turned ON again The output queue cannot be emptied using the CLS command To see whether the output queue is empty or not check bit 4 MAV of the status byte
303. revent an electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate the instrument when protective grounding or fuse might be defective Power Cord and Plug To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged in an outlet with protective grounding terminal Do no invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Power Supply Ensure the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power External Connection To ground securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to measurement or control unit Fuse To prevent a fire make sure to use fuses with specified standard current voltage type Before replacing the fuse turn OFF the power and disconnect the power source Do not use a different fuse or short circuit the fuse holder Do not Remove any Covers There are some areas with high voltage Do not remove any cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by qualified personnel only IM 253401 01E How to Use this Manual This User s Manual consists of 15 chapters an Appendix and an Index as described below Chapter 1
304. ries the current setting FILTER6 NEVER FILTER7 NEVER Syntax STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH NEVer FILTER8 NEVER FILTER9 NEVER STATus FILTer lt x gt FILTER10 NEVER FILTER11 NEVER x 1 to 16 FILTER12 NEVER FILTER13 NEVER Example STATUS FILTER2 RISE FILTER14 NEVER FILTER15 NEVER STATUS FILTER2 STATUS FILTER2 RISE FILTER16 NEVER QMESSAGE 1 Description Refer to App2 4 for details on the condition filter STATus CONDition Function Queries the contents of the condition filter and clears it at the same time Syntax STATus CONDition Example STATUS CONDITION gt 16 Description Refer to App2 4 for details on the condition filter STATus QMESsage Function Sets whether or not to apply the corresponding message to the query STATus ERRor queries the current setting Syntax STATus QMESsage lt Boolean gt STATus OMESsage Example STATUS QMESSAGE OFF STATus EESE STATUS OMESSAGE STATUS QMESSAGE 0 9 Function Sets the extended event register queries the current 3 setting STATus SPOLL Serial Poll 2 Syntax STATus EESE lt Register gt Function Executes serial polling 3 STATus EESE Syntax STATus SPOLL 8 lt Register gt 0 to 65535 Example STATUS SPOLL STATUS SPOLL 0 o Example STATUS EESE 257 Description Only to be used for RS 232 C interface STATUS EESE STATUS EESE 257 o Description Refer to App 2 4 for details on the extended event 3 register 2 o STATus EESR E Functio
305. rint mode GP IB 11 1 print riode RS 232 C arenero 12 1 L printing Modeni eein iet eee Pe NIME eee 10 18 program format IEEE488 2 1987 sssssssse App2 2 LLO local lockout eeeneeennnn nennen 11 2 program messages eee eeeeesseeseseeseeeeceseeseeseeeseeaeesaeeseeeeeeeeaes App2 2 protective grounding ccna d ees 5 M Dg ET 4 7 malfunctioning eese a 14 10 manual integration mode eee 7 1 manual tante ecu eei SEHEN INASRE NI MER 4 4 maximum allowable input esee 5 2 measurement mode eee eecesceeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeseesceaseeeeeeaeeaseeeeeaeeeeeeeas 4 1 measurement I nge eee eerie i RR Ie E Lee 4 4 MESSAGES RR App2 2 histo nre App2 4 inim M 2 in ving averaging secet esee een eee Ere eee reete eee eh ee 4 11 N NC normally closed et eee eoe cone o 10 7 NO normally open eese 10 7 normal mode eee eere eene rede ener eee ere thea 12 1 MOLES conr ren ARGIS EORR OE TOTO GR RI ERES 1 Index 2 IM 253401 01E Index reactive power display righe recalling sho see reete de ees recalling interval aesir t eee EN eee deir eie deris recalling measured data recalling set up parameters 9 5 t lay output enes a a relay Specifications e aae A E erue eda fela y Status uiuere eH PEN Neto a aE remote control REN remote enable repea
306. rmat of Harmonic Analysis Data Data Format Harmonic analysis data normally consists of a 8 byte header and 11 bytes of data Header Data Header Section The header section consists of 8 bytes h1 to h8 hi h2 h3 h4 hd h6 h7 h8 hl to h3 data type V voltage A_ Current W____ Active power DEG Phase angle between the 1st order voltage and 1st order current DGV Phase angle between the 1st order voltage and the 2nd to 50st order voltage DGA Phase angle between the Ist order current and the 2nd to 50st order current PF Fundamental power factor 1st order HzV Fundamental frequency of the voltage of the PLL source HzA Fundamental frequency of the current of the PLL source THD Harmonic distortion either IEC or CSA CNT Relative harmonic content MEM Data number in case of recalling h4 Element 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 3 Element 3 4 Not applicable h5 Data state N normal I Overrange O Computation overflow P Peak overflow E No data h6 h7 Order 01 to 50 Order of fundamental or higher harmonic up to the maximum analysis order space will be assigned in case of frequency harmonic distortion power factor or in case of all computed values of the 1st to 50th order h8 Indicates data lag lead in case of DEG data type In case of other data types space will occur G Lag D Lead _ Not detectable Data Section The data s
307. rmonic Analysis Data Set up Parameters and Error Codes Output Format of Normal Measured Computed Data Data Format Measured data normally consists of a 6 byte header and 11 bytes of data Header Data Header Section The header section consists of 6 bytes h1 to h6 hi h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 h1 to h3 data type V voltage A__ Current W__ Active power VA_ Apparent power Var Reactive power PF Power factor HzV Voltage frequency HzA Current frequency Wh Watt hour Ah Ampere hour DEG Phase angle Vpk Peak voltage value Apk Peak current value EFF Efficiency CV V1 crest factor CV2 V2 crest factor CV3 V3 crest factor CAI Al crest factor CA2 A2 crest factor CA3 A3 crest factor A B display A display B A B display A display B A B display A display B A B display A display B Wh Positive watt hour Wh Negative watt hour Ah Positive ampere hour Ah _ Negative ampere hour HMS Elapsed time of integration MEM Data number in case of recalling Efficiency crest factor and the results of four arithmetic operations can be output on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 and later However different instruments have different restrictions on the output of these parameters h4 Element 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 3 Element 3 4 Y h1 h4 data type only when the computing equation is A B or A B on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2
308. s 253401 Analog output R d ecoraer test Current WT130 input Input 253502 253503 either GP IB or one RS 232 C Personal Ext Computer sensor Ext printer or plotter Model INPUT Section 253401 ELEMENT 1 253502 ELEMENT 1 3 253503 ELEMENT 1 2 3 eile o FPES D 4 t racer n LL S INPUT ELEMENTI 0 il iecore SAMPLING 1 i VOLTAGE INPUT re o eK Y RAM A D A D k Bus i TW Aa 7 e ISO i interface DSP Arbiter KEY amp DISPLAY 1 i FLO patentee i CONTROLLER 1 aoa I m uui M T mE ria eil CURRENT INPUT i IH ee byw AD E Lead Lag RS232C d ar Zero Gross cmm bL FREQUENCY 5 LPF Ho Detector i COUNTER x 2 l MEL UD aie E E E N E a ee an ES CLOCK 1 D A OUTPUT re rt J __ FE T EEPRom mones Option E er cubre aa a aa LS EERROM sd buic a COMPARATOR fs os ee ee ee E RAM Arbiter Option 1 aec Option ae rc a E ENNERR A Er ae a WE En S lec AE E ote This instrument consists of various sections input voltage input and current input circuits DSP CPU display and interface section In the voltage input circuit the input voltage is formalized by a voltage divider and operational amplifier then sent to the A D converter In the current input circuit one shunt resistor is used to form a closed circuit The voltage between both ends of the shunt resistor is amplified and formalized by an operational amplifier and then
309. s across the measuring input and the ground become as follows Voltage across A V and A side input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max Voltage across V terminal and ground 600 Vrms max Put the protective cover on the connector when this function is not used IM 253401 01E 10 1 1ndino uy jeui8 x3 Busy H 10 2 Remote Control optional Controlling Integration To control integration apply timing signals according to the timing chart below pe pe pes ad pos gt e 5ms min EXT START E ae gt lt 5ms min 1 d EXT STOP 35 5ms min EXT RESET Approx Approx Approx Approx 15ms 15ms 15ms 15ms gt e gt e f INTEG BUSY As shown in the timing chart the INTEG BUSY output signal level goes low while integration is in progress The signal can be used to monitor integration etc Holding Display Data Update same function as HOLD key To hold the display update apply the EXT HOLD signal according to the timing chart below m Display hold 5ms min EXT HOLD Updating Display Data which has been held same function as TRIG key Applying an EXT TRIG signal when the display is on hold updates the display data Update timing during normal measurement integration Measurement start Display update 250ms min Y HF 5ms min EXT TRIG Update timing while harmonic analysis function is in progress
310. s only necessary functions ON CMD MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM PRESET CLEAR CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK CMD MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM SYNCHRONIZE ON ATHD ON A ON CALL BWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK Sets the filter to detect the end of data updating CMD STATUS FILTER1 FALL CALL BWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK Reads the analysis data and displays them 10 times FOR I 1 TO 10 CMD STATUS EESR Clears the extended event register CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK BUFS SPACES 255 CALL IBRD WT BUFS GOSUB ERRCH Waiting until data are finished updating CMD COMMUNICATE WAIT 1 CALL IBWRT WT CMDS GOSUB ERRCHK CMD MEASURE VALUE Requests output of analysis data CALL IBWRT WT CMD GOSUB ERRCHK BUF SPACES 1000 CALL IBRD WT BUF GOSUB ERRCH Reads analysis data K 1 FOR J 1 TON Order of output data IF J lt N THEN S INSTR K BUFS ELSE S INSTR K BUF CHR 10 D J MIDS BUFS K S K K S4 1 NEXT J Displaying analysis data PRINT V1 FREQ D 1 Frequency of PLL source PRINT A1 THD IEC D 2 Harmonic distortion of current PRINT A1 RMS D 3 Rms values of the 1st to 50th order FOR J 1 TO N 3 STEP 2 Fundamental higher harmonics analysis values PRINT Al Order STRS J D J 3 odd numbered component PRINT Al Order STRS J 1 D J 4 even numbered component NEXT J NEXT I
311. s the current range setting menu page 4 4 4 8 V RANGE SHIFT MODE Switches between modes page 4 1 AUTO indicator Lights up when range is AUTO FUNCTION Sets the displayed function Ch 5 6 Function unit display A HOLD Keeps the displayed value and the HOLD indicator will light up Pressing once again will result in canceling HOLD HOLD ca SCALING ca SAMPLE AUTO AUTO FUNCTION V RANGE A RANGE MODE AVG ca V OVER FILTER m A OVER MODE ca STORE ca RMS RECALL ca V MEAN a a c3 HARMONCS DC a HOLD TRIG SHIFT TRIG When in the HOLD situation this results in updating the displayed value v For decreasing the voltage current range and for setting of functions values A For increasing the voltage current range and for setting of functions values ENTER For verifying the set range function value M SHIFT gt Moves the cursor of a value from left to right A gt 24 INTEGRATOR START STOP HARMONICS MEMORY FUNCTION REMOTE Bre 53a x 3 25 7 3 Serc lt jer lt j er lt INTERFACE OUTPUT C g START
312. sensor input terminal EXT Input terminal ELEMENT Wiring diagram for single phase three wire system with external shunt connected 253502 253503 SOURCE 4 LOAD P OUT UTL w aoe e Ext sensor input a Ext sensor input terminal EXT terminal EXT Input terminal Input terminal ELEMENT1 ELEMENT3 3 10 IM 253401 01E 3 6 Wiring the Measurement Circuit when Using the External Sensor Wiring diagram for three phase three wire system with external shunt connected 253502 253503 SOURCE 4 LOAD R OUT UTL S A T OUT UTL d i Ext sensor input 9 3 T terminal EXT Input terminal Input terminal ELEMENT1 ELEMENT3 Ext sensor input o terminal EXT OOG Wiring diagram for three phase four wire system with external shunt connected 253503 SOURCE A LOAD Bl a Ext sensor I Od4 input terminal H xn Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal ELEMENT1 ELEMENT2 ELEMENTS a Ext sensor input O terminal EXT Ext sensor input terminal EXT Wiring diagram for three voltage three current system with external shunt connected 253503 SOURCE A i LOAD
313. ssage format refer to the next item Example CONFIGURE VOLTAGE RANGE 15 0E 00 AUTO 0 lt RMT gt V J Y Unit Unit lt RMT gt RMT is the terminator used for every response message Only one type of response message is available NL END Response message unit format The format of a program message unit is shown below E Rsps header Space Response header gt A response header sometimes precedes the response data Response data must be separated from the header by a space For details refer to page App2 6 Response data Response data Response data is used to define a response If multiple items of response data are used they must be separated by a comma 500 0E 03 RMT CONFIGURE MODE RMS lt RMT gt Data Header Data If a program message contains more than one query responses are made in the same order as the queries Normally each query returns only one response message unit but there are some queries which return more than one response message unit The first response message unit always responds to the first query but it is not always true that the n th unit always responds to the n th query Therefore if you want to make sure that a response is made to each query the program message must be divided up into individual messages Example Points to Note concerning Message Transmission It is always possible to send a program message if the prev
314. st Stored data will be kept even after the power has been turned OFF because of the internal lithium battery When integrated values are not present the dot display will be stored as data whereas 000 00 will be stored as integration preset time When the fundamental frequency is high and up to 50 windows of harmonic analysis data are not present the dot display will be stored as data While storage is in progress several settings cannot be changed such as switching the harmonic analysis function ON OFF changing the related input element the PLL source the harmonic distortion factor computation method nor can scaling averaging and filter settings be changed nor integration mode integration time and storage interval Ifyou press the HOLD key while storing data the measurement operation and the counting operation of the store interval are suspended The storage operation itself is also suspended However if integration is in progress measurement and integration continues internally 9 2 IM 253401 01E 9 1 Storing Recalling Measured Data Recalling Measured Data Retrieving Data from the Internal Memory After displaying data stored in the internal memory on the panel you can use all display functions and carry out integration and display these data Furthermore by using the communication function data can be output Items which can be recalled all data which can be stored Aborting Recalling when all stored
315. sumption Model Max power consumption 253401 21VA at 120VAC 30VA at 240VAC 253502 30VA at 120V AC 45VA at 240V AC 253503 35VA at 120V AC 50VA at 240V AC 3 pin consent WT110 WT130 A Nu Nee Power cord accessory 3 12 IM 253401 01E 3 8 Turning the Power ON OFF Item to be Checked before Turning ON the Power Check that the instrument is installed correctly refer to section 3 2 page 3 2 Check that the power cord is connected properly refer to section 3 7 page 3 12 Location of the Power Switch The power switch is located in the lower left corner of the front panel Turning the Power ON Turning the power ON will result in staring the test program which checks each memory When the results of these checks are all satisfactory opening messages will appear as described on the next page after which the instrument will be ready for measurement uoneJedo eJojeg When the test program results in displaying error codes proper operation of the instrument cannot be performed Immediately turn OFF the power and contact you nearest representative Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual When contacting your representative inform him of the name suffix and No code as on the right side panel and of the displayed error code s Note Incase of an error code refer to section 14 4 page 14 11 for a description and corrective action A warm up time of approx 30 minutes
316. sures and displays true RMS RMS value value V MEAN Displays rectified mean value Measures and displays calibrated to the RMS value true RMS value DC Displays DC value obtained by Displays DC value obtained by averaging the input averaging the input signal signal Theoretical Equations RMS This mode is selected to display input voltage or current as a true RMS value 1 fu T t dt f t input signal T one period of the input signal V MEAN This mode is selected to display input voltage or current as a rectified mean value calibrated to the RMS value Since a sine wave is used for calibration the value displayed will be the same as that obtained in RMS mode if a sine wave is measured The value displayed will be different from that obtained in RMS mode if a distorted or DC waveform is measured I T 2 n f t dt 242 Th rol f t input signal T one period of the input signal DC This mode is selected when the input voltage or current is DC The input signal is averaged and the result is displayed IM 253401 01E 4 1 4 1 Selecting the Measurement Mode Typical Waveform Types and Differences in Measured Values between Measurement Modes Measurement RMS Mean Mean value Linear mode value value rectification averaging Name Sinewave 0 2n Half wave Ep Ep Ep Ep E rectification P bes Y P Full wave E Ep 2 Ep 2 tification Ep Ep rectificati
317. t and reactive power 9999 Display range of power factor 1 000 to 1 000 when the computed result lies between 1 001 and 2 000 1 000 will be displayed When the result is 2 001 or more PFErr will be displayed Units VA apparent power var reactive power power factor no unit e Prefix m k M Selecting the Display Function The following selections are available VA apparent power will be displayed var reactive power will be displayed PF power factor will be displayed Selecting the Input Element The type of input element which can be selected depends on the model number Make your selection after having verified your model number 1 2 3 Displays the measurement values of element 1 2 3 9 Referto page 5 2 Note Changing the measurement mode might result in different computed results even when the input signal is the same For more details on the measurement mode refer to page 4 1 When either the voltage or current drops below 0 5 of the measurement range PFErr will be displayed IM 253401 01E 6 1 ejBuy eseug pue 101284 Jewog MOd eAnoeeH MOd 1uededdy Buikejdsiq Buyndwoy D 6 2 Computing Displaying the Phase Angle Relevant Keys Operating Procedure Explanation Sean m V VA 1 2 3 X auTo
318. t integration 42 eterne eitis eiie see eres ea ego replacing the fuse only for WT130 sse 14 13 r sponse messages iacet idi stet tos eese et aiaa App2 3 responses to interface messages sese 11 2 OA 1 RMS x saab e ALS DER AR RE EERe andn 4 1 RMT zn RERO App2 3 RS 232 C anterface iie esent deett dern 12 1 RS 232 C interface specifications sse 12 1 Tubber feed aoa Quee eee eo npe tags 3 S T talk only function eee erede deer eere ennt niia talk only mode GP IB eese talk only mode RS 232 C termin tOr 5 eceieenini e be e HERE Fe Reine Eres an top View iae Gani paie ns Ghia e needed bec ene transition filter turning the comparator function ON eee 10 16 values of harmonic analysis display verifying the Tanger e edle ree epe teeth voltage display cosccsscsiesssccssissicssseccsscizessesstacassoecsscsscsdensevessavadaneseses voltage frequency display W watt NOUT oec Set ve ebbe e EH ERE QNS 7 1 Waveform type itis inicie sette toe ie re IR Hehe eds 4 2 Safety precautiOn eroe err etr PR EVI eee ores 4 sample number ee dee e a IR E eR eae 4 11 sample program before IEEE488 2 1987 Appl 10 sample program IEEE488 2 1987 sss App2 40 sc ling f uncti n 2 iier de eter deterrere ene so dades 4 7 scaling function with external sens esse
319. t of various data Overview of the GP IB Interface The table below shows functions that are available in each mode Mode Function Addressable mode mode A and mode B Listener Functions performed by key operations 488 2 mode except for LOCAL key and power ON OFF measured computed analysis data output request setting parameters output request error code output request Talker measured computed analysis data output setting parameters output error code output status byte output Talk only mode Talker measured computed analysis data output Addressable Mode A Data is output when the data output request command OD is received This mode enables transmission of data at a specified time Addressable Mode B This mode does not require a measured data inquiry command When data is requested by the controller personal computer etc the data is output as the display is updated when measurement is completed Therefore if an attempt is made to transmit data at intervals shorter than the display intervals the controller is forced to wait until the next display interval 488 2 Mode This mode allows commands conforming to the IEEE St d 488 2 1987 protocol to be used Talk only Mode This mode does not require a controller Data is output at certain intervals This interval can be set to any length This mode is useful when the instrument is connected to a listener only device such as a printer Print Mode This
320. t order current Phase angle between the 2nd order current and Ist order current Phase angle between the 50 or 30 th order current and the 1st order current e 0 Each data is divided by a comma and ended by the terminator lt RMT gt IM 253401 01E App2 25 Z SPUBWLUOD uomneoiunuiuo Appendix 2 3 Commands Output Example of Harmonic Analysis Data Output example for model 253503 after having sent the following commands Refer also to page 10 19 for output example of external plotter Sent Received data Data contents MEASURE HARMONICS ITEM PRESET VPATTERN MEASURE HARMONICS VALUE 60 00E 00 12 01E 00 49 98E 00 49 62E 00 0 03E 00 5 50E 00 0 01E 00 1 99E 00 0 02E 00 1 01E 00 0 01E 00 0 62E 00 0 00E 00 0 41E 00 0 00E 00 0 30E 00 0 00E 00 0 22E 00 0 00E 00 0 17E 00 0 00E 00 0 14E 00 0 00E 00 0 12E 00 0 00E 00 0 09E 00 0 00E 00 0 08E 00 0 00E 00 0 07E 00 0 01E 00 0 06E 00 0 00E 00 0 05E 00 0 00E 00 0 04E 00 0 00E 00 0 05E 00 0 00E 00 0 03E 00 0 00E 00 0 03E 00 0 01E 00 0 03E 00 0 00E 00 0 03E 00 0 00E 00 0 02E 00 0 00E 00 0 02E 00 0 00E 00 0 02E 00 0 00E 00 0 06E 00 11 09E 00 0 02E 00 4 01E 00 0 03E 00 2 03E 00 0 01E 00 1 24E 00 0 01E 00 0 82E 00 0 01E 00 0 60E 00 0 00E 00 0 45E 00 0 01E 00 0 35E 00 0 01E 00 0 28E 00 0 00E 00 0 23E 00 0 01E 00 0 19E 00 0 01E 00 0 16E 00 0 01E 00 0 14E 00 0 01E 00 0 11E 00 0 01E 00 0 10E 00 0 01E 00 0 08E 00 0 01E 00 0 0
321. tegration is reached the integrated value and integration elapsed time are reset automatically and restarted immediately Integration stops when the preset time for integration is reached however the integrated value and integration elapsed time are reset automatically and restarted immediately after having pressed the STOP key when the integrated value reaches the maximum of 999999MWh MAh or when the integrated value of negative polarity reaches 99999MWh MAh Integration holds the integration elapsed time and integrated values at the point where they reached the maximum or at the point where the STOP key was pressed will be held until the RESET key is pressed Integrated value Integration time Hold lt gt lt gt Integration Integration Integration timer preset timer preset timer preset time time time Start Stop Reset Integration Methods Each display update interval 250ms the apparent power values or current values are added to the integrated values and will be time converted The integration equations are as follows Power integration t y Wi x 4x3600 Wi Active power between display update interval t Preset integration time Current integration Y Ai x 4x3600 Ai Current value between display update interval t Preset integration time 7 2 IM 253401 01E 7 1 Integrator Functions Display Resolution during Integration
322. ter W3 IM 253401 01E 4 13 SUOIIDUOD JUsWaINSeE Bues mn 4 7 Using the Four Arithmetical Operation Function Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later Useful when setting a function other than VA apparent power for display A and displaying VA on display C 41114 Displays the result of display A x display B Computation example Display A Display B Display C Wiring method Virms Airms VirmsxAirms Absolute value of the impedance Hb Displays the result of display A display B Computation example Any Display A Display B Display C Wiring method Vi Airm gems An um I A1rms y SOURCE amp Voltage ratio across the wires and phase current ratio for a three phase wiring AZI b Displays the result of display A display B Computation example Display A Display B Display C Wiring method Virms Virms A3rms 303W A3rms Airm A3rms oe s A3rms SOURCE LOAD Impedance resistance and reactance AT h Displays the result of display A display B Computation example Display A Display B Display C Wiring method VA1 VA1 Airms Z Aims Any W1 W1 Adrms R Atrms 2 Var1 Var1 Airms IXI Arms SOURCE Q Resistance 477274 Displays the result of display A display B Computation example Display A Display B Display C Wiring method Virm wi BONN An w y SOURCE LOAD A 4 14 IM 253401 01E 4 8 Com
323. tes current range mz4 0 5 A range 5 1 A range 2 A range 5 A range 10 A range 20 A range 50 mV range only when equipped with option EX2 16 100 mV range only when equipped with option EX2 17 200 mV range only when equipped with option EX2 18 2 5 V range only when equipped with option EXI 19 5 V range only when equipped with option EXI 20 10 V range only when equipped with option EXI RA terminator RA9 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Changing of the current range is not allowed while integration is in progress execution error 13 will occur The 50 mV 100 mV and 200 mV or 2 5V 5V and 10V ranges are for the external sensor When using any of these ranges be sure to set a valid sensor value using the SA command While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur SCOND Initializes setting parameters RC lt terminator gt Sets the recall function ON OFF or inquires about the current setting RO m lt terminator gt m indicates recall ON or OFF m 0 recall OFF 1 recall ON RO lt terminator gt ROI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the recall interval inquires about the current setting RR m1 m2 m3 terminator m1 indicates the hour 0 m1 lt 99 m2 indicates the minutes 0 m2 59 m3 indicates the seconds 0 lt m3 lt 59 Query Example
324. the controller A response message is sent in one of the following two forms Response consisting of a header and data If the query can be used as a program message without any change a command header is attached to the query which is then returned Example INTEGRATE MODE PMT INTEGRATE MODE NORMAL lt RMT gt Response consisting of data only If the query cannot be used as a program message unless changes are made to it i e it is a query only command no header is attached and only the data is returned Some query only commands can be returned after a header is attached to them Example STATUS ERROR PMT 0 NO ERROR RMT When returning a response without a header It is possible to remove the header from a response consisting of a header and data The COMMunicate HEADer command is used to do this Abbreviated form Normally the lower case part is removed from a response header before the response is returned to the controller Naturally the full form of the header can also be used For this the COMMunicate VERBose command is used The part enclosed by is also omitted in the abbreviated form 2 2 5 Data A data section comes after the header A space must be included between the header and the data The data contains conditions and values Data is classified as below Data Description Decimal Value expressed as a decimal number Example PT setting CONFigure SCALin
325. the current setting Syntax RECall INTerval lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt String gt RECall INTerval lt NRf gt lt NR gt lt NR f gt 0 0 0 to 99 59 59 lt String gt HH MM SS HH hour MM minutes SS seconds Example RECALL INTERVAL 0 0 0 RECALL INTERVAL 00 00 00 RECALL INTERVAL RECALL INTERVAL 0 0 0 Description Even when the interval has been set to 0 0 0 the interval becomes 250ms in case of normal measurement and 1s in case of harmonic analysis RECall PANel Function Retrieves the set up parameters file Syntax RECall PANel lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 4 file number Example RECALL PANEL 1 RECall STATe Function Turns recalling ON OFF queries the current setting Syntax RECall STATe lt Boolean gt RECall STATe Example RECALL STATE ON RECALL STATE RECALL STATE 1 Z SPUBWLUOD uoreoiunuiuo IM 253401 01E App2 27 Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 11 RELay Group The commands in the RELay group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about the comparator function This allows you to make the same settings and inquiries as when using the lower menus of OUTPUT rELAY This group is only useful in case your instrument is equipped with the CMP option
326. the display for comparator ON DY lt terminator gt DYI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the element for display A inquires about the current setting EA m terminator m indicates element m Element 1 2 Element 2 for model 253503 only 3 Element 3 for WT130 only 4 3 for WT130 only EA terminator EAI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the element for display B inquires about the current setting EB m terminator m indicates element m Element 1 2 Element 2 for model 253503 only 3 Element 3 for WT130 only 4 gt for WT130 only EB terminator EBI Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value Sets the element for display C inquires about the current setting App1 2 IM 253401 01E Appendix 1 1 Commands Syntax Query Example Description EC m terminator m indicates element m 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for model 253503 only 3 Element 3 for WT130 only 4 gt for WT130 only EC terminator ECI gt Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value E ST interface message GET d Syntax Description FL FL Syntax Query Example Description HD HD Syntax Query Example Description H H Syntax Query Example Description HA HA Syntax Query Example Description Generates a tri
327. the measuring input and the ground become as follows Voltage across A V and A side input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max Voltage across V terminal and ground 600 Vrms max Put the protective cover on the connector when this function is not used IM 253401 01E 11 1 11 2 Responses to Interface Messages Responses to Interface Messages IFC Interface Clear Unaddresses talker and listener REN Remote Enable Transfers the instrument from local control to remote control GTL Go To Local Transfers the instrument from remote control to local control SDC Selective Device Clear DCL Device Clear Cleasrs GP IB input output buffer and resets an error The set up information and measurement state are not affected DCL is applicable to all devices on the bus whilst DSC is applicable to designated devices only GET Group Execute Trigger Same function as the TRIG key LLO Local Lockout Invalidates the LOCAL key on the front panel to inhibit transfer from remote control to local control Switching between Remote and Local Mode When switched from local to remote mode The REMOTE indicator will light up and all panel keys except the LOCAL key cannot be operated Set up parameres entered in the local mode will be retained When switched from remote to local mode The REMOTE indicator will extinguish and all panel keys can be operated Set up parameters entered in the remote mode will be retained Va
328. the threshold level for the relay output item in case of harmonic analysis queries the current setting Syntax RELay HCHannel lt x gt THReshold lt NRf gt lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NR gt 0 000E 00 to 9 999E 09 RELAY HCHANNEL1 THRESHOLD 600 0E 00 RELAY HCHANNEL1 THRESHHOLD RELAY HCHANNEL1 THRESHOLD 600 0E 00 Description The mantissa of the setting value is rounded a follows Less than 1 000 Rounded to the third digit left of the Example decimal 1 000 to 9999 Rounded to the fourth significant digit RELay MODE Function Sets the mode of the comparator function queries the current setting Syntax RELay MODE SINGle DUAL RELay MODE Example RELAY MODE DUAL RELAY MODE gt RELAY MODE DUAL RELay NCHannel lt x gt Function Queries all settings related to the relay output items in case of normal measurement Syntax RELay NCHannel lt x gt x 1 to 4 RELAY NCHANNEL2 RELAY NCHANNEL2 FUNCTION A 1 THRESHOLD 20 00E 00 Example RELay NCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion Function Sets the function of the relay output item in case of normal measurement queries the current setting Syntax RELay NCHannel lt x gt FUNCtion lt normal measurement function lt NRf gt ELEMent lt 1 3 gt SIGMa OFF lt x gt 1 to 4 lt normal measurement function gt V A W VA VAR PF DEGRee VHZ AHZ WH WHP WHM AH AHP AHM MATH VPK APK RELAY NCHANNEL3 FUNCTION W 1 RELAY NCH
329. the wiring system inquires about the current setting WRm lt terminator gt m stands for wiring system m 0 363W for 253502 253503 only 1 3 4W for 253503 only 3 13W for 253502 253503 only 4 3V3A for 253503 only WR terminator WRO Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value IM 253401 01E App1 15 Spueuuulo uoieorunuuulo2 Appendix 1 3 For Users Using Communication Commands of Digital Power Meter 2533E Output Items To read measurement data using the 2533E communication program the WT110 130 addressable mode B must be set Output items do no match those displayed on each display as in the WT110 130 but match those set for ch 1 to ch 3 in output function setting for the WT110 130 Select output items according to the 2533E communication programs Note WT110 130 output items for ch 4 and subsequent ch nos are not output For details regarding the setting of output items refer to page 11 10 Data Output Format Data consists of a 12 byte header and 12 bytes of data The entire data output format is shown below ch 1 header ch 1 data ch 2 header ch 2 data ch 3 header ch 3 data Header Section h1 h2 h3 h4 hS h6 h7 h8 h9 h10 h11 h12 h1 to h2 Output channel DA chl DB ch2 DC ch3 h3 to h4 Data type 1 V voltage 8 HzA current frequency 15 HMS integratio
330. tical Operations Function Displays the following computation results on display C 4 is displayed at the front when the computation results are being displayed Arb A B A B A B Hub AxB RIb DASB Alb 2 A B R g b N B A B indicates display A B respectively Note The meanings of the displayed symbols are as follows Addition i Subtraction x Multiplication _ Division 1 Exponent Ifthe display A function is displaying INTEG TIME elapsed time of integration the computation result displays no data Ifthe value of display B function is less than 0 0001 of the rating the computation result displays oF 4 12 IM 253401 01E 4 7 Using the Four Arithmetical Operation Function Applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM Version 2 01 or later Application Example Power summation HF h Displays the result of display A display B Computation example Display A Display B Display C Wiring method W1 W2 or W3 W1 W2 Any or W1 W3 w1 Converter W2 ZIL WS Power loss H h Displays the result of display A display B Computation example 1 Display A Display B Display C Wiring method W1 W3 W1 W3 Any W1 Converter W3 Computation example 2 Display A Display B Display C Wiring method W W1 W3 W2 x W W2 33W W1 Converter w2 w3 Computation example 3 Display A Display B Display C Wiring method W2 W W1 W3 W2 YW 303W w1 w2 Conver
331. tings as when using the HOLD key on fhe front panel EDES sous E SAMPle Function Queries all settings related to sampling Syntax SAMP le Example SAMPLE gt SAMPLE HOLD 0 SAMPle HOLD Function Sets to hold the output of data display communication queries the current setting Syntax SAMPle HOLD lt Boolean gt SAMPle HOLD Example SAMPLE HOLD ON SAMPLE HOLD gt SAMPLE HOLD 1 App2 30 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands 2 3 13 STATus Group The commands in the STATus group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about the communication status There is no corresponding operation using the front panel Refer to appendix 2 4 for status reports o C EESE gt Space Register A card I CES O0 P Fitter gt lt x Spaces QMESsage lt Space gt OFF STATus STATus ERRor Function Queries all settings related to the status of Function Queries the occurred error code and message communication Syntax STATus ERRor Syntax STATus Example STATUS ERROR 9113 Undefined header Example STATUS STATUS EESE 0 FILTER1 NEVER FILTER2 NEVER FILTER3 NEVER STATus FILTer x FILTER4 NEVER FILTER5 NEVER Function Sets the transit filter que
332. tion The communication devices of this instrument are initialized when the C command is received following reception of the lt ESC gt code 1BH IM 253401 01E 12 7 eoeyelu 9 c c SH H 13 1 Back up of Set up Parameters In order to protect set up parameters in case of a power failure and such this instrument is equipped with a lithium battery which protects these parameters The following set up parameters are being kept Wiring method Voltage range Current range Measurement mode of voltage and current Data hold Filter ON OFF Scaling ON OFF PT CT scaling value External sensor scaling value Averaging ON OFF Averaging type Averaging sample number attenuation constant Computing Equation of MATH function applies to WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later Display function element for each display Integration mode Integration timer preset time Integration value Integration elapsed time Data stored in internal memory Storage interval Recalling interval Output items for plotter communication Harmonic analysis ON OFF only when equipped with the harmonic analysis option PLL source only when equipped with the harmonic analysis option D A output items only when equipped with the D A output option D A integration preset time only when equipped with the D A output option Comparator determination function only when equipped with the comparator option Comparator determination limit value
333. tion is not allowed 270 Macro error Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 272 Macro execution error Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 273 Illegal macro label Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 275 Macro definition too long Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 276 Macro recursion error Does not conform to the macro function specified in IEEE488 2 277 Macro redefinition not allowed Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 278 Macro header not found Does not conform to the macro definition specified in IEEE488 2 Error in communication Query 400 to 499 Code Message Action Reference Page 410 Query INTERRUPTED Check transmission reception order App2 3 420 Query UNTERMINATED Check transmission reception order App2 3 430 Query DEADLOCKED Limit the length of the program message including lt PMT gt to App2 4 1024 bytes or less 440 Query UNTERMINATED after Do not enter any query after IDN and OPT Errors in Execution 800 to 899 indefinite response Codes Message Action Reference Page 813 to 819 Invalid operation Refer to 14 4 14 11 830 to 833 Internal memory access error Refer to 14 4 14 11 841 to 847 Integrator execute error Refer to 14 4 14 11 Error in System Operation 912 Code 912 Message Action Fatal error in Communication driv
334. to Voltage range sets voltage auto range Current range RAm Range current A sets current range AAm Auto current A range sets current auto range SAm Sensor Ampere Display range DR Display Range Measurement mode MNm MeaN Filter FLm FiLter Hold HDm sampling HolD Trigger E or ST or lt GET gt Display DAm Display A function DBm Display B function DCm Display C function EAm Element display A EBm Element display B ECm Element display C Scaling SCm SCaling KVm K Amplre KAm K Wattage KWm K Voltage Averaging AGm AveraGing ATm Averaging Type ACm Averaging Coefficient MATH MTm MaThematics sets external sensor sets external sensor sets external sensor sets filter ON OFF holds display and output data trigger selects function to be displayed on display A selects function to be displayed on display B selects function to be displayed on display C selects element to be displayed on display A selects element to be displayed on display B selects element to be displayed on display C sets scaling ON OFF sets the scaling value sets averaging ON OFF selects exponential averaging or moving averaging sets attenuation constant or averaging number Sets computing equation Integration IS Integrate Start IP Integrate stoP IR Integrate Reset ICm Integrate Continuous TMm1 m2 integrate TiMer starts integration Stops integration resets integration sets integration mode sets integration preset
335. to element 1 EL2 Select this when the scaling values should only be applied to element 2 This selection will not appear on model 253502 EL3 Select this when the scaling values should only be applied to element 3 End Select this when you finished the setting or when you want to abort the setting Setting the Scaling Value The scaling values are set in the following order The setting ranges from 0 001 to 1000 The initial value is 1 000 P Sets the PT ratio on display A e C Sets the CT ratio on display B F Sets the power value on display C In case of the WT110 pressing the ENTER key after setting P C and F respectively will end this scaling setting In case of the WT130 selecting End at the input element menu will end this scaling setting Turning Scaling ON OFF Select the scaling menu once again after having set the scaling values The initial value is oFF e on When this setting is selected pressing the ENTER key will start scaling and the SCALING indicator will light oFF When this setting is selected pressing the ENTER key will stop scaling and SCALING indicator will extinguish Note When the scaling value x measurement range exceeds 9999M the computation over display will appear refer to page 2 3 IM 253401 01E 4 7 suonpuo 1ueujeunsee y Bumes a 4 5 Selecting the Measurement Range and Setting the Scaling Value when External Sensor is Used option Relevant Keys
336. to make the same settings and queries as when using the FUNCTION key or ELEMENT key on the front panel cogn O C DISPlay y Jo ME NE Space C VALue gt Wo i FUNCtion gt Space lt Display function EE ELEMent lt Space NRf MELLE ug DISPlay lt x gt DISPlay lt x gt MODE Function Queries all the display settings Function Sets the contents of the display queries the current Syntax DISPlay lt x gt setting lt x gt 1 to 3 Syntax DISPlay lt x gt MODE VALue RANGe ESCaling l Display A DISPlay lt x gt MODE 2 Display B lt x gt 1 to 3 3 Display C l Display A Example DISPlayl DISPLAY1 MODE VALUE FUNCTION 2 Display B V ELEMENT 1 3 Display C VALue displays measurement data DISPlay x ELEMent RANGe displays the present range of voltage Function Sets the element to be displayed queries the current and current or the scaling values of the setting external sensor of element 1 Syntax DISPlay lt x gt ELEMent lt NRf gt SIGMa ESCaling displays the scaling values of the DISPlay lt x gt ELEMent current external sensor lt x gt 1 to 3 Example DISPLAY1 MODE VALUE l Display A 2 Display B 3 Display C lt NR gt 1 WT110 single phase model 1 3 WT130 three phase three wire model 1 to 3 WT130 three phase four wire model Example DISPLAY1 ELEMENT
337. ttempt is made to start integration when integration is already in progress execution error 42 will occur If a voltage or current peak overflow or overrange takes place when an attempt is made to start integration execution error 46 will occur and integration will not be started While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur KV KV KA KA KW KW A Syntax Query Example Description MN MN Syntax Query Example Description Sets the scaling constant inquires about the current setting KV is used for voltage measurement KA for current measurement and KW for power measurement When CMO is set KVn terminator KAn terminator KWn terminator When CMI is set KVm n terminator KAm n terminator KWm n terminator m indicates element m 0 All elements Setting not allowed during inquiry 1 Element 1 2 Element 2 for model 253503 only 3 Element 3 for WT130 only indicates scaling value 0 001 n 1000 When CMO is set KV terminator KA terminator KW terminator When CMI is set KVI terminator KA2 terminator KW3 terminator When CMO is set KV1 000 KA1 000 KW1 000 When CM1 is set KV1 1 000 KA2 1 000 KW3 1 000 Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value n must be floating point or integer Error 12 will occur when an inquiry is made if the scaling values set for ea
338. u gt lt Space gt lt NRf gt G m O lt Space gt OFF D a lt NRf gt Space C LiNear D C NRf 606 1 App2 14 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 3 Commands CONFigure Function Queries all the settings related to the measurement conditions Syntax CONFigure Example CONFIGURE CONFIGURE WIRING P1W3 MODE RMS VOLTAGE RANGE 600 0E 00 AUTO 1 CONFIGURE CURRENT RANGE 20 0E 00 AUTO 1 ESCALING ELEMENT1 50 00E 00 ELEMENT2 50 00E 00 ELEMENT3 50 00E 00 CONFIGURE FILTER 0 SCALING STATE 0 PT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFIGURE SCALING CT ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFIGURE SCALING SFACTOR ELEMENT1 1 000E 00 ELEMENT2 1 000E 00 ELEMENT3 1 000E 00 CONFIGURE AVERAGING STATE 0 TYPE LINEAR 8 CONFigure AVERaging Function Queries all the setting values related to the averaging function Syntax CONFigure AVERaging Example CONFIGURE AVERAGING gt CONFIGURE AVERAGING STATE 0 TYPE LINEAR 8 CONFigure AVERaging STATe Function Sets averaging ON OFF or queries the current status Syntax CONFigure AVERaging STATe lt Boolean gt CONFigure AVERaging STATe CONFIGURE AVERAGING STATE OFF CONFIGURE AVERAGING STATE gt CONFIGURE AVERAGING STATE 0 Example CONFigure AVERaging TYPE Function Sets the averaging type and constant
339. uency of the current standard to 60Hz the output current to 1A and output the current 3 Set the frequency of the voltage standard to 900Hz the output voltage to 15V and output the voltage 4 Set the displayed number on display A of this instrument to 15 5 Set the display function of display B to V and verify that the displayed value lies within the specifications In case of the WT130 verify each element 1 2 and 3 6 If required change the ch1 setting of the synchronizer and the frequency of the current standard and verify another number 7 Turn the output of the voltage and current standard OFF Verification of Functions Auto Range Operation 1 Set the voltage or current range of this instrument to Auto range In case of no voltage or current input the voltage range will become 15V and the current range will become 0 5A automatically 2 Press the V RANGE key to verify the 15V range and then press this key once more 3 Press the A RANGE key to verify the 0 5A range and then press this key once more 4 Connect the output terminal of the voltage standard either AC or DC to the voltage input terminal of this instrument and connect the current standard to the current input terminal 5 Set the output voltage of the voltage standard to 600V and output this voltage as the measured voltage value for approx 1 5 seconds 6 Verify that the display shows and then changes to 600V 7 Turn the output of the voltage standard OFF
340. unchanged However as soon the hold function is turned off or a trigger is activated the integrated results of the time when integration was stopped will be displayed or output Displayed value xut Dotted line shows integrated value Integration preset time START STOP RESET Relation between Integration Reset and the START STOP key The relation between integration reset and the start stop key is as follows Auto stop Reset Interrupt Reset Interrupt Restart Start Restart Integrated value Preset time for integration gt Integration preset time START STOP START STOP RESET START RESET IM 253401 01E 7 7 uone4Beju Hg 7 4 Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function Backup During Power Failures If there is a power failure while integration is in progress the integrated value and integration elapsed time will be backed up When the power is restored the display will show the integrated results up to the time the power failure occurred To start integration after the power is restored it is necessary to reset integration first Operating Restrictions during Integration Certain key operations are restricted during integration and are shown below Integration status Integration Integration in Integration reset progress interrupted START Indicator X Not lit Lit Not lit STOP Indicator Not lit Not lit Lit Fu
341. until that point will be kept Setting D A Output Selecting D A output function 1 Display C SETUP 2 ta nn SHIFT OUTPUT 3 n Selecting output format P suE g Display C 5 v d FH gt ENTER Bem ENTER Lr ou 4 Cree End f rELRH XI E Selecting default setting y SEL f Select desired item Selecting output channel Selecting output item Display B 2 7 Display C 11 ch i ENTER H ENTER che Ai 6 12 ch J 8 P 412 A c h H HR r i v zt Lc f ch 5 HA i 1 When you press the ENTER key at step 11 ch amp PF the output channel displayed at display B will change to the next channel i e from ch1 to ch2 Eo HFrH and so forth m nc 2 The number of channels depends on the ch B Hired i installed options In case of option DA4 or ch H Ph CMP there are four channels in case of option ES j DA12 there are twelve channels available chid Ah 3 Depends on the model number Refer to the hil den specifications section for more details S 4 Displayed on WT110 WT130 with ROM version Eh ld HP 2 01 or later M RE d 4 fi Ht H Phk Ph Ahr s f Hh t 8 V A Sets the A column SEA V Moves to the B column X E SHIFT gt c 13 10 v A Select from 1 to 4 3 End gt ENTER End
342. uous integration mode is selected make sure that the timer preset time is set to a value larger than 0 If normal integration mode is selected set the timer preset time to any desired value While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Specifies which causes will be allowed to generate a status byte inquires about the current setting IM m terminator m is assigned as follows 0 m lt 15 m 1 Computation end 2 Integration end 4 Syntax error 8 0VER IM terminator IMIS e Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value f more than one of these causes is to be allowed set m to the sum of their individual m values For instance if all causes are to be allowed set m to 15 1 2 4 8 Stops integration IP terminator f an attempt is made to stop integration when integration has already been interrupted stopped execution error 44 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur Spueuuulo uoieorunuuulo2 Resets integration IR terminator f an attempt is made to reset integration while integration is in progress execution error 45 will occur While recalling or storing is in progress execution error 19 will occur IM 253401 01E App1 3 Appendix 1 1 Commands IS Syntax Description Starts integration IS lt terminator gt If an a
343. ust refer to the User s Manual In the User s Manual these symbols appear on the pages to which the operator must refer Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the danger of serious injury or death to the user C AUTI ON Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the danger of minor or moderate injury to the user or the damage to the property Note Provides information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Displayed Characters on the 7 Segment LED In order to display all numbers and alphabetic characters on the 7 segment LED some of them are displayed in a slightly altered format For details refer to section 1 3 Markings used for Descriptions of Operations Relevant Keys Indicates the relevant panel keys and indicators to carry out the operation Oper ating Procedure The procedure is explained by a flow diagram For the meaning of each operation refer to the example below The operating procedures are given with the assumption that you are not familiar with the operation Thus it may not be necessary to carry out all the steps when changing settings Explanation Describes settings and restrictions relating to the operation An example of an Operating Procedure 1 Display C SETUP Lann SHIFT OUTPUT 2 P aut Y dH 3 Display C 5 f r EL RY gt ENTER T T ENTER 4
344. ut format of normal measured computed data refer to page App2 24 When the harmonic analysis function is ON harmonic analysis data will be returned IM 253401 01E App2 23 Z SPUBWLUOD uoreoiunuiuo Appendix 2 3 Commands Output Format Data Format of Normal Measured Computed Data and Harmonic Analysis Data The output format data format of normal measured computed data and harmonic analysis data which is requested by MEASure NORMal VALue or MEASure HARMonics V ALue is as follows Data Format of Normal Measured Computed Data All data of the harmonic analysis function are output in the NR3 format Example 99 99E 00 V A W VA VAR PF DEGR VHZ AHZ VPK APK MATH mantissa max 4 digits exponent 2 digits WH WHP WHM AH AHP AHM mantissa max 6 digits exponent 2 digits max 5 digits in case of negative value The sign of the mantissa will only be applied in case of negative values However phase lead and lag in case of phase angle DEG will be shown as follows LEAD 180 0E 00 LAG 180 0E 00 in phase 0 0E 00 The mantissa will be proceeded by a space e n case of overrange or computation over 9 9E437 20 will be output i e in case the display shows oL oF PFErr dEGEr ErrLo or ErrHi e n case no data is present i e the display shows 9 91E 37 NAN will be output The integration elasped time is output as hours minutes sec
345. ut items yourself sets default output items sets integration time sets comparator function ON OFF Sets comparator mode sets display relay ON OFF for comparator sets the relay channel sets the output relay function for normal measurement Sets the output relay function for harmonic analysis Output relaY Harmonic function Note f commands relating to options are used on instruments which do not have the options installed Error 11 is displayed Also there are no responses to inquiries MATH is available on WT110 WT130 with ROM version 2 01 or later 11 12 IM 253401 01E 12 1 Using the RS 232 C Interface various data Overview of the RS 232 C Interface The table below shows functions that are available in each mode This instrument is equipped with a RS 232 C interface in accordance with your preference This interface permits remote control from a controller such as a personal computer and output of Mode Function Normal mode Reception Functions performed by key operations except for LOCAL key and power ON OFF measured computed analysis data output request setting parameters output request error code output request Transmission error code output status byte output measured computed analysis data output setting parameters output Talk only mode Transmission measured computed analysis data output Normal Mode This mode is equivalent to the the addressable mode
346. utput 9 DA 5ch Output 21 DA 6ch Output 10 DA 3ch Output 22 DA 4ch Output 11 DA ch Output 23 DA 2ch Output 12 DA COM 24 DA COM s Signal 1 DIGITAL COM 13 DIGITAL COM Rear panel 2 EXT HOLD Input 14 EXT TRIG Int Remote control input circuit 3 EXT START Input 15 EXT STOP Input 4 EXT RESET Input 16 INTEG BUSY Output ANV 5 No Connection 17 No Connection 10kW 6 No Connection 18 No Connection 1002 7 No Connection 19 No Connection O 00 ANN 8 No Connection 20 No Connection ar 0 01 gu 9 No Connection 21 No Connection 10 DA 3ch Output 22 DA 4ch Output 11 DA ich Output 23 DA 2ch Output yiri 8v 12 DA COM 24 DA COM H 2 0 to 5V Remote control output circuit 5V ep 1000 ANY TTL level L 0 to 0 4V 8mA H 2 4 to 5V 4004A CMP specifications for WT110 130 253401 253502 253503 remote control 4 channel D A output 4 channel comparator output Pin No Signal Pin No Signal 1 DIGITAL COM 13 DIGITAL COM 2 EXT HOLD Input 14 EXT TRIG Input 3 RELAY S3chrNC 15 RELAY 4chpNC 4 cou 16 COM 5 NO 17 NO 6 RELAY 1ch NC 18 RELAY 2chrNC 7 cou 19 COM 8 NO 20 NO 9 No Connection 21 No Connection 10 DA 3ch Output 22 DA 4ch Output 11 DA ich Output 23 DA 2ch Output 12 DA COM 24 DA COM The connectors used in this function have protective covers When the covers are removed or when using connectors the voltage rating
347. utput example of harmonic analysis data Refer to the previous page for a description 1 Order r Model M 253503 HRM V Range 15V A Range 0 5A Function V 1 Sync PLL V1 Freq V1 2 60 00 Hz Vi rms 5 76 V A1 rms 14 mA wi 0 001 W DEG1 LEAD 153 8 deg PF1 0 897 V1 THD IEC 15 71 A1 THD IEC oF Avg EXP 8 OFF Scaling OFF THHHHHHE Harmonic Voltage List Or Volt V Cont Or Volt V Cont 95 1 5 69 2 0 09 1 60 3 0 68 12 02 4 0 04 0 74 5 0 32 5 63 6 0 16 2 77 7 0 06 1 05 8 0 11 2 01 9 0 12 2 15 10 0 09 1 65 11 0 17 2 96 12 0 08 1 47 13 0 02 0 39 14 0 01 0 25 15 0 02 0 43 16 0 01 0 25 17 0 04 0 63 18 0 02 0 41 19 0 07 1 15 20 0 07 1 31 21 0 07 1 15 22 0 02 0 31 23 0 11 1 93 24 0 10 1 84 25 0 08 1 39 26 0 05 0 85 27 0 06 1 04 28 0 06 0 97 29 0 08 1 44 30 0 09 1 59 31 0 06 1 03 32 0 02 0 36 33 0 06 1 08 34 0 06 1 06 35 0 00 0 02 36 0 03 0 57 37 0 04 0 77 38 0 04 0 72 39 0 04 0 74 40 0 07 1 24 41 0 01 0 26 42 0 02 0 40 43 0 01 0 14 44 0 06 1 04 45 0 05 0 94 46 0 02 0 43 47 0 07 1 18 48 0 05 0 94 49 0 07 1 30 50 0 06 1 09 Analysis Value 3HHHE Harmonic Spectrum Voltage 10 20 IM 253401 01E 11 1 Using the GP IB Interface This instrument is equipped with a GP IB interface in accordance with your preference This interface permits remote control from a controller such as a personal computer and outpu
348. valid before the power was turned OFF Any of Addr A Addr b tonL Y Print can be displayed YES 2 Displays the setting valid before the power was turned OFF Ready for measurement Any of nor tonly Print can be displayed 3 14 IM 253401 01E 3 9 Selecting the Wiring Method for WT130 Relevant Keys A hour min SAMPLE m V VA 12 3 sAuD o auto c V OVER k A Var FUNCTION ELEMENT Displays A OVER M W TIME CJ C JJ MODE TRIG relevant MODE keys and aus mv F 1 2 33 z Y jJ r indicator V MEAN k A deg Function ELEMENT _ T o NIEGRATOR md MW START STOP RESET HARMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET e hour min sec 2 REMOTE n mv H 12 3r LOCAL SETUP k A h Function ELEMENT INTERFACE OUTPUT MW ht c3103W c303W c3 SCALING AVG c3 FILTER c3 STORE c3 RECALL HARMONICS c33064W o 3V3A jai ais Shows the operation panel of the WT130 For the differences between WT110 and WT130 refer to section 2 2 page 2 2 2 3 Explanation Wiring Method The wiring method is selectable by pressing the WIRING key The selectable wiring method depends on the model WT110 253401 This model has no such function Only one 1 input element has been installed ELEMENT1 Only single phase two wire measurement is possible WT130 253502 Pressing the WIRING key results in changing the wiri
349. value setting time accuracy specifications of final value after step change from 0 to 100 or 100 to 0 of rated range Other items Display scaling function Significant digits Selected automatically according to significant digits in the voltage and current ranges Reassign ratio 0 001 to 1000 D A ys Averaging function The following two algorithms can be selected Displayed value Output Approx 7 5V F Exponential averaging 140 Approx 7 0V Approx 7 0V p7 7 7 Moving averaging ee rt 5 0V bsssece5 Response can be set for exponential averaging the attenuation 4 00 5 0V constant can be selected and for moving averaging the number of 14095 Approx 7 0V averages N can be set to 8 16 32 or 64 Peak over range display Th alarmi LED will light up when the RMS nara greater man However for PF and deg mm B Displayed 140 of the range or the peak value is greater than 300 of the points in the range from 45 Uus 10076 gt range to 7 V and from 5 to 7 V 100 140 are not output If there is an error the output will be about 7 5 V E 4 5 0V Approx 7 0V Approx 7 5V Y 15 2 IM 253401 01E Chapter 15 Specifications 15 10 External Input optional 15 14 Total Harmonic Analysis Function optional Either EX1 or EX2 can be selected as a voltage output type current sensor EX1 2 5 5 10 V EX2 50 100 200 mV Specifications Refer to item Input
350. ve the current menu during operation press the key described under step 1 The confirmed settings made until that point will be kept Selecting initializing 1 Display C SETUP gt FLE HHL Y BLHLE fh ve eae dos nl r Sk 9 ENTER End gt Settings will be initialized Initializing Set up Parameters Set up parameters will be initialized as soon as the ENTER key is being pressed in the procedure described above The initial settings are as follows Item Initial setting Display A Display function V element 1 Display B Display function A element 1 Display C Display function W element 1 Filter OFF Measurement range Auto range Measurement mode RMS Wiring method only WT130 1F3W Hold OFF PC CT scaling value External sensor scal Averaging ing value MATH computing equation Frequency Integration Harmonic analysis option Storage recalling D A output option Comparator option Data output P 1 000 C 1 000 F 1 000 scaling ON OFF OFF 50 00A Averaging type exponential attenuation constant 8 Averaging ON OFF OFF WT110 Voltage crest factor WT130 Efficiency VHz Reset condition integration mode manual Integration preset time Ohr Omin PLL source V1 harmonic distortion factor computation format IEC element 1 Harmonic analysis function ON OFF OFF Interval Ohr Omin Osec storage recalling ON OFF OFF Output
351. when Self Selected Up to 14 normal measured computed data can be output simultaneously and the user is allowed to choose any output information type for those 14 data Each output block is of the following format Line 1 A GE Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall Line 2 ch 1 ch 2 p ch 3 j ch 4 Terminator Line 3 ch 5 j ch 6 ch 7 ch 8 Terminator Line 4 ch 9 ch 10 p ch 11 j ch 12 Terminator Line 5 ch 13 ch 14 Terminator Line 6 END Terminator Each output block usually consists of five lines six in case of recall including the block end line END However if all output types on a line are set to no output this line will be omitted reducing the number of output lines by one For example if all output items of ch 9 to ch12 are set to no output line 4 in the above example will be omitted Furthermore if any channel on a line is set to no output all data following this channel on the line will be shifted forward For example if the ch 2 on line 1 is set to no output data of ch 1 will be followed by data of ch 3 Output Format in case of Normal Measurement WT110 253401 Line 1 ume Terminator The data number will only be output in case of recall Line2 V1 data Terminator Line3 A1 data Terminator Line4 W1 data Terminator Line5 Frequency Display C Terminator
352. wires short as possible For current circuits indicated by thick lines in the wiring diagrams shown in section 3 3 use thick lead wires appropriate for the current to be measured The lead wire to the voltage input terminal should be connected as close to the load of the object under measurement as possible To minimize stray capacitance to ground route both lead wires and grounding wires so that they are as away from the instrument s case as possible 3 4 IM 253401 01E 3 4 Wiring the Measurement Circuit When applying a current to be measured directly to the input terminals of WARNING the instrument disconnect the input cable of the external sensor A voltage might be generated by the external sensor input terminal when connected A load current flows in the thick lines show in the diagrams therefore a CAUTION wire with sufficient current capacity must be used for these lines Wiring diagram for single phase two wire system 253401 253502 253503 SOURCE LOAD Input terminal ELEMENT SOURCE LOAD MOOS Input terminal ELEMENT Wiring diagram for single phase three wire system 253502 253503 E Q LOAD A ay SOURCE V Jow SOURCE LOAD A N ae T er v SOURCE v amp N je O V 6 1 Input terminal Input terminal ANZ x ELEMENT1 ELEMENTS
353. within 3 months after calibration Temperature coefficient 0 03 of range C at 5 to 18 C 28 to 40 C Display update rate 4 times s 15 3 Frequency Measurement 15 4 Communication Input V1 V2 V3 A1 A2 A3 Communication Specifications GP IB amp RS 232 C Operating principle Frequency ranges Accuracy Reciprocal coun 10 Hz to 50 kHz 0 1 of rdg iting method GP IB 1 digit Minimum input is more than 30 of rated range When an inp ON to obtain the specification accuracy ut frequency is less than 200Hz FILTER must be RS 232 C Minimum input frequency is more than 2096 of frequency measurement range Electrical specifications IEEE St d 488 2 1987 Mechanical specifications IEEE St d 488 2 1987 Interface function SH1 AH1 T5 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 CO Transmission mode Start stop synchronization Baud rate 75 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 bps IM 253401 01E 15 1 suoneouioedsg Chapter 15 Specifications 15 5 Computing Functions 15 7 Integrator Function Display resolution Depending on elapsed time value the resolution will be changed Ay P Re Pi Pi Fi Ph Angl Fre WA wen Lee teal Maximum display 99999 to 999999 MWh or MAh w Ww Modes Standard integration mode timer mode 1 Phase w VA VxA VAY w VA cos US Continuous integration mode repeat m
354. ws the relative harmonic content of the active power corresponding to the order shown on display A The display range is 0 00 to 99 99 and 100 0 to 999 9 V deg In case the fundamental 1st order is shown on display A Shows the phase angle between the 1st order of the current and the 1st order of the voltage G phase lag or d phase lead will also be displayed In case the 2nd to 50th order is shown on display A Shows the phase angle between the 1st order of the voltage and the 2nd to 50th order of each voltage A minus will be displayed in front of the order only when the 2nd to 50th order is phase lagged The display range is 180 0 to 180 0 deg A deg In case the fundamental 1st order is shown on display A Shows the same as in case of V deg In case the 2nd to 50th order is shown on display A Shows the phase angle between the 1st order of the current and the 2nd to 50th order of each current A minus will be displayed in front of the order only when the 2nd to 50th order is phase lagged The display range is 180 0 to 180 0 deg Display C V Shows each rms computed value of the 1st to 50th harmonic component of the voltage A Shows each rms computed value of the 1st to 50th harmonic component of the current WwW Shows each rms computed value of the 1st to 50th harmonic component of the active power IM 253401 01E 8 7 jeuondo uonouny sis jeuy d1UOWWeH eui Burs i o 8 4 Setting the Harmoni
355. xtended event enable register esee App2 36 extended event register sss App2 36 App2 38 Calibration 2 14 4 external connection ood a odo eoe ene ee AAEE 5 Clan tilia une cespite nS OMA LED ree UAL 28 3 external dimensions essere eterne 15 4 command RS 0D OY oes ctvertre RIT ta tt 12 7 external sensor scaling value sees 4 9 communication command IEEE488 2 1987 App2 8 communication commands before IEEE488 2 1987 Appl 1 F communication commands model 2533 Appl 15 communication function sseseeseeeeeeeeeeterteenetnennenenens ferrite COTE LR IRR IN UR GE Ns 3 comparator display N ne rage Nee ges eter ee fil et nene C MPO AU EN RUNE guises 4 3 comparator funepon T Meiste 1 comparator function ON seseseseseeeeeenrnnenetennn Ko oT MER Mte RN A fredueney measurement function seen 1 3 wey front panel 4 e A A a RAAS 2 1 computation method of harmonic distortion z dM EE E I EE 1 2 computation over display esee computation over display harmonics analysis 8 2 computing function eseeseeseseseeeeeeeneetntnn eee nneneennnnennennne 1 2 condition register need e teen App2 36 App2 38 connector RS22325C iioii oa P a NI ETT 12 2 connector s pin sequence sssesesseseeeeeeeeeeneenenenennenenennnne 10 1 contact relay output
356. xternal Sensor Input Select the external sensor function Display C Pipe RHL crm Ec Select the setting function Select all Jb PESE 3 Display C 5 Display C 9 E n 9 ENTER ca 111 gt ENTER gt ESRO gt ENTER Prater Ske A 6 V up down Ena v nREH T V cursor shift f SHIFT gt 8 decimal point shift SHIFT Set element 1 5 Display A 9 EHLH 9 ENTER 5007 9 ENTER Same as step 6 to 8 8 mentioned above Set element 3 Set element 2 13 Display C 11 Display B ENTER ESHON ENTER FORA End 12 Same as 10 Same as step 6 to 8 step 6 to 8 Selecting the Measurement Range Current with Scaling function ON In case of EX1 option In case of EX2 option Display C Display C Auta 2 Auta eg T 2g i g SE UO 03 Le Coe g 5 ge g f A I j t _ v a5 5 E iW E gi r E r ey L E 3 3 y n ERER 3 E 25 ENTER E 5g ENTER End End IM 253401 01E 4 5 Selecting the Measurement Range and Setting the Scaling Value when External Sensor is Used option Explanation Scaling Function in combination with External Sensor Input This function is useful for measuring current power and such when you are using an external sensor and have connected their output to the input elements You set the scaling value to the current or power value computed from the sensor When the scaling function is turned ON measured values which have been converted to th
357. y whether each bit of the service request enable register is 1 or 0 use SRE For details of the SRE command refer to App 2 3 App2 36 IM 253401 01E Appendix 2 4 Status Report Operation of the Status Byte A service request is issued when bit 6 of the status byte becomes 1 Bit 6 becomes 1 when any of the other bits becomes 1 or when the corresponding bit in the service request enable register becomes 1 For example if an event takes place and the logical OR of each bit of the standard event register and the corresponding bit in the enable register is 1 bit 5 ESB will be set to 1 In this case if bit 5 of the service request enable register is 1 bit 6 MSS will be set to 1 thus requesting service from the controller It is also possible to check what type of event has occurred by reading the contents of the status byte Reading from the Status Byte The following two methods are provided for reading the status byte Inquiry using the STB query Making an inquiry using the STB query sets bit 6 to MSS This causes the MSS to be read After completion of the read out none of the bits in the status byte will be cleared e Serial poll Execution of a serial poll changes bit 6 to RQS This causes RQS to be read After completion of the read out only RQS is cleared Using a serial poll it is not possible to read MSS Clearing the Status Byte No met
358. yed power value becomes the rated value Then read the displayed power value on this instrument and verify that this value lies within the specifications power factor 1 Change the phase of ch2 of the synchronizer so that the displayed power value becomes zero Then read the displayed power value on this instrument and verify that this value lies within the specifications power factor 0 When calibrating the harmonic analysis match the phase so that the displayed power value becomes the calibrated value When calibrating using a frequency of more than 60Hz set the same frequency for the synchronizer and the standard In such a case use a voltage current standard which surely has a sufficient accuracy regarding the output frequency This means to use measuring equipment with an accuracy of 3 to 4 times the specified higher accuracy of this instrument Bunoous e qnoJ pue uoneJqieo ueunsn py IM 253401 01E 14 7 14 2 Calibration Calibration of D A Output Preparation 1 2 Connect the AC voltage standard to the voltage terminal of this instrument The wiring method is the same as when adjustments are carried out see page 14 3 However calibration of the WT130 can also be carried out when only element 1 is connected Set the D A output of this instrument to V1 for each channel Calibrating 1 an A U N Connect the DMM to ch1 of the output terminal in the same way as when carrying out adjustments

Yokogawa WT110 Digital Power Meter

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents